MASTER 
NEGATIVE 
NO. 92-50720-5 


MICROFILMED 1993 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 


as part of the 
*Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project” 


Funded by the 
NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 


Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
Columbia University Library 


COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 


The copyright law of the United States - Title 17, United 
States Code - concerns the making of photocopies or 
other reproductions of copyrighted material. 


Under certain conditions specified in the law, libraries and 
archives are authorized to furnish a photocopy or other 
reproduction. One of these specified conditions is that the 
photocopy or other reproduction is not to be "used for any 
purpose other than private study, scholarship, or 
research.” If a user makes a request for, or later uses, a 
photocopy or reproduction for purposes in excess of "fair 
use, that user may be liable for copyright infringement. 


This institution reserves the right to refuse to accept a 
copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
would involve violation of the copyright law. 


AUTHOR: 


ARNOLD, THOMAS 
KERCHEVER 


TITLE: 


A PRACTICAL 


INTRODUCTION TO ... 


PLACE: 


NEW YORK 


DATE: 


1866 


Master Negative # 


COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 


Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 


-- 


’ 
Arnold, Thomas Kerchever, 1800-1853. ¢ 


A practical introduction to Greek prose composition. 
By Thomas Kerchever Arnold... Carefully rev. and cor. 
by Rev. J. A. Spencer, a. m. From the 5th London ed. 
New-York, D. Appleton & co.; Philadelphia, G. S. Apple- 
ton, 1847. 1866. 


2 p. L, tvii—x, 11)-237 p. 20. 
Another copy an meen ron brary. 1848. 


l. Greek δι Me oe and exercises. _—S_i, Spencer, Jesse 
Ames, 1816-1898, ed. = 


41773] a ἐπ νι ἢ 


Υ 
Library of Sena ς. 14: ΨΊ Pie οὶ 1847 


Restrictions on Use: 


TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 


Hi Size: ως... REDUCTION RATIO: 
IMAGE PLACEMENT: IA © IB IIB 
DATE FILMED:__ 7-13-53. INITIALS 


Se 


~ BIBLIOGRAPHIC IRREGULARITIES 7 


MAIN 


ENTRY: ἜΡΓΑ Tom th2 XK onchover 
-- μα ξεεπᾷ ratin buch cn ~~ 


Bibliographic Irrepularities in the Original Document 
List volumes and pages affected; include name of institution if filming borrowed text. 


yy Page(s) missing /not available: TS at ig BE 


Volumes(s) missing/not available: 


oe legible and/or dainaged page(s): 2-2 SZ-¢ | -Pworowop ἐς Leroy ide & 


Page(s) or volumes(s) misnumbered: 


Bound out of sequence: 


NYUG. 
Page(s) or llustration(@) filined from copy borrowed from: hlew Youle LU. LL 


VA Other: | 


tak 2 Pots oy 40... fan 5 ata 21 


FILMED IN WHOLE 
OR PART FROM A 
COPY BORROWED 


FROM NEW YORK 
UNIVERSITY 
LIBRARIES 


and Image Management 


Association for Information 


100 


Suite 1 


1100 Wayne Avenue, 


Silver Spring, Maryland 20910 


301/587-8202 


Centimeter 


© 0}. 32... 2 3 τὺ ee 


9 


2 


1 


25 


22 


ὁ 3.2 


MANUFACTURED TO AIIM STANDARDS 


BY APPLIED IMAGE, INC. 


‘4 δὰ i 


Standard Classical Works. 


SBT on 


Culumbia University 
Library 
Geury Livingston Chomas 


BORN 1835-DIED 1903 


FOR THIRTY YEARS CHIEF TRANSLATOR 

DEPARTMENT OF STATE, WASHINGTON, D. ¢ 

LOVER OF LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 

HIS LIBRARY WAS GIVEN AS A MEMORIAL 

BY HIS SON WILLIAM S. THOMAS, M.D 
TO COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 


A. D. 1905 


A60Z7Z2/8S LATIN Version ΟἹ time NeW BCSimmeUL, icmo, 


291 pages, 


Cxsar’s Commentaries on the Gallic War. — 
English Notes, Critical and Explanatory; a Lexicon, Geographical 
and Historical Indexes, and a Map of Gaul. By J. A. Spencer, 
D.D. 12mo. 408 pages, 


Cicero's Select Orations, With Notes for tho uso of Schools 
and Colleges. By E. A. Jomnson, Professor of Latin in the Uni- 


versity of New York. 12mo. 459 pages. 


Standard. Classical W orks. 


ee etter 


Cicero de Officiis, With English Notes, mostly translated from 


Zump and Bonnell, By Tuomas A. Tuacuer, of Yale College. 
12mo. 194 pages, 


Horace, The Works of. With English Notes, for the 
use of Schools and Colleges, By J. L. Lincoty, Prof. of Latin Lan- 
guage and Literature in Brown Univ’y. 12mo, 575 pages, 


Livy. Selections from the first five books, together with the 
twenty-first and twenty-second books entire. With a Plan of 
Rome, and a Map of the Passage of Hannibal, and English Notes 
for the Use of Schools, By J. L. Lixcotn, Prof. of the Latin Lan 
guage and Literature in Brown Univ’y. 12mo. 329 pages, 


Quintus Curtius: Life and Exploits of Alexander the Great. 


Edited and Illustrated with English Notes, by για Henry 
CrosBy. 12mo. 3885 pages, 


Sallust’s Jugurtha and Catiline,* With Notes and a 


Vocabulary. By Buruer and Sturcas. 12mo. 897 pages. 


It is believed that this will be found superior to any edition here- 
tofore published in this country. 


The Histories of Tacitus, With Notes for Colleges. By 
W. 8. Tyrer, Professor of Latin and Greek in Amherst College, 
12mo. 453 pages, 


Tacitus? Germania and Agricola, With Notes for Col- 
leges. By W.S.Tyzer. 12mo, 193 pages, 


Virgil’s 2Eneid,* With Explanatory Notes. By Henry 
Frieze, Professor of Latin in the State University of Michigan. 
(Recently published.) 12mo. 598 pages. 

The type is unusually large and distinct. The work contains 
eighty-five engravings, which delineate the usages, customs, weapons, 


arts, and mythology of the ancients, with a vividness that can be at- 
tained only by pictorial illustrations, 


Greek Text-Books. 


A First Greek Book* and Introductory Reader. 
By A. Harkness, Ph. D., author of “ Arnold's First Latin Book,” 
“Second Latin Book,” &c, (Recently published.) 12mo. 

276 pages. 


icy" SEE END OF THIS VOLUME. 


oe es eat at | ; 
fee Pirrt gy aie Ten yy? τς ἘΞ “Gon ; 
ar τ we 2 = ΡΨ =a i — 
Εν; Age Pr Say 
7 ᾿ - ee ae 
+ roe A Fah. ac ahaa 


PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 


GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M. A., 


RECTOR OF LYNDON, 


AND LATE FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. 


CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED 


BY 


REV. J. A. SPENCER, A. M. 


FROM THE FIFTH LONDON EDITION. 


NEW YORK: 
D. APPLETON ἃ CO., 443 ἃ 445 BROADWAY 


1866, 


ENTELED, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by 
D. APPLETON & CO., 


In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
District of New York, 


a7) Ὁ ὦ. 


An 64 


PREFACE. 


Tue plan and object of the present volume are so fully 
and so satisfactorily stated by Mr. Arnold in his Preface, 
that it is quite superfluous for the American Editor to add 
any thing to what he has there said. It is simply incum- 
bent on him to state, that he has bestowed much care and 
attention upon the volume in order to perfect its arrange- 
ment and render it uniform with the other works of the 
series, and also to ensure, as far as possible, correctness, 
neatness, and even elegance of typography. While he can 
hardly dare to promise himself that there is an entire 
absence of errors of this kind, he ventures to express the 
hope that nothing of consequence has escaped attention, and 
that the Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition 
will be found equally acceptable and equally valuable with 


any of its predecessors in the Arnold Series of Classical 


Books for Schools and Colleges. 


J. A. δ. 
New York, Noy. 20th, 1846. 


390035 


Ι 


723 Ζιιίζι.ε:.ὕ 


J i 4 i> @ 
A bi Ζε- ae om Πἢ TO THE 


PREFACE 


ENGLISH EDITION. 


Tue plan of this Introduction requires some eX- 
nlanation. Its object is to enable the student, as soon 
as he can decline and conjugate with tolerable facility, 
to translate simple sentences after given examples and 
with given words; the principles trusted to being those 
of imitation and very frequent repetition. It is at 
once a Syntax, a Vocabulary, and an Exercise-book ; 
the Syntax being in substance that of Buttmann’s ex- 
cellent School Grammar. 

One object I have steadily kept in view, that of 
making the general construction of sentences of more 
importance than the mere government of cases, which 
is nearly all that most Exercise-books pretend to teach. 
The Exercises are adapted for vivd voce practice; but 
if the book is so used, they should by all means be 
written down afterwards. The Vocabularies, if possi- 
ble, but at all events the Examples, should be com- 
mitted to memory and carefully kept up. 

It is ἄτι to Mr. Ollendorff, whose Introduction to 
German has appeared in English, to state that the pub- 
ication of a work like the present was suggested to me 


Vili PREFACE. 


by the advantage I myself derived from the use of his 
book. I had originally drawn it up exactly on his 
plan; but the probable expense of publication deterred 
me, for some time, from publishing it in that shape.” 
The present work differs therefore from his, in requir- 
ing from the pupil a general acquaintance with the 
Accidence. 

For the convenience of those who may wish to use 
the Syntax as such, I have added a complete set of 
Questions to the work. 

Tt. A 
Lyndon, 1841. 


ἃ The very great success of this work, and the similar one on 
“ Latin Prose Composition;’—which are now used at all, or nearly all, 
our public schools;—has encouraged the author to send to press the 
more elementary Exercises here alluded to, under the title of a “ Prac- 
tical Introduction to Greek Accidence.” [This volume forms the 
“First Greek Lessons,” carefully revised and improved by the Ameri- 
ean Editor.] 


CONTENTS. 


BECTION 


ODO ON OT δι ἐκ. 


On the Tenses—-The Article , 
The Article continued 
The Article continued 
The Article continued 
The Article continued 
The Article continued 


. The Article as demonstrative Pronoun—Pronouns ‘ 


Pronouns continued , ‘ is ‘ Ξ Ἀ 


. Pronouns continued . . ° : Ἶ ‘ 
. Of the Neuter Adjective. 
. Subject and Predicate [Words with which the copula is often 


omitted), . « : . 


. On the Moods Ἀ 


. The Moods continued [εἰ, 2 ἄν, &e. ] 

. The Moods continued ‘ i 

. The Moods continued 

. The Moods continued 

. The-Moods continued . 

. The Moods continued . 

. οὐ and μῆ Ὰ 

. Verbals in τέος 

. Double Accusative . 

. The Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs 


23. The Accusative continued 


. The Genitive continued 
28. The Genitive continued ° 
. Comparison . ὁ . . . 


. TheGenitive . . δ προ τῷ . . 
' The Genitive continued . : 
. The Genitive continued [γος of Verbs governing the gun] 


Voc. of Verbs governing the gen 


30. Comparison continued . 
31. The Dative [Voc. of Verbs governing ‘the dat.) 
32. The Middle Voice [Voc. of middle Verbs] 


. Middle Voice continued ‘ae of middle Verbs] 

. On the Perfect 2. [Voc. o | ᾿ 
35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and Tenses 
36. On the Infinitive 


second Perfects 


The Infinitive continued [Voe. of ἘΜ. το ἢ, 
The Infinitive continued ; ; “101 


9. The Participle [Voc. on the use of some Participles) . . . 103 


. The Participle continued [ Voc. of Verbs that take the Par ticiple) 195 


x CONTENTS. 


41. The Participle continued: τυγχάνω; λανθάνω, φθάνω [Voc, on *sAnd 
ΝΠ a eee te es μὴ wes | ee 2 
42 The Genitive Absolute, &c. [Voc. of Words used in Nom. Absol.] 
43. The Relative [Voc. on ᾽ν, ’Avé, Eis] et ἐξ 
44. The Relative continued [Voc. on Διά.] . ee 
45. ὃ οἷος σὺ ἀνήρ [ Voc. on Kara] . . 
46. οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐ Ἢ . " 5 
47. οἷος, δέω, μέλλω [Voc. on "Angi, Περῆ 
48. ὅπως, οὐ 14) [ Voc. on 'Exi] . . . . 
49. μή, μή ob TVoc. on Μετά] ales "- 
50. μή with Relatives, Infin., ἂς. [Voc. on Tapa ] 
51. Some Adverbs of Time, &c. , tet Ὃ 
52. On Interrogative Sentences | Voc. on Πρός] 
53 Indirect Single Questions [Voc. on‘Yxé] . 
54. Double Questions ; ‘ ὦ ; i. 
55. Observations on εἰ, ἐάν . ‘ ‘ ° 
56. Condensed Questions - . . 
57. Various Constructions . : ; 
58. Various constructions continued ᾿ 
59. List of Particles, &c. ᾿ : : 
Tables of Prepositions in Composition] 
Table of Differences of Idiom i” 
Questions on the Syntax . . ° 
Index [. (English) . ‘ ; ; ‘ 
Index II. (Greek Phrases explained) ᾿ 
Index III. (Irregular Nouns and Verbs) 


EXPLANATION OF ABBREVIATIONS, &c. 


B., K., M., R., T., denote respectively the Greek Grammars οἱ Butt. 
mann, Kiihner, Matthid, Rost, and Thiersch. Kr. stands for Kriiger. 

E. refers to the Eton Greek Grammar. 

R., after a declinable word, stands for root. Thus, γόνυ, R. yévar, 
means, that the regular terminations are to be added to yévar. 

V. refers to Vimel’s Synonymisches Woirterbuch. 

A Greek letter added after a verb, shows that the simpler root (as it 
appears, for instance, in aor. 2) ends in that letter. 


22: larly 


PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 
ZZ, -ὦ “Ξε 


GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. 
γι ci: ; 
αν 


§ 1. On the Tenses.— The Article. 


1. Iris taken for granted that the student knows:-= 


1) That the verb agrees with its nominative case in numder 
Θ 
and person.* ; 

(2) That every adjective word—whether adjective, participle, pro- 
noun, or article—must agree with its substantive in gender, num- 
ber, and case. 

(3) That the transitive verb is followed by the accusative. 

(4) That one substantive depending upon another is put in the 
genitive case. 

- rr’ : Ω 

(5) That any verb may have the same case after it as before it, 
when both words refer to the same person or thing. 


2. The Imperfect, besides the usual meaning of 
that tense,t is used to express continued or repeated 
actions, taking place in past time. 

3. he Aorists express actions completed in past 
time.f 


* But a dual nominative is often joined witha plural verb; and a 
neuter plural generally takes a singular verb. 

t The Imperfect expresses 1) an action continuing during another 
action which is past; 2) an action continued by being frequently re- 
peated; and (occasionally) 3) an action begun or intended, but not 
completed. (See Jelf’s Greek Gram. Vol. 11. p. 53.)—Am. Ep. 

t The Aorists mark actions simply past, without reference to other 
actions, at the same ora different time; as ἔγραψα τὴν ἐπιστολήν, “1 
wrote the letter (without specifying time or circumstance). Hence, the 
aorists referring to time past indefinitely, are used to denote momentary 
acts, and also actions repeatedly done in past time. In this latter case 
it may be rendered by the present or by the phrase “to be wont, or ac- 
tustomed,” &c. (See Jelf’s Greek Gram. Vol. 11. p. 57 )—Am. Ep. 


THE ARTICLE. 


Hence the Aorist is used of momeniary and single act:ons; the 
Imperfect, of continued and repeated ones. 

The dog bit him (aor.): the dog howled all night (imperf.) 

Oxzs. The Imperfect (of habitual actions) is often rendered by 
‘used to,’ ἄς. 

4, The Perfect expresses actions continued or re- 
maining in their effects up to the present time. 

a) Hence the aor. is nearly our perfect indefinite 
(the perf. formed by inflection): the perf. our perfect 
definite (or perfect with ‘have’ 

b) But when the connection of the past with the 
present is obvious from the context, the aorist may be 
used for the perfect; or, in a narrative, for the pluper- 
fect. 

c) It is only when a particular stress is to be :aid on 
the time of the occurrence, that the perfect or pluperf. 
must be used. All this is, hcwever, greatly influenced 
by euphony. 

5. A governed genitive is often placed between an 
article and its noun. 

6. τὸ τῆς ἀρετῆς κάλλος, the beauty of virtue. 

ὁ τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράγματα πράττων, he who traus- 
acts (or manages) the affairs of the state. 
In this way ¢éwo and even three articles stand together. 
7. ὁ πράττων, (the person doing =) he who does. 
Hence the artic. with a participle is equivalent to a personal o1 
demonstrative pronoun with a relative sentence. 
Thus, 
ὃ πράττων, equivalent to ἐκεῖνος ὃς rodrret, he who does. 
τοὺ πράττοντος, of him who does. 
&c. 
Pl. οἱ πράττοντες, equivalent to ἐκεῖνοι of πράττουσι, those who do. 


τῶν πραττόντων, of those who do 
Lc. 
8. VocABULARY 1 
Virtue, ἀρετή, ἧς, ἢ. 
Beauty, κάλλος, 06, το. 
City, ; πόλις, EWS, ἧ. 
Thing or affair, πρᾶγμα," “TOS, TO. 


® Nouns in pa from verbs, generally denote the thing produced by tha 
sct. They may be compared with the pass. participle (τὸ temoayuts ov) 


THE ARTICLE. 13 


To do, transact, manage, πράττω. 

Wonder, or am surprised ἡ ϑαυμάζω (with fut. vial, 
at, admire, but aor. 1 act.). 

Well, εὖ. 

ΠῚ, καχῶς. 

Often, frequently, πολλάκις. 

Citizen, πολίτης," ου; 0. 

Judge, κριτής, OV, ὃ. 


πράττω, do, has also the infransit. meaning of our to be doing well 
or ill: i. e. to be prosperous or unfortunate. In this sense it has 


the perf. 2. πέπραγα. The a is long throvghout. 


Evzercise 1. 


9. I admire the beauty of the city. The citizens are 
doing well. I have often admired the beauty of the 
cities. The judge often admired the beauty of virtue. 
I admire those who transact (7) the affairs of the state. 
He ‘transacts the affairs of the state ill. The citizens 
are doing ill. I have often admired the virtue of the 
citizen. ‘The citizens admire the virtue of the judge. 


§ 2. The Article continued. 


10. (a) Proper names often take the article, if they 
are the names of persons well known. 


Hence the names of Deities, Heroes, &c., generally take the arti- 
cle ; and the names of persons recently mentioned. 


11. (L) But if the proper name is followed by a de- 
scription which has the article, the proper name is 
without the article, unless it is to be expressed em- 


b Nouns in τῆς of the first decl. from verbs, denote the male doer of 
the action: those from substantives denote a person standing in any 
near relation to what is denoted by the substantive: as πολίτης from 
«dts. Those in cerns from subst., have the: long. Korris is from κρίνω 


14 THE ARTICLE. 


phatically, as being well-known, or as having been 
previously mentioned. 
12. (c) The Greek has no indefinite article (our ‘a 1. 
(4) Our ‘a’ should be translated by τίς, when a 
particular person or thing is meant, though not 
named: in other words, wherever we might substitute 
‘a certain’ for ‘a’. 
13. (e) The subject* generally has the article, the 
predicate not. 
14. (a) ὁ “Σωχράτης, Socrates ; ai ‘Adve, Athens. 
(ὁ) «ΣΣωκρᾶτης ὁ φιλόσοφος, Socrates the Philoso- 
pher. 
(c) ἵππος ἔτεκε λαγών, a mare brought forth a 
hare. 
(d) γυνή τις ὄρνιν εἶχεν, a woman (or, a certain 
woman) had a hen. 
(6) ἡ κόρη ἐγένετο ἀσκός," the girl became (or, was 
turned into) a leather bottle. 
15. VocaBuLary 2. 


Socrates, Swxpartns,’ ove, ὁ. 
Athens, A Diva, ὧν, αἱ. 
Philosopher, 


φιλόσοφος, ov, ὃ. 
Horse, mare, ' 


ἱππος, ov, ὃ et ἡ. 


Hare, λᾶγώς, ὦ, ὁ (ace. λαγῶν ΟΥ̓ 
Layo). 

Woman, γύνη, γύναικος, ἡ (voc. γύναι). 

Hen, ὄρτις,ξ ὄρνξϑος, ὁ οἱ i). 

Water, ὕδωρ, ὕδατος, τό. 


¢ Kr. who quotes Bacch. 1314: νῦν ἐκ δόμων ἄτιμος ἐκβεβλήσομαι | b 
Kadpos ὃ μέγας. 

4 That is, the nominative before the verb. The predicate is what is 
affirmed or said of the subject. (See note 9). 

© Or, ἀσκὸς ἐγένετο ἣ κόρη. So, Θεὸς ἣν ὁ Λόγ ςς, the Word was God. 
This arises from the nature of a proposition. We usually assert of a 
particular thing that it is included, as an individual, in a particular 
class ; not that it is the whole of that class. 

f Σωκράτης, G. ους, D. El, &e. A. Σ κράτη (Plato), p> Ἰκοάτηι (Xe ne- 
phon), Υ; Σώκρατες. 

ε ‘ Bird, but in Att. generally cock, hen; just as we use fowl. G. 
ὀρνῖθος, &e. A.aand ν. Plur. reg., but also doves, G. ὀρνέων, D. dpvé 
a(v) only, Ace. ὄρνεις (4pvis). 


a, 


- ——- 


~~ , 


- - — 
tL 05 τ΄ Ce eS 
- 2 


THE ARTICLE. 


Wine, οἶνος," ov, ὃ. 

Boy, son, παῖς, παιδός, ὁ. 

To have, ἔχω. 

To bring forth, or (of birds) 

to lay, 

Damsel, maiden, κόρη, NS; ἧ. 

Leather-bottle, ἀσκὸς, OV, ὃ. 

Become, γίγνομαι! (γεν). 
ον, OV, TO. 

Three, τρεῖς, τρεῖς, τρία. 


τίχτων (τεχ). 


Exercise 2. 


16. 1 admire the beauty of the hen. A (14. (d) boy 
hadahare. The water was turned into(= became) wine 
(14. (e). The hen laid three eggs. A certain damsel 
had three hens. I admire the virtue of the maiden. 
‘The hare was turned into (= became) a horse. The 
boy admires the beauty of Athens. The citizens ad- 
mire the beauty of the woman. I admire those who 
transact the affairs of Athens. I have often admired 
the virtue of Socrates. I admire Socrates the philoso- 
pher. The woman shali havea hen. The water has 


been turned into (=become) wine. A certain judge 
has three hens, 


» οἶνος, with the digamma Fotvos, vinum. So ὠόν, dFév, ovum. 


i ἔχω, ἕξω and σχήσω, ἔσχηκα. Impertf. εἶχον: aor. ἔσχον, ἐσχέθην. 
[ἔσχον, σχές (σχέ in compounds), CONV, σχῶ, σχεῖν σχών]. 
τίκτω, (τέξω) τέξομαι, τέτοκα, ἔτεκον, ἑτεκόμην. 

i γίγνομαι, γενήσομαι, γεγένημαι and γέγονα, ἐγενόμην. All intrans. for 
em born; become. ἐγενόμην and γέγονα also serve for preterites of the 
verb “ to be.” When γέγονα may be construed ‘ J am, it means, “ I am 
by birth, ‘have become.” (B.)—yceivopa, am born, poet.: aor. ἐγεινάμην 
begot, bore (in prose as well as poetry). 

* Numerals like this at the top of the line refer to the Table cf Dit 
ferences of Idiom at the close of the volume. 


THE ARTICLE. 


§ 3. Article continued. 


17. (a) When the my, thy, his, their, &c. are em 
phatie they are to be translated by possessive pronouns 
with the article. 

18. (b) My, your, his, &c. are to be translated by 
the article, when it is quite obvious whose the thing in 
question is. 


Whenever there is any opposition (as, when nine is opposed to 
yours or any other person’s) the pronouns must be used. 

19. (c) When an adj. without the article stands be- 
fore the article of the substantive, the thing spoken of 
is not distinguished from any thing else, but from 
ttself under other circumstances." 

(α) When a noun which has just preceded, is to be 
repeated again, the article belonging to it stands alone. 

19*. (a) ὁ σὸς δοῦλος, thy or your slave’ (emphatic 

and precise); but σὸς δοῦλος, a slave of 
yours (indefinite). 

(ὁ) ἀλγῶ τὴν κεφαλήν (1 am pained as to the 
head=) 7 have a pain in my head. 

(c) ἥδετο ἐπὶ πλουσίοις τοῖς πολίταις, he rejoiced 
(or was glad), when the citizens were 
wealthy, (or, on account of the citizens 
who were wealthy). 

(d) ὁ ἐμὸς πατὴρ καὶ 6 tov φίλου, my father and 
my friend’s, (literally, my father and 
the of my friend). 

20. VocABULARY 3. 

Slave, δοῦλος, ov, ὃ. 

To feel or suffer pain; to καὶ 
be pained at, 

Head, κεφαλή, ἧς, ἧ. 


ἀλγέω. 


m Thus in the example following it is not, ‘rich citizens,’ as op 


posed to other citizens; but ‘he rejoiced in their being rich; or in the 
wealth of...” &c. 


THE ARTICLE. 


To rejoice, be glad, or to 
take pleasure in, 

Wealthy, rich, 

Father, 

Friend, 

Thine, thy, 

Mine, my, 

Jaw, 

Tooth, 

Ear, 

Foot, 


Hand, 


Knee, 
Brother, 
Daughter, 
Mother, | 
Wise, cleve 
Happy; 

To love, 

To be vex 


Beautiful, 
Bad, 


ἥδομαι (with dative). 


πλούσιος," α, OV. 

πατήρ," ἐρος (ρος), ὁ. 

φίλος, ου, ὁ. 

σός, σή, σύν. 

ἐμός, ἤ, Ov. 

γνάϑος, Ov, 7. 

ὀδούς, ὄντος, ὃ. 

οὖς, ὠτός, τό. 

πούς, 10008, ὁ. 

χείρ, χειρός, (root zeg for 
G. D. dual and D. plur.) 

γόνυ, γόνατος, τό (R. γονατ). 

ἀδελφός, οὔ, ὁ. 

ϑυγάτηρ," ἔρος (ρος), 7. 

μήτηρ," ἐρος (ρ09), 7. 

σοφῦς, 7, Ov. 

εὐδαίμων, ὧν, ον. 

φιλέω. 

ἄχϑομαι, ἔσομαι, ἠχϑέσϑην 
(dative). 

καλός, ή, ὅν. 

καχός, Yy ὅν. 


Oss. 1. ἤδεσθαι and ἄχθεσθαι are more commonly followed by the 
dat.p (without a prepos.) except in the construction explained in 19. ¢ 
Oss. 2. ‘That,’ when it stands for a subst. before expressed, is tc 


be translated by the article. 


(See 19*. d.) - 


Exercise 3. 


21. The mother of the beautiful daughter has a pain 
in her jaws. Iam glad that my brothers are happy-’ 


5 Adjectives in «ws denote what belongs to, concerns, or comes το» 
what the root expresses. They are formed from substantives, and some- 


times from other adjectives in os. 


When the root ends in στ it is some- 


times changed into ¢: πλοῦτος, wealth, πλούσιος. 


© ΤΙατήρ, μήτηρ, θυγάτηρ, γαστήρ, 


throw away ε in G. and D. sing. and 


D. pl. They have V. ep, and insert 4 before σι in D. pl. 
P Αχθομαι, and in the poets ἥδομαι, are also followed by the acc., 


especially εἴ neut. promouns. 


18 THE ARTICLE. 


The father rejoiced in his son’s being wise (c). My 
friend and my brother's (d). I often have a pain in my 
foot. My mother was suffering from a pain in het 
hands (6). I am vexed that the bad are wealthy (6). 
‘The daughter loves her mother. My slave loves my 
brother’s. I admire your virtue and that of your 
friend. The beautiful damsel shall be turned into a 
horse. Iam pleased with those who transact the 
affairs of the state. He was vexed that the citizens 
were rich. I take pleasure in my danughter’s being 
beautiful (c). 


§ 4. Article continued. 


22. a) The Greeks often place the genitives between 
the noun governing and the article; or they 
repeat the article after the noun. 

b) A noun or participle is often understood, so 
that the article stands alone. 

23. a) ἡ τοῦ ποιητοῦ σοφία, OY 7 σοφία ἡ τοῦ ποιητοῦ, 
the wisdom (cleverness &c.) of the poet. ἡ 
χαλὴ κεφαλή, OF ἡ κεφαλὴ ἡ καλη" τῆς κόρης, 
the beautiful head of the maiden. 

ὃ) ᾿Αλέξανδρος ὁ Φιλίππου, Alexander the son of 
Philip (υἱός, son, understood). ὁ Σωφρονίσκου, 
the son of Sophroniscus. εἰς τὴν Φιλίππου, 
into Philip’s country (χώραν, country un- 
derstood). τὰ τῆς πόλεως, the affairs of the 
state (πράγματα understood). τὰ ἐμά, my 
affairs, my property. οἱ ἐν ἄστει, the people 
in the city, those in the city. oi σὺν τῷ 
βασιλεῖ, those with the king. 


4 Substantives in ¢z are derived from adj., and express the abstract 
notion of the adj—The other positions of the gen. are frequently met 
with: Μηδείης τὴν ἁρπαγήν. (Herod.i.3.) ἡ ἀναχώρησις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίω». 
{Thuc. i. 12.) For a partitive gen. these are the only correct positious. 

© The latter pos‘ticn gives emphasis to the adjective or dependent 
genitive. 


THE ARTICLE. 


24. VocaBULARY 4. 


Poet, 
Wisdom, cleverness, 
Alexander, 
Philip, 
Sophroniscus, 
Son, 
Country, 
Our, 
Your, 
March an army (when 
spoken of its general), 
March (of the army, and 
of a person undertaking 
an expedition) also jour- 
ney, set out, &c., 

Persian, 

Scythian, 

Cyrus, 

King, 

Madness, 

People, 

Army, 

Geometer, 

With, 

City, town, 


΄ 


ποιητής, οὔ, C. 
σοφία, ας, 7. 
᾿Αλέξανδρος, ου, ὃ. 
(ίλιππος, ov, 0. 
“ΣΣωφρονίσχος, ov, ὃ. 
υἱός, OV, ὃ. 

χώρα, ας, ἥ. 
ἡμετέρος, α, ον. 
ὑμέτερος, α, ον. 


, , 
ehavro.® 


τορεύομαι (with aor... Pass., 
ἐπι τινα, against a per. 
son). 


Πέρσης, ov, 0. 

Σκύϑης, ov, ὃ. 

Κῦρος, ου, ὃ. 

βασιλεύς, ἕως, 0. 

μανία," ας, ἧ. 

δῆμος, ου, ὁ. : 

στράτευμα," ατος, τό. 
, ς 

γεωμέτρης, OV, ὃ. 

σύν (dative). 

ἄστυ," εος, τό. 


/ 


Exercise 4. 


25. 1 admire the wisdom of the geometer. The peo- 


* ἐλαύνω, ἐλάσω (ἃ), ἐλήλακα, ἐλήλαμαι, ἡλάθην. Att. fut. ἐλῶ, as, a, &e., 
infin. ἐλᾷν. It is trans. (drive, urge on), but used as intrans. (march, 


ride), by omission of acc. 


* This word was formed from an adj. μανός, mad, which is quoted 


by Suidas. 


" στρατός, στρατιά, army; croarcia, expedition. στράτευμα has both 
meanings ; the latter often in Herodotus. 

Ὗ ἄστυ never means the state, as πόλις does. It is often used of an 
old or sacred part of a πόλις, as Londoners speak of ‘ the City, as a part 


of London. 


20 Ι THE ARTICLE. 


ple in the city admire the beautiful mother of the dam 
sel. The people in the city admire the very beautifu. 
daughter of the very beautiful mother. The king 
marches into the country of the Scythians. The army 
of the Persians marches into the country of the Scythi- 
ans. Cyrus marches against the king of the Persians. 
‘““The son of Sophroniscus is astonished at the madness 
of the people. ‘The poet admires those who manage‘ 
the affairs of the state. I rejoice in the king’s being 
wealthy.’ Iam vexed when the bad are wealthy. The 
people in the city (d) admire the son of Philip. ‘The 
king has the toothache (7. 6. suffers pain in his teeth‘). 
The clever geometer has a pain inhis knees. A certain 
poet had a very beautiful horse. Those with the king 
will march against the son of Philip. 


§ 5. Article continued. 


26. An adverb with the Article is equivalent to an 
adjective. 

27. οἱ πάλαι," the long ago men = the men of old. 

ὃ μεταξὺ χρόνος, the between time =the intermediate 
time. 


ἡ αὔριον, adv. (ἡμέρα, day, understood), the morrow, 
the next day. 


28. VocaBuLary 5. 
Long ago, πάλαι. 
Man, ἄγϑρωπος ov, ὁ (= homo). 
Between, μεταξύ. 
To-morrow, αὔριον (adv.) 
Time, χρόνος, ov, ὁ. 
Near, πέλας : πλησίον. 
One’s neighbour, ὃ πλησίον. 
Then, τότε. 


* So in English, ‘ the then Mayor.’ 


THE ARTICLE. 


Now, yur. 

Here, ἐνθάδε. 

There, ἐχεῖ. 

Up, upwards. ἄνω. 

Down, downwards, κάτω. 

Move, XLVEOD. 

Crocodile, κροχόδειλος, ov, ὁ. 

Both, ἄμφω: ἀμφότερος : (the lat: 
ter often in the plur.: 
ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα, both his 
ears. Xen.) 

Life, Bios, ov, 0. -Ἐ3, 

This, οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, WC. 


Exercise 5. 
τ In doing the exercise, consider which of the adverbs comes 
nearest to the meaning of the adjective or equivalent phrase. 

29. The men of old did this. They did this the next 
day (dat.) The crocodile moves its upper jaw. The 
son of Sophroniscus has a pain‘ in both his ears. Lam 
surprised at the madness of the Persians of old times. 
{ wonder at the men of the present day.’ ladmire the 
wise men of old. They love the present life. We wonh- 
der at the madness of ourneighbours. The people there’ 
are astonished at the madness of those with the king. 
Ι am astonished at the cleverness of those who manage 
my affairs. 


Exercise 6. 


30. He had a pain (imperf.) in both his knees. The 
people here admire the son of Sophroniscus. The cro- 
codile was turned into a hare (14. ὁ). The people here 


* Of countries, ἄνω is used of marching into the interior; κάτω, of 
marching down to the coast. 


y The now men. : : 
® People = persons must not be translated by δῆμος The people 


there, οἱ ἐκεῖ. 


THE ARTICLE. 23 

22 THE ARTICLE. 

From what is base; let us pursue what 15 
honorable. 

6) μὴ διώκωμεν τὰ αἰσχρά, let us not pursue what 
is base, 

d) τὸ ταχὺ λαλεῖν, talking fast ; τοῦ ταχὺ λαλεῖν, of 
talking fast, &c.; τὸ πάντας καχῶς λέγειν, 
the speaking ill of every body. 

6) ἡ ἀρετή, virtue; ὁ yodoos, οοἷά ; οἱ ἀγαϑοί, the 

᾿ good ; οἱ ἀετοί, eagles. 

§ 6. Article continued. | J) τὸ τελευταῖον, αἱ last; τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε," henceforth. 


admire my daughter and my brother’s. The peopie 
there are doing well. I have often wondered at the wis- 
dom of our present geometers, The crocodile lays eggs 
The king of the Scythians has a pain in‘ his lower jaw 


τ Ey ao ae She .- ~ 


ye 


9 hye em, ν “ 
ws eA th il i in ec ee ein TE ae 


31. a) To express that a person ‘has a very beau- - Vocanuary 6. 
tiful head,’ the Greeks said: ‘has the head Rhinoceros, ῥινοχέρως, WTOS, ὃ. 
very beautiful.’ Nose, Oly, Otros, ἡ (plur. “nos. 
32. ὁ) τὸ καλόν, is: ‘the beautiful,” ‘the henorable, trils”), 
in the abstract ; beauty. τὰ καλά, are: Horn, 
beautiful (or honorable) things ; whatever Hide, 
things are beautiful ; what is beautiful , 
or simply, beautiful things. 


a 


, , 
, ~ ε 
δορα, ἂς, ἡ- 
> - , , ΄ 
ἐἰσχυρος, ἃ, OF. 
΄ 


φεύγω. 
> , 


Ons. We learn from (34». δ), that the Jirst person plur. of the 3ase, disgraceful, αἰσχρός, ἅά, ov: αἰσχίων, aia: 


pres. subj. is used in exhortations; and’ from (34*. c), that μή is ᾿ . 
used with it for ‘not? (See 107*. l.) _ 


| aes To pursue, διώκω." 
33. d) The infinitive with the article becomes a Fast, quick, ταχύς, tie, ὑ (neut. δα]. το 
substantive declinable throughout, and an- adv.) | 
T ; o 4 alice ¢ “fp ina : i : c . ; 
οἷς rom to the English ‘participial sub alk, daile B 
) — oO ‘ , 
34 PP acm π᾿ τ +] partes Speak, say, λέγω. 
. 6) Abstract nouns, an le names of ma erials, Speak ill of κακῶς λέγειν (ace.) 
generally take the article. When a whole Speak well of εὖ λέγειν (ace.) 
class, or any individual of that class, is ; 


+t hetl a’ ‘Treat ill, behave ill to, καχῶς ποιεῖν (acc.) 
a it a. cy ν . » σ᾿ + . 
meant, the noun, whether singular or plural, Treat well, do kind offices 
takes the article. 


94", a) ὁ ῥινόκερως τὴν Soot ἰσχύῦροτάτην ἔγει, the rhi 0, conter benefits on, 2 . 
. 4 γυ ? ) 3 - ~y 4 
0 QMS τῇ QUP ἐσχυροτατὴν ἔχει, é Elephant, EAEPAS, AYTOS, ὁ. 
noceros has a very strong hide. ἔλαφος, ov, ὁ 
, ‘ > rt Ser" ‘ , Ἴ os οὐσῶν 
ὃ) φεύγωμεν τὰ αἰσγρά διώκωμεν τὰ καλά, let usfly χρυσός, οὗ, 6. 
* The article must not be used, unless it is assumed that the thing : - τ ,.;";,,»,, = 
in question has the property, the object being only to describe of what | © Literally, ‘the from this’ (time). 
kind itis. If the writer wished to inform us that the rhinoceros had a 4 Nouns in a and », from verbal roots, are generally oxytone. The 
hide, which was moreover a strong one, he would not use the article, | abstract notion predominates in them (B.) ; the vowel of the roct is 
Thus of the crocodile : ἔχει δὲ καὶ ὄνυχας καρτεροῦς, wt also has strong often changed into o, as in perf. 9. (mid.) δέοω. flay; δορά. 


claws. * The Sug, mid. is the more common in Attic Greek. 
δ Thus in English, “ Burke on the Sublime and Beautiful.” 


ΕΣ 


εὖ ποιεῖν (ace.) 


ra -ς 


penne ea ae χοΣ 
ae ae τα estes v= c 


24 PEONOUNS. 


, , , > , *# 
Good, ἀγαϑός, ἡ, cv: ἀμείνων, ἄγισ. 
TOC. 
> 7 ων’ Ε] 
Kagle, ἄετος, οὖ, ὃ. 
διώκειν is also, to prosecute ; φεύγειν, to be prosecuted: διώκειν τινὰ 


φόνου, to prosecule a man ona charge of murder; φεύγειν φόνου (un- 
derstand δίκην, cause, trial), to be tried for murder 


Exercise 7. 


36. The elephant has a strong hide. The maiden 
has very beautiful hands, The stag has very beautiful 
horns.'* The Persian’s boys pursue what is honorable. 
Let us fly from those who pursue! what is disgrace- 
ful. Do not let us fly from what is honorable. Let us 
avoid (fly from) talking fast.” Let us fly from the mad- 
ness of speaking ill of every body. Wet us do kind 
offices to our friends. “The citizens prosecute Philip 
on a charge of murder.” Sophroniscus was tried for 
murder.” Let us henceforth pursue the honorable. 
Let us not treat our (18) slaves ill. He took pleasure 
in doing kind offices to the good (Obs. 1. p. 17). The 
Scythians admire the beauty of gold. The boy won- 
ders at the horn of the rhinoceros. 


§ 7. Article as a demonstrative pronoun. Pronoun 


37. a) ὁ μέν----ὁ δέ," this—that ; the one—the other, 
ἄς. οἱ μέν---οἱ δέ, these—those ; some— 
others. (More than one ὁ δέ may follow.) 

38. δ) In a narrative ὁ δέ stands (once) in reference 


{ μέν, indeed ;—dé, but. Often, however, there is no considerable 
opposition between words so connected, the use of μὲν being principally 
tc prepare us for a coming dé. It need not be translated, except when 
the context plainly requires an indeed.—In translating from English 
-ntc Greek, whenever the second of two connected clauses has a but 
che first should have a μέν. 


PRONOUNS. 25 


to an object already uamed. So καὶ ὅς, when the refer 
ence is to a person. 

39. εἰ. 1) αὐτός is ‘self,’ when it stands in the nom. 
without a substantive, or, in any case 
unith one. 

2) αὐτός is him, her, it, &e. in an oblique 
case witnout a substantive. 

3) ὁ αὐτός is ‘the same. 

4) αὐτός standing alone in an oblique case, 
is never ‘self, except when it is the 
Jirst word of the sentence. 

40. a) τα αὐτὰ τοὺς μὲν λυπεῖ, τοὺς δὲ τέρπει, the 
same things pain some persons, but de- 
light others. 

δ) λύκος ἀμνὸν ἐδίωκεν" ὁ δὲ εἰς vady κατέρῦγε, a 
wolf was pursuing α lamb; and (or but) 
it fled for refuge into a temple. 

C) καὶ ὃς ἐξαπατηϑεὶς διώκει ἀνὰ κράτος, and he, 
being deceived, pursues at Sull speed (lit- 
erally, ‘at or with force or strength’). 

d) αὐτὸς ἔφη, he himself said (it). αὐτὸς 6 δοῦλος, 
or, ὁ δοῦλος αὐτός, the slave himself: ὁ αὐτὸς 
δοῦλος, the same slave. μᾶλλον τοῦτο φοβοῦ- 
μαι ἢ τὸν ϑάνατον αὐτό v, I fear this more 
than death itself. ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ πῦρ, 
he gave them the fire. αὐτὸν γὰρ εἶδον, 
for I saw the man himself: εἶδον γὰρ αὖ- 
τόν, for I saw him. 


41. VocanuLary J 


Same, 6 -- ὁ αὐτός, 726. 


Some—othere; οἱ μένγ----οἱ δέ. 
To pain, ‘annoy, λυπέω. 
Delight, τέρπω. 


© καταφεύγω. (2. aor.) 

Ὁ δέ is not only but, but also and, and in Homer for. It is used 
where no other particle is required, to avoid having a proposition in the 
middle of a discourse unconnected with what goes before. It is often, 
therefore, omitted in translating into English. 


~ 


> 


Wolf, 

Lamb, 

Fly for refuge, 
Temple, 
More—than, 
To fear, 
Death, 

Fire, 

Say, 

Give, 

Sheep, 


PHONOUNS. 


λύχος, ov, 6. 
ἀμνός, ov, ὃ. 
καταφεΐγω. 
γαύς,! οὔ, ὁ. 
φοβέομα:". 
ϑόανατος, ov, ὃ. 
πῦρ, πυρός, τό. 
φημί. 

δίδωμι. 

Mae 7.1 

Οἱ, Ol¢. 


Dog, κύων, κυνός, ὁ et ἡ (m. if 
the sez is not to be spec- 
ified. R. xvy, V. κύον»). 

House, οἶκος, ov, ὁ. 

Deceive, ἀπατάω, ἐξαπατάω (the lat- 
ter being stronger, to εἶθ. 
ceive thoroughly). 

At full speed, ἀνὰ κράτος (at force). 

Force, strength, κράτος, B0¢ (οὔς), τό. 

Ride, ἐλαύνειν (to drive on, ἵππον 
understood). 

For, γάρ. 


i> Can γάρ begin the sentence? (No.) Can ἐξ} (No.) Can μέν 1 
(No.) 


Exercise 8. 


42. A dog was pursuing a sheep, and it fled-for-re 
fuge intoa house. Some admire the mother; others the 
daughter. Cyrus rides at full speed. I myself say it 
[admire the mother more than the daughter herself. 
They will give him the gold. I will give the gold to 
{the man) himself (39.4). I deceived the slave himself. 


ὁ νεώς, Alt. 

© In.act. frighten. It has f. mid. and pass. ; aor. pass. 

! The forms in Attic Greek are; S. ols, olds, ott, div,—D. ote, οἱοῖν. 
P. oies, οἰῶν, οἱσί, ofas and οἷς. (It is m. and f. 

= The nom. of the personal pron. is not to be expressed. 


PRONOUNS. 2? 


And they (40. c), being deceived, fly-for-refuge into a 
temple. And he, riding at full speed, flies from those 
who! are pursuing him.» The wolves fly at full speed. 
Let us pursue the wolves at full speed. The same dogs 
are pursuing the hares. Let us pursue them» ourselves. 
Let us not deceive our neighbour. The Persians of 


those days'' pursued honorable things.’? Speak well 
of those who! have done you kind offices."* 


§ 8. Pronouns continued. 


43. The noun with οὗτος, ὅδε (this), ἐκεῖνος (that), 


takes the article; the pronoun Standing before the arti- 
cle, or after the noun. 


44. πᾶς in the sing.° without the article (= ἕκαστος), 
‘each, ‘every ;? with the article, ‘whole, ‘ all.’ 

45. a) οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ, or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος [not ὁ οὗτος ἀνήρ] 
this man. ἐχεῖνος ὁ ἀνήρ, or ὁ ἀνὴρ ἐκεῖνος 
that man. αὐτὸς ὁ βασιλεύς, or ὁ βασιλεὺς ad- 
τός, the king himself. 

δ) πᾶσα πόλις, every city ; πᾶσα 7 πόλις, the whole 
city, all the city. 

6) ἄλλοι, others ; οἱ ἄλλοι, the others ; οἱ ἕτεροι, the 
others (with a stronger Opposition), the other 
party. 

d) ἡ ἄλλη χώρα, the rest of the country. 

6) πολλοί, many ; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mul- 
titude, most people. 

46. VocaButary 8. 


Others, ἄλλοι. 
The others, οἱ ἄλλοι. 


5 The acc. of the pronoun is seldom expressed when the person 
meant is quite obvious. 


εἶ In the plur. πάντες must have the article, when there is reference te 
particular objects: when not, the usage is variable. 


28 PRONOUNS. 


The other party, οἱ ἕτεροι. 
The rest of, ὁ ἄλλος (agreeing with its 
subst.) 
Many, much, movg,” πολλή, πολύ. 
Great, μέγᾶς, μεγάλη, μέγα. 
The many, the multitude, ecm, 
Most people, ee 
Every, each, nag (in the sing. without 
the art.) 
πᾶς ὃ, or o πᾶς (in the sing. 
Pl. πάντες : see noteon 44.) 
This, οὗτος : ὅδε. 
That, ἐχεῖνος, ἡ, 0. 
Man, ἀγήρ, δρος : ἄνϑρωπος, ov, 6. 
Τὸ cut, τέμνω," (of acountry to rav- 
age or lay waste by cut- 
ting down its trees, crops, 
&c.) 
The enemy, οἱ πολέμιοι (ad}.) 
Oss. ἀνήρ" (vir), man as opposed to woman, and used in a good 


sense. ἄνθρωπος (homo), man as a human being, opposed to other 
animals; and often used, like homo, when contempt is to be ex- 
pressed. 


The whole, all, 


Exercise 9. 


37> Oss. With ‘this,’ ‘that,’ the order is, 

Pron. Art. Noun. 
(or,) Art. Noun, Pron. 

47. 'The enemy laid waste the whole country. The 
other party are laying waste the rest of the country. 
My brother is pursuing the same Persians. Iadmire this 
city. Ioften admired that city. The many do not (od) 
admire the beauty of wisdom. The king himself is lay- 
ing waste the rest of the country. A certain man wa: 
pursuing hisslave; but he fled for refuge into the upper' ' 


- rd 


? στόλυς, πολλή, πολύ, 
πολλοῦ, πολλῆς, πολλοῦς &c. 
4 τέμνω, τεμῶ, τέτμηκα, ἔτεμον, ἐτμήθην. (Roots: Tépty τμει) 


: See Jelf’s Greek Gram., Vol. I. p. 81, 97. 


PRONOUNS: 20 


city. The others were turned into eagles. 1 will give 
the whole egg to my brother. He gave all the water to 
his (18) horses. I feel pain‘ in every part of my head 
(tn my whole head). Most people rejoice when their 


friends are wealthy. The other party manage the 
affairs of the city. 


§ 9. Pronouns continued. 


48. a) In the reflexive pronouns (ἐμαυτοῦ, &c.)* the 
αὐτός is not emphatic. To express ‘self’ emphatically, 
αὐτός must precede the pronoun, αὐτὸν σέ, &e. ; 

49. δ) ‘ Own’ is translated by the gen. of the reflex- 
ive pronoun (ἑαυτοῦ). ‘His’ by the gen. of αὐτός. (So 
‘thetr’ by gen. plur.) 

50. 6) ἑαυτοῦ is often used (like sui) in a dependent 


sentence, or in a clause having ace. and infin., for the 
subject of the principal sentence.: 
But the simple αὐτόν is often used, or ¢ (οὗ, of, &e. σφεῖς, σφᾶς, 
&c.) 
ob is never simply reflexive in Attic prose, but is confined to 
this kind of reflexive meaning. (B.)» The forms οὖ, £, occur in 
Plato, but not in the other great Attic prose-writers. (Kr.) 
51. a) ἔϑιξε σαυτόν, accustom yourself. 
Ul , ~ ~ 
δ) ἔφη πάντας τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἀγαπᾷν, 
he said that all men loved’ their own thing's. 


5 G. ἐμαυτοῦ, ἐμαυτῆς, 
D. ἐμαυτῷ, ἐμαυτῇ, 
Α. ἐμαυτόν, ἐμαυτήν. 
* Of course only when it cannot be mistaken for the subject of the 
infin. or dependent verb. 
* This passage is misconstrued, and so made incorrect, by the Eng. 
Translator of Buttmann, p. 325. 
Y It is an idiom of our language to use a past tense in a sentence 
beginning with ‘that’ (and other dependent sentences), when the verb 
on which they depend isin a past tense. The pres. infin. must be used 


in Greek, whenever the action to be expressed by it did not precede the 
time spoken of. 


᾿πν-.....ν...-.- -ἐὃὸ. ἀν δὰ τἀν...» ες, τάν tage ὡς, i 


aseGex —— 
i  -.. --- - .-- --- -- 


~ eee 


PRONOUNS. 


6) νομίζει τοὺς πολίτας ὑπηρετεῖν ἑαυτῷ, he thinks 
that the citizens serve him. 

ΟἹ) στρατηγὸς" ἦν ᾿Ξενοκλείδης, πέμπτος αὐτός, 
Xenoclides was their general (himself the 
jifth =) with four others. 


52. VocABULARY 9. 


Accustom, ἐθίζω." 

Iam accustomed, εἴϑισμαι or εἴωϑα (a perf. 2. 
from ἔϑω : κατὰ τὸ εἰωϑός, 
neut. part. accg. to my, 
his, &c. custom ; as my, 
his, &c. custom was.) 

Love, like, am fond of, ἀγαπάω: also, with ace. or 
dat. “I am contented 
with.” 

Think, am of opinion, νομίζω. 

Serve, perform service, ὑπηρετέω." 

General, στρατηγός, OV, ὃ. 

Tocommand (8 army), στρατηγέω. 

Third, τρίτος, ἡ, OV. 

Fourth, τέταρτος, ἡ, OF. 

Every body, πᾶς τις. 

I am present, here, &c., πάρ-ειμι. (τὰ παρόντα pres- 
ent~ things, circum- 
stances, or condition.) 


To perform this service, ὑπηρετεῖν τοῦτο. 
¢ these services, ὑπηρετεῖν ταῦτα 


Exercise 10. 


53. Accustom yourself to confer benefits upon'* the 
good. Every body loves his own things. I accustom 
myself to serve the state. Cyrus, as his custom was, 
was riding at full speed. I will give the gold to you 


“ From στρατός army, ἄγω lead. 

3. Augment. ¢, εἴθιζον, εἴθισμαι. It is used in pass. 

Υ ὑπό, ἐρέτης, rower, properly, to row for a person, or at his com- 
mand. 


NEUTER ADJECTIVE. 31 


πον (48). Philip was their general with two others. 
e thinks that the citizens have conferred benefits upon 
him. Accustom yourself to becontented with your (18) 
present condition. Let us not treat those ill who! have 
done good to us. He accustomed himself (imperf.) to 
perform these services for the good. I will perform this 
service for you. He has a™ large head. I am accus- 
tomed to perform you these services. 


ᾧ 10. Of the Neuter Adjective. 


54. a) In Greek, as in Latin, the newt. plur. of an 
adjective is used without a substantive, where we 
should rather use the singular. 

55. b) The neut. article with a gen. case, is used 
in an indefinite way for any thing that relates fo, or 
proceeds from, what the gen. expresses. 

56. c) Neuter adjectives are used adverbially; and 
generally, 


The neut. sing. of the comp. ἡ serve also for comp. 
The neut. plural of the sup. § and sup. of the adv. 


57. d) When an adjective is the predicate, it is often 
in the neut. singular, when that is not the gender, or 
even number, of the subject. 

This can only be, when the assertion is made of a class or gener- 


al notion; not of a particular thing. It may be supposed to agree 
with thing understood. 


58. e) πολύς (πλέων or πλείων, πλεῖστος), superlatives, 
and the adj. ἥμισυς" stand in the gender of the gen. that 
follows them, when we might have rather expected the 
neut. adj. (Not τὸ πολὺ τῆς γῆς, but ἡ πολλή.) 

59. a) εἶπε ταῦτα, he said this. 


® Acc. plur. εἴς and eas. G. ovs in later writers. 


NEUTER AD‘ECTIVES. 


δ) τὰ τῶν Sew φέρειν δεῖ, we should bear what 
comes from the gods. 

6) σοφώτερον ποιεῖς, you act more wisely, 
αἴσχιστα διετέλεσεν, he lived in a most 
disgraceful way. 

d) ἡ ἀρετή ἐστιν ἐπαινετόν, virtue is praise- 
worthy. 

€) ἡ πολλὴ τῆς χώρας, the greater part of the 
country. ὁ ἥμισυς τοῦ χρόνου, half the 
time. 


60. VocanuLary 10. 


We ought, should or must, δεῖς (oportet). 

To bear, φέρω." 

Said, εἶπον." 

To live, δια-τελέω, ἔσω (properly fin- 
ish, go through ; βίον or 
χρόνον understood). 

Praiseworthy, ἐπαινετός, 7, OF. 

T’o praise, ἐπαινέω." 

ΤῸ act, ποιέω. 

Forwardness, zeal, τὸ πρόϑῦμον (adj. for ἡ προ- 
ϑυμία). 

Peloponnesus, Πελοπόννησος, ov, ἡ. 


Exercise 11. 


61. The others laid waste half the country. The 
other party’ act more wisely. The rest'® of the 
Scythians act more wisely. He spent half his life in a 
most disgraceful way. The others are doing better.* 
The rest of the citizens are doing very well. The 
king of the Persians has ravaged the greater part of the 


5. det (—déor, δέη, δεῖν, δέον), δεῆσει. Imperf. ἔδει. 

» φέρω, οἴσω, ἐνήνοχα : aor. 1. ἤνεγκα. Pass. ἐνεχθήσομαι and οἱσθήσοο 
uat, ἐνήνεγμαι, ἠνέχθην. 

* εἶπον (εἰπέ, &c.) an aor.2. Also εἶπα aor. 1., of which εἴπατε, εἰς 
κάτω, and also εἶπας, are used by Attic writers. 

ὁ —ew (Xen. but generally écopat,) ἤνεσα, ἤνεκα, ἠνέθην : but ἤνημαι-. 

9 By 56 the compar. and superl. of good must here be used. 


SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 33 


Peloponnesus. Wisdom is praiseworthy (57.d). The 
son of Sophroniscus® said this (54. a). Let us bear 
what comes from the gods. The son of Philip will 
command (the army) with three others2 Accustom 
yourself to bear what comes from the gods. One ought 
to like one’s own things. A certain man had a hen 
Eagles'* have a'* very beautiful head. 


$ 11. Subject and Predicate. 


62. a) The nom. neut. plur. generally has the verb 
in the singular ; but often not δ) when persons or liv- 
ing creatures are spoken of. 

63. c) The verb ‘to be’ is often omitted. 

θά. a) τὰ ζῶα τρέχει, the animals run. τῶν ὄντων 
τὰ μέν ἐστιν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, τὰ δ᾽ οὐκ ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, of existing 
things some are in our power, and others are not in 
our power. 

δὴ τοσάδε ἔϑνη ἐστράτενον, so many nations went 
on the expedition. 

C) τὰ τῶν φίλων κοινά, the property of friends is 
common. 


65. VocaBuLaARy 11. 


Animal, ζῶον, ov, τό. ; 

Run, τρέχω! (Soap). 

In a person’s power, ἐπὶ with the dat. of the per- 
son (ἐπὶ ἐμοί, in my pow: 
er ; ἐπὶ ἐμοῦ, in my time, 
ἐπὶ τοῦ πατρός, in my fa 
ther’s time). 

So many, τόσος, τοσύσδε, τοσοῦτος. 

Nation, ἔϑνος, £00, TO. 

Go on an expedition, στρατεύω. 


---...ς.... 


ἢ τρέχω, δραμοῦμ δεὸράμηκα,, ἔδραμον. 
2 


84 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. ON THE MOODS. 


Existing things, things, τά ὄντα (part.from εἰμὶ, τῷ 
thatare,or(54,a)whatis, ὄνγει, in reality, really.) 
To go away, ἅπ-ειμι.5 
Now (=already, at once, 
without waiting any ἤδη. 
longer), 


(Words after which the omission of the co ‘is’ ‘are’ 
u 8 wl 
very common.) ΡΥ ΟΝ 


Ready, ἑτοῖμος," ἡ, ov. 
Disappeared, vanished, φροῦδος,' ἡ, ov. 
ι" is) time, ὥρα. 

asy, ἡάδιον (neut. of ῥάδιορλ. 
Hard, difficult, pri (neut. of a 
Worthy, ἄξιος, ct, OV. 
Possible, δυγατός, ἡ, Ov, 
{mpossible, : ἀδύνατος, ος ον. 
Necessity, ἀνάγκῃ (= it is necessary). 
Lawful, Ἶ Dems, ϑέμιδος, ἡ (=fas) 

ον CC. 


= τες 
ποκα τὶ ao ἊΝ 


§ 12. On the Moods. 


67. a. 1) The moods of the aorist do not refer to 
past time, and are therefore rendered by 
the present in English. 

2) The moods of the aorist express smoment- 
ary) actions; those of the present, ron 
tinued ones. 

3) But the participle of the aorist does refer 
to pasttime. πεσών, having fallen. 

68. a) μή when it forbids, takes the imperative of 

tne present, the subjunctive of the aorist.™ 

In doing the exercises, consider (1) whether a single 
definite action is spoken of; or a continued action, or 
habit. Having thus determined whether the aorist 
should be used, or the present, (2) if you use the present, 
you must als use the imperative ; if the aorist, the sub- 


junctive. | 


Of courss the subj. of the present must be used for the δ sey person 
(when the present is to be used), as the imperat. has no first person. 


aiearelog 3. 69. i> The optative is theregular attendant of the 
historical tenses. Hence, 

70. b) The relatives and particles (except the com- 
pounds of ἄν; see 77,89), which take the subjunctive, 
after the present and future, take the optative after the 


historical® tenses. 


The aptative is thus, in fact, the subjunctive of the historical tenses, 
answering to the imperfect and pluperfect of the Latin subjunctive. 


NE AER oH 


1 
if 


a 


66. These things were not in my power 
things took place in our fathers’ deen "This (plur) i 
good. It is now time togoaway. They are ready to 
do this. \\The judge is worthy of death (gen.) | The 
boys have disappeared ;* the father has disappeared 
Many nations will go on the expedition. It is easy to 


the wise, to bear what comes from the gods.* It is ne- 
cessary to bear what comes from the gods. Let us go 
away atonce. Socrates, the son* of Sophroniscus was 
really wise. For it is not lawful to speak ill of the gods 
It is hard to deceive the wise. Se 


ἢ hd καρ τῷ “με mia and is more common in this sense than 
ἐλεύσομαι, Fut. of ἔρχομαι. In the moods it is used as , 
ε Afterwards ἔτοιμος, on an 6) 
d F Tom πρὸ, 6dés: Only found in nom. of all numbers. 
Begin with adj. Have, has, are not to be translated. 


71. c) So the particles and pronouns. which go with 
the indicative in direct,’ take the optative im obliques 


narratien. 


1 Momentary is here used in a somewhat loose way, to express sin- 
gle definite actions, not contemplated as continuing. 

™ μή with imperative present tells a man to leave off what he has 
already begun: μή with aor. subj., tells him not to begin the action. (H.) 
This is a consequence of the distinction pointed out, not a new dis- 
Anction. 

= i. e. Imperf., aorists, and pluperf. 

© Oblique narration (sermo obliquus) is when the opinions assere 


τοῖς ο»α. σὰ - 
OG ey 955... age ete -emapemae = 


eA SR ER Tener 


= = πῷοξι == SS ee 


36 ON THE MOODS. 


72. a) μὴ aN do not steal (forbids stealing gener, 
ally). 
μὴ κλέψῃς, do not steal (forbids stealing in a 
particular instance). 
δ) ( πάρειμι, ἵνα ἴδω, Tam here to see. 
παρῆν, ἵνα ἴδοιμι, Twas there to see. 
ovx ἔχω (or οὐκ οἶδα), ὅποι» τράπωμαι, I don't 
know which way to turn myself. 
οὐκ εἶχον (or οὐκ ἤδειν), Ono.” τραποίμην, I dia 
not know which way to turn myself. 
€) ἤρετο, εἰ οὕτως ἔχοι, he asked of it were so. 
ἔλεξέ μοι, ὅτι ἡ ὁδὸς φέροι εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥνπερ 
ὁρῴην, he told me that the road led to the 
city which I saw. 


73. VocaBuLaRy 12. 


Steal, κλέπτω. 

Theft, κλοπή, ἧς, ἡ. 

Know, οἶδα.“ 

Whither, ποῖ; (in dependent ques. 
tions ὅποι.) 


tions, &c., of another are related in the third person. “He said that he 
thought, &¢.”—« He said, “7 think,” &c.” would be in direct narratior 
(sermo rectus). 
P In dependent (or indirect) questions, the regular rule is to use, 
NOt πόσος ; ποῖος ; πηλίκος ; 
(quantus 7) (qualis 7) how old or big? 
t ὁπόσος, ὁποῖος, ὁπηλίκος. 
So not ποτέ ; ποῖ; ποῦ; πῶς πόθεν; πῆ; 
when? whither? where? how? whence? how? whither? 
t ὁπότε, ὅποι, ὅπου, ὅπως, ὁπόθεν, ὅπῃ͵ 
So, also, not ris, but ὅστις. Bat the direct interrogatives are very 


= used in indirect questions, as: ἠρώτα με τίς εἴην, he asked me wh 
was. 


4 Properly a perf. from εἴδω͵ see. I have perceived==] know, 
οἶδα, tos, εἰδείην, εἰδῶ, εἰδέναι, εἰδώς. 
Plup. jéev. Fut. εἴσομαι (εἰδήσω). 
Perf. οἶδα, οἶσθα, οἵδε leroy, ἴστον | ἴσμεν, ἴστε, ἴσασι. 
Plup. 8. ἤδειν, tt. ἤδη (from ἤδεα). 
ἥδεις͵ commonly ἤδεισθα, Att. ἤδησθα. 
Fee, Att. ἤδειν, and pon. 
#. ἤδειμεν and ἧσμεν. 
ἕδειτε, στε. 
ὅδεσαν͵ ΕΣ 


ON THE MOODs. 37 


Turn, τρέπω (Miu. turn myself ) 

Τὸ ask, ἠρόμην, aor. 2: (ἐρωτάω used 

for the other tenses.) 

Road, ὁδός, οὔ, 7. 

Lead (ofa road), φέρω. 

See, 00 ceo." 

To be so, οὕτως ἔχειν (to have them 

selves so.) 

Τὸ be found or brought in 
guilty, 

Battle, μάχη, 19, ἧ. 

Fight, μάχομαι, ἔσομαι, οὔμαι, ἡμαι. 

That, in order that, va (= ut.) 

That, after verbs of telling ὅτι, (with indic. unless the 
&c., forLatin accus. with optative is required by 
infinitive, 71. The acc. with infin. 

also occurs. See 91: δ.) 
For what is ἔχω sometimes used ? (to know: so ‘non habeo que 
me vertam.’) What are strengthening particles, and with what 


words are they often used ? (γέ, at least ; πέρ, very; δή, now. They 
are frequently used with relatives.) 


ἁλῶναι" (with gen.) 


Exercise 13. 


74. Tam here ¢o see the battle. I was here ty see the 
battle. Do not pursue what is disgraceful.'* The 
road leads to Athens. The boy says that the road leads 
to Athens. The boy told me that the road led: toAthens : 
Do not deceive your father (of a particular instance of 
deceit). The Persian was found guilty of murder, I 
asked him what he was doing. He asked me who | 
was. Who are you (plur.)? I asked them who they 
were. He told me that Xenoclides commanded them 


. * The tenses supplied from the roots ὁπ, eid: ὁράω, Sonar, ἑώρᾶκα, bse 
payat (Spat), ὥφθην. Imp. ἑώρων. For aor. εἶδον, ἰδέ, &c. and εἰδύμην 
ἰδοῦ, &c. 

* ἁλίσκομαι (am taken or caught), ἁλώσομαι, ἑάλωκα. Aor. ἑάλων 
(i\wr), ἁλοίην, ἁλῶ (Gs, &e.), ἁλῶναι, ἁλούς. 
The a is long in the augmented, short in the unaugmented forms. 
See note on 51. ὃ. 


38 ON THE MOODS. 


with two others." Do not steal these things. Do not 
accustom yourself to deceive your mother. I was there 
to fight. He asked me whether (ei) these things were 
so. 


§ 13. The Moods continued. 
On εἰ and ἄν. Conditional Propositions. 


Introductory remarks on ἄν. 


_ 70. This particle (of which Hermann considers the 
real meaning to be by chance, perhaps ; but Hartung, 
else, otherwise) gives an expression of contingency and 
mere possibility to the assertion. 

76. Its principal use is in the conclusion of a hypo- 
thetical sentence ; and when it stands in other sentences, 
it often refers to an implied condition. 

77. It coalesces with several particles, so as to form 
one word with them. 


Thus with εἰ, ὅτε, ἐπειδή 
it forms ἐάν, ἤν, ἄν, ὅταν, ἐπειδάν. 
78. The ἄν -- ἐάν, εἰ ἄν, regularly begins the sen- 
tence, and is thus distinguished from the simple ἄν, 
which must have some words before it 


79. εἰ (like vur ‘if’) has the two meanings of ἐγ" and 
whether : it goes with the indice. or optative ; but not, in 
good writers, with the subjunctive.—(See example in 
#2. 6.) 

80. a) Possibility without any expression of uncer- 

tainty ; εἰ with indic. in both clauses. 


® See 334. aa 


ON THE MOODs. 99 


6) Uncertainty with the prospect of decision ζ 
ἐάν with subjunctive in the conditional, and 
the indic. (generally the future) in the con- 
sequent clause. 

c) Uncertainty without any such accessary no- 
tion: εἰ with the optative in the conditional 
clause, and ἄν with the optative in the con- 
sequent clause. 

d) Impossibility, or belief that the thing is not 
So: et with imperfect or aorist indic.in the 
conditional clause; ἄν with imperf. or aor- 


ast indic. in the consequent clause. 

1) The imperfect is used for present time, or when the time ts 
quite indefinite. 
_ 2) If both condition and consequence refer to past time, the aor- 
ist must be used, at least in the consequent clause; unless the con- 
sequence is to be represented as continuing. 

3) The condition may refer to past, and the consequence to pres- 
ent time. 

εἰ ἐπείσθην, οὐκ ἂν ἡῤῥώστουν, tf Thad (then) been persuaded, I should 
not (now) be out of health. 


81. a) ( εἰ ἐβρόντησε καὶ ἤστραψεν, fit has thunder- 
ed it has also lightened. 
ei tt ἔχεις, δός, if you have any thing, give 
τί. 

b) ἐάν τι ἔχωμεν, δώσομεν, if we have any 

thing, we will give it. 

6) εἴ τις ταῦτα πράττοι, μέγα μὶ ἂν ὠφελήσειε, 
if any one should do this, he would do me a 
great service. 

d) εἴ τι εἶχεν, ἐδίδου ἄν, if he had any thing," he 
would give it. 


εἴ τι ἔσχεν, ἔδωκεν ἄν, if he had had any 
thing, he would have given it. 


82. VocaBuLary 13. 


ΤῸ benefit, to do a service, ὠφελέω. 
Hurt, injure, βλάπτω. 
Kill, put to death, ἀπο-κτείνω. 


* Itis implied, that he has not any thing. 


40 ON THE MOODS. 


Speak the truth, ἀληϑεύα. 

Mina, _ μνᾶ, μνᾶς, 7. 
Talent, τάλαντον, OV, τό. 
Not only—but also οὐχ ὅτι"--- ἀλλὰ καί. 
Even, καί. 

Not even, οὐδέ. 


T> Oss. ὠφελεῖν, βλάπτειν, ἄς, take besides ace. of person, an adj 
in the acc. newt. plur., where we should use adverbs; very, more, &c 


μεγάλα; μικρά; μείζω, τὰ μέγιστα. 


Exercise 14. 


83. If I have any thing,* I will give it. If you 
were to do this, you would confer the greatest benefit 
upon me (c). If any one should do this, he would 
greatly injure me. If I had a mina, I would give it to 
the slave. Ifhe had had even three talents, he would 
have given them to his brother. If any one were to do 
(ο) this, he would do the greatest* injury to the state. 

f you speak the truth (i. 6. if what you say should 
prove true), I will give you three talents. If the wise 
were to manage the affairs of the state, they would con- 
fer a great benefit* upon all the citizens. If this be 
50,571 will go away at once. If you were really wise, 
you would admire the beauty of virtue. I am here to 
see not only the city, but also the whole®’ country. If 
the citizens were wise, they would have killed not only 
% Xenoclides, but also Philip. If you should be Sound 
guilty* of murder, the citizens will put you to death. 


ᾧ 14. The Moods continued. 


84. a) The optative with ὧν is equivalent to ow 
nay, might, would, should, &c. 


* Sach a verb as ‘I do not say’ is understood: I saw, not that my 
won, but also &c.=I saw (I do not say) that (1 saw) my son, but 
also, &c. 


a : 


ON THE Moops. 41 


ἵν properly refers (as our would, &c.) to a condition supposed. 
Thus in (86*. a), ‘I would Sladly see it,’ if it were possible; in (86*. δ) 
‘one could not,’ &c. if one were to look. 
85. ὁ) The optative with ἄν is often translated by 
the future. 


The Attics were peculiarly fond of expressing themselves in a 
doubtful way; of avoiding all positiveness in their assertions; and 


hence the optative with ἄν is used of the most positive assertions. 
86. 6. ὦ. 6.) ἄν gives to the infinitive and the parti- 
cuple the same force that it gives to the optative. 

Thus (as in 86*. d) the infin. gets the force οἱ an infin. future. 

This is the common way of expressing the future after verbs of 
hoping thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, confessing, &c., when 
it is dependent on a condition expressed or umplied. 

Of a positive unconditional expectation, &c. the infinitive without 


ἄν is to be used; the future, if future time is to be styongly mark- 
ed; if not, the aor. or present, according as the action is momentary 


or continued. (K.) ὃ 5 
86", a) ἡδέως ἂν ὃ Ἁ σ Dy es alice I would gladly 
see this, or, I should like to see this. éy- 
Q ϑρώπον ἀναιδέστερον οὐκ ἄν τις εὕροι, 4 
4 man, or, one could not find a more shame- 
less fellow. 

δ) οὐκ ἂν φεύγοις, you will not escape. 

C) πόσον ἂν οἴει εὑρεῖν τὰ σὰ κτήματα πωλού. 
pera; how much do you think your pos- 

sessions would fetch (literally, find) if 
they were sold? 

d) οὐκ ἔστιν ἕνα ἄνδρα ἂν von diva more ἅπαντα 
ταῦτα πρᾶξαι, it is not possible that one man 
should ever be able to do all this. 

6) radla* σιωπῶ, πόλλ ἂν ἔχων εἰπεῖν, I hold my 
tongue about the rest, though I should have 
much to say. αἰτεῖ μισϑὸν, ὡς περι γεν OMe 


Ὗ γράφειν dv=scripturum esse. 
γεγραφέναι Gv=scripturum fuisse. 
γράψαι dv=(a) scripturum fuisse, or 
as pres. (b) scripturum esse. 
γράψειν dv=scripturum fore. (K.) 
γράψειν ἄν is proved, I think, to be correct by Hartung, against Pore 
son, Hermann, &c. Kahner and Rost both agree with Hartung. 
For τὰ ἄλλα, 


ON THE MOODS. 


vocavt τῶν πολεμίων, he asks for pay on 
the plea that he could then conquer his 
enemies. 


87. VocaBuLary 14. 


‘Would (or should) like ἡδέως,» gladly. (ἥδιστ᾽ ἄν 
to......’ (how trans- -+++e; Should like ex- 
lated ?) tremely ; ἥδτον ay.... 

}, I would rather than.) 

See, behola ϑεάομαι. 

Shameless, ἀγαιδής, is, ἐς. ἡ 

Shamelessness,impudence, ἀναίδεια," ας, 7. >. 

Find; (of things sold) fetch, εὑρίσκω." δ" 
ossession, κτῆμα," ατος, 26. \, 

Acquire, get, κτάομαι, (perf. xekrjuus == 

OSSESS.) 

Sell, alice. ἃ 

Can, am able, δύναμαι." 

How is ‘it is possible’ 
sometimes expressed ? 
One, εἷς, μία, ἕν. G. ἑνός μίας, &e. 

Hold my tongue about, σιωπάω, (with fut. mid.) 

Ask for: in mid. ask for 
myself, 

Pay, μισθός, ov, ὁ. : 

Conquer, get the better of, περιγίγνομαι, (With gen: See 

15, note |.) ra . 


by ἔστιν. 


ΠΝ 
atte. 


t Literally ‘as thus being-likely-to-conquer.’ 

¥ From ἡδύς, sweet. Adverbs in ws are formed by adding ws to the 
root ; καλ-ός, καλῶς" Tax~ts, rayé-os, ταχέ-ως. 

* The termination 1a becomes ea when derived from adjectives in 
ns, by contraction with the ε of the root ; ἀναιδής, ἀναιδέ-ος, ἀναίδεια. The 
a is then shortened, and the accent thrown back to the last syllable but 
two. ais an inseparable particle, meaning ‘ not’ in compound words. It 
generally takes » before a vowel: a, not, aid, the root of words denoting 
reverence, respect, shame, &c. 

* εὑρίσκω, εὑρήσω, εὕρηκα, εὕρημαι. εἶρον, εὑρόμην, εὑρέθην. Verb adj 
»ἀρετός. 
> See 8. note a. 


* δύναμαι͵ dvi fzopat, δεδύνημαι, ἡδυνήθρω. (2 sing. δόνασαι.) 


ON THE MOoDs. 43 


a 
Escape from, φεύγω, (acc. fut. rid.) 
Black, μέλας, aie, ἀν. 
F'latterer, κόλαξ, axog, ὃ. 
Flatter, κολακεύω. 
Ever, at any lime, ποτέ, 
Just, δίκαιος, α, ον. 
Faithful, πιστός, 1}, OV. 
How much, πόσον, (neut.) 
Think, οἴομαι." 
Hone, ἐλπίζω. 


Exercise 15. 


88, One cannot find a more shameless flatterer. One , 
cannot find a blacker dog. To, will not escape from 
those who are pursuing you. H I possessed a talent, I 
would not ask you‘ for pay. It is not possible that you, 
being a man, should be able to deceive the gods. You 
will not deceive God, the judge of all. I should like to 
find these things. I should like to see the old geomefers. 
Let us fly from the shamelessness of wicked men. You 
will not find a juster judge. Do not steal the poet’s gold. 
Do not flatter. If you do this, you will conquer your 
enemies. How much do you think the eagle will fetch, 
if offered for sale? I asked him how much (72, note) 
his possessions would fetch, if sold? I will ask for 
three talents, on the plea that I shall then conquer 


(86°. 6) all my enemies. I hope that you will be able to 
10 all this (86 ", d). 


ᾧ 15. The Moods continued. 


89. a) The compounds of ἄν (ἐών, ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, &C. 


ἃ nére; interrog. when? 
9 οἴομαι and ε a (2 sing. οἴει), oificopat, φήθην. Tmperf. ὠόμην, ψμην, ; 
ΝΡ See 19?) 1194. a. 


ON THE MOODS. 


77) regularly take the subjunctive. The 
same rule applies to relatives with ὧν. 

90. δ) When they come into connection with past 
time or the oblique narration, they either remain 
unchanged, or the simple words (εἰ, ὅτε, ἐπειδή---ὅς, ὅστις, 
ὅσος, &c.) take their place with the optative (69). 

90", c. d. 6) When these compounds ef ἄν͵ and rela- 
tives with dy, go with the subjunctive of the aorist, they 
answer to the Latin future perfect (futurum exactum). 

91. a) παρέσομαι ἐάν τι δέῃε (60,"), 7 will come to you 

(or, be with you), if Iam wanted. 

ὃ) ἔφη παρέσεσϑαι, εἴ τι δέοι or δεήσοι, he said 
that he would come, if he were wanted. 

6) τότε δὴ," ὅταν ἃ χρὴ ! orgs, εὐτυχεῖς, then only 
are you prosperous, when you do what you 
ought. τότε δὴ, ὅταν ἃ χρὴ ποιήσῃς, εὐτυχήσεις, 
then only will you be prosperous, when you 
have done* what you ought (tum demum, 
quum officia tua expleveris, felix eris). 

d) ἐπειδὰν ἅπαντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, when (or 
after) you have heard all, decide. 

6) διαφϑερεῖ ὅ,τι ἂν λάβῃ, he will destroy whatever 
he takesor lays hold of (ceperit). 


92. VocaBULARY 15. 


At all, zi, (neut. of zis), 

Also, καί. 

One ought, χρή. 

If there is any need, or oc- 
casion. 

Am prosperous, or fortun- , , 
ate; prosper, εὐτυχέω. 


»» , » 
ἐὰν τι δέῃ, or εἴ τι δέοι. 


© τίτεαϊ all. ἐάν τι δέῃ, if it should be at all necessary. 

h Then truly (and not before) =then only. 

ἐ χρή (oportet)—ypein, χρῇ, χρῆναι, part. neut. (τὸ) χρέων. Imperf. 
ἐχρῆν ΟΥ̓χρῆν (not, Exon): fut. χρήσει. 

Properly, ‘when you shail have done? but in English a future 
action, that is to precede another future action, is generally put in the 
Present or perfect tense. We do not, that is, mark that it is now 4a- 
ture, but consider ourselves as removed by the ‘when, &c. to the time 
of its happening. 


ON THE MOODS. 
Forwne, τύχη, NS, Yo 
Hear, ἀκούω." 
Judge, decide, κρίνω. 
When, ὅτε." 
Then, τότε. 
When? πότε ; 
Destroy, διαφϑείρω." 
Take, λαμβάνω.“ 
Whosoever, whatsoever, ὅστις.» 
When, after, ἐπειδή, Or with ἄν, ἐπειδάν. 


(παρεῖναι, to be present τον or there), is often used of being present 
to assist; where we should use ‘come to you,’ or ‘ be with you.’) 


Exercise 16. 


37> When the consequent verb is in the fut., how is ‘if’ transla- 
ted? with what mood ?—81. ὃ. 

93. He says that he will come, if he is wanted (91. δ). 
If we do what we ought, we shall be happy. If the 
citizens were to do* what they ought, they would be 
prosperous. If the citizens had done what they ought 
(tmperf.), they would be prosperous (now). When I 
have any thing, I will give it. When they see this, 
they will fear. When you have managed the affairs of 
the state well, you shall manage mine also. He hopes 
that he shall (thus) be able to deceive the godsalso. I 
am glad that the enemy are destroyed.’ If the enemy 
had done this, they would have been destroyed. The 

judge said, that he would come, if he were wanted. 


1 Fut. ἀκούσομαι (but aor. 1. ἤκουσα), ἀκήκοα, ἤκουσμαι. 

™ ὅταν when the subj. should be used with ἄν. 

® διαφθείρω, διαφθερῶ, διέφθαρκα. 

© λαμβάνω, λήψομαι, εἴληφα. ἔλαβον. 

P The neut. of ὅστις has sometimes a mark like a comma (called 
diastole or hypodiastole) after the o, to distinguish it from ὅτι, that. (δ, τι.) 


ON THE MOODS. 


§ 16. The Moods continued. 


94. a) The optative is used of what happened often, 
when the time spoken of is past. 
1) For pres. or future time, the relatives with ἄν and compounds 
of ἄν could be used. 
2) To relatives ἄν gives in this way the force of our ever. ὃς ἄν 
(= quicumque, siquis) whoever, any man who; in plur. all who. 

95. a) ὑπερῷον: εἶχεν ὁπότ ἐν ἄστει" διατρίθοι," re 
had an upper chamber whenever he stayed 
in town. 

δ) ἔπραττεν ἃ δόξειεν αὐτῷ, he did what (in each 
case) seemed good to him. 

c) οὗς (μὲν) ἴδοι εὐτάκτως καὶ σιωπῇ ἰόντας, ἐπήνει," 
he used to praise those whom (at any time) 
he saw marching in good order and in si- 


lence. 
96. VocaBuLARY 16. 
Upper chamber, ὑπερῷον, Ov, τό. 
Whenever, ὁπότε. 


Stay (in a town), διατρίβω. 
It seems good, δοκεῖ" (= videtur,videntur, 


ἃ δοκεῖ μοι, what seems 
good tome,what I please 
or choose to do). 

In good order, εὐτάκτως. 

Rank, τάξις, εως," 7. 


4 ὑπερῷον, adj. understand οἴκημα. ὑπερώϊος, Gos from ὑπέρ, as πα 
γρώϊος, Gos from πατήρ. (P.) 

® ἄστυ is used of Athens as we use ‘ town’ of London. 

® διατρίβειν, to rub (or wear) away, χρόνον, βίον (conterere tempus 
terere vitam). Without acc. to linger, stay, &c. 

t The imperfect of an habitual action ; translated by ‘used to? &e 
See 2. Oss. 

5 δοκέω (seem and also think), δόξω, δέδογμαι (visus sum), aor. 1. 
Joga. (‘The 3 sing. δοκεῖ, imperf. ἐδόκει, δόξει, Edoge(v), δέδοκται). 

Υ τάσσω, real root ray. Hence ταγ-σιςπετάξι. Nouns in σις, σία, 


ON THE MOODS. 


Order, arrange, taco, fo. 
Dining-roc m, avoryecor,” ὦ, τό. 
March (ofa single soldier), εἶμι." 
Silence, σιωπή, ἧς, 7. 
Horse-soldier ἱππεύς, enc, é 
, ἱππεὺς, eos, ὁ (plu. caval 
_Ty). 
, > Φ 
ἐλαύνειν εἰς (With acc., some- 
times, ἐπῶ). 


To charge an enemy, 


Exercise 17. 


> What is tne fut. of ἐπαινέω 7—60, note d. 


97. He had a dining-room whenever he sta 
town. ‘The judge had an upper chamber we Bas » 
stayed in town. I praise all whom 1 see (94.1) acting 
well. ‘The judge praised all whom he saw acting well. 
I will do whatever (94.1) I please.*? Whenever he 
took any city, he used to kill all the citizens. When I 
have taken® the city, I will kill all the citizens. When 
you have taken the city, do not kill the citizens, 1 praise 
those who march in silence. If you march in good or- 
der, I will praise you. Who would not admire cavalr 
marching (riding) in order? The cavalry of the Per- 
sians charge the ranks of the enemy. J should like to 
see* cavalry sharging the enemy. 


§ 17. Onthe Moods. 


98. The subjunctive is used in doubting questions 
either alone, or after βούλει, ϑέλεις (do you wish 2). 


Soalso after οὐκ ἔχω (or οἷδα : 72, δ), and ἀπορῶ (έω) Tam at aloss, 


irom verbs, denote regularly the abstract notion of 
‘ note the verb. Hen 
nifis==the putting in order ; but also, order, a place assigned, &c. seh 
ν πο ἀνώγαιον from ἄνω, γαῖα, earth, ground. 
= εἶμ", ibo, (not to be confounded with εἰμί, sum). 


ON THE MOODs. 


ἐρωτῶ (dw) ask ζητῶ (éw) seek. (Optat. after the historical tenses 
72. ὃ.) 


99. a) βούλει» οὖν σκοπῶμεν ; doyou, wish then, that 

we should consider (the question) ? 

b) πόϑεν βούλει ἄρξωμαι; what do you wish me 
to begin with 3 

6) τί ποιῶ; what shall Ido? what am Ito do? 
ποῖ τράπωμαι ; whither shall Iturn myself ? 

d) εἴπω οὖν σοι τὸ αἴτιον; shall I then tell you 
the cause? 

6) νῦν ἀκούσω" avdic—; shall I now hear 
again— ? 


100. VocaBuLary 17. 


Wish, βούλομαι, ϑέλω or ἐθέλω. 
Consider, examine, σχοπέω. 

Whence. moder. 

Begin, ἄρχομαι, 

Cause, αἴτιον," ov, τό. 

Again, αὖϑις. 

Then (of inference), ovr. 

Am ata loss, ἀπορέω." 

Seek, ζητέω. 


(ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν, ἀπὸ cod, &e. ἀρξάμενος (having begun with you =) and 
you among the first ; and you as much as any body.) 


Υ 2. sing. of βούλομαι, which with Srropa: and οἴομαι always make εἰ 
in 2. sing. pres. (ὄψει, οἴει). 

* The subjunctive used in this way (subjunctivus dubitativus or de 
liberativus) must not be mistaken for the future. 

* ἐθέλω (the most general expression for wishing) denotes particu- 
larly that kind of wish in which there lies a purpose or design; conse- 
quently the desire of something, the execution of which is, or appears 
to be, in one’s own power. βούλομαι, on the other hand, is confined to 
that kind of willingness or wishing, in which the wish and inclination 
towards a thing are either the only thing contained in the expression, 
or are at least intended to be marked particularly. Hence it expresses 
a readiness and willingness to submit to what does not exactly depend 
upon oneself—( Butt. Lezilogus, Eng. Trans. 194.) 

» Properly adj. 

* From a, not, πόρος, passage, outlet. 

4 The ἀρξάμενος must be in the case of whatever it refers to. 


. 


ON THE Moops 


Exercise 18. 


> After what tenses must the opf j 
tences ? € opt. be used in dependent sen- 


101. What shall I say? Do you wish, then. (t 
we should go away? What shall we do? De me 
wish, then, that we should tel] you the cause? Do you 
wich that I should hold-my-tongue-about this? Doyou 
wish, then, that I should begin? All men, and you as 
much as any body, praise this man. ‘This eagle has a!2 
black head. They praise no¢ only* the mother, but alse 
the daughter, Not only you, but also your friends, will 
prosper, if you do this. We must bear what fortune 
sends (what comes Jrom fortune*). You yourself shall 
hear. Iam ata loss what (72, note p) to do. They are 


at a loss which way to turn themselves, They did not 
know which way to turn themselves. 


J 


ESE Lhe, oe 


ᾧ 18, The Moods continued. 


' 
102. a) εἴ τι ἔχοι (or ἔχει) ἔφη δώ ε 
mI . » Py δώσειν. 

) b) δι Tt Pot ἔφη δοῦναι ἄν. ᾿ Compare ex- 


pendent on another verb, the consequent 
clause is in the infinitive. 


Ὁ) Instead, therefore, of the optative with ἄν (in 
81. 6) we shall have the infin. with ἄν. 


6) εἴ τι εἶχεν, ἔφη δοῦναι ἄν. ( amples in 81. 
) 03. a) When conditional Propositions become de- 
᾿ J 


\ 


\ c) Instead of the imperfect or aorist with ἄν (81. 


d@) we shall have the present or aorist infin. 
with ἄν. 

104. a) Instead of the indic. Suture (81. δ) we shall 
have the injin, future ; and εἰ with opta- 


tive instead of ἐάν with subj., if in connec: 
tion with past time. 


ΠΕ 


* Also ef τι ἔχει (or ἔχοι), ἔφη δώσειν dy. See 86. note w. 
3 


50 οὐ AND μή. 


105. Thus where we should have had in the conse 
ent clause, Ὅλοι ἐν... 
ἃ ποιοῖμ ἄν, ποιήσαιμ' ἄν, ; πεποιήκοιμ τι 
ποιήσω, ἐποίουν ἄν, καὶ ἐποίησα ἂν, ἐπεποιήκειν ἂν, 


all have ~ ” f ἄν 
we sem ὰ μ ιεῖν ἄν, ποιήσαι ἂν, πεποιηκέναι 
ποι ᾽ 


Exercise 19. 


t, if you were to do this, you would 
do oie ae I said that, if aT ΟΝ 
oe VS aa Ὅς gore iq it to the slave. 
He. ae tt pape were to do this, he would 2 Sa 
aa injury” to the state. He said that he was t nee 
ape τῇ δ How much do you think me Pa 
sae would fetch, if they were sold det CM oe 

ld not wonder at the shamelessness ὁ i 
datheser 2 He told me, that his ee rs 
emely like 
— arte Hf the Pecelane of the present day'' ΜΝ 
κ᾿ τῶ εἶν would be doing better. 1 should wish to be 
Smunaaed with what comes from the gods."® 


§ 19. οὐ and μή. 


) denies independently and directly. 

= 2} μή παυσαμένου independently and directly, 
᾿ ΓΝ in reference to something else ; to some 
supposed case, condition or purpose Png in 
the expression of some fear, solicitude, or 

repens ibiti 32. Obs.) 

Ἵ 18 used in all prohibitions (see 32. Obs. 
= 2) With all pare πάν particles, εἰ, ἐάν (ἤν, ἄν), 


form : ἐθέλω, - ἥσω, —nxa, 


οὗ AND μή. δ) 
ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, ὅζο., and with ὅτε, ὁπότ 
‘when, if a condition is implied (111. d). 

3) With all particles expressing. intention or 


Purpose ; iva, ὅπως, ὡς, &e. 
he compounds of μή will 


Note.—In the same cases 1 
be used when required, 


108. But οὐ is used with ὅτι, ὡς (that): and also with 
ἐπεί, ἐπειδή (when, after, and ἃ5 causal conjunctions, as, 
since), because they relate to actual Sacts. 

109. a. δ.) οὐ is also (generally) used when the 


opinions, &c. of another person are stated in oblique 
narration. 


For though these seem to be dependent, they are only distinguizn- 
ed from direct assertion in Sorm. 


110. c) In negative propositions, 
and adverbs should be translated int 


responding negative forms. 


Positive pronoung 
0 Greek by the cor 


anybody, an 
$19.) Y; any 


111. a) οὐκ ἐϑέλειν' φησίν, he says that he does nol 


choose. 
δ) νομίζει od καλὸν εἶνα 
honorable. 
> , 7 3 vf , 
6) ov δύναται ob? εὖ λέγειν, 


t, he thinks that it is not 


οὔτ᾽ εὖ ποιεῖν τοὺς φι 
λους, he cannot either speak well of his 
Jriends, or treat them well. : 


d) οὐκ ἐξῆν εἰσελϑεῖν παρὰ τὸν or 


ρατηγόν, ὁπότε μὴ 
σχολάζοι, persons were not allowed to go in 


to the general, when he was not at leisure. 
(Here a condition is implied: if he was not 
at leisure at that time.) 
112. VocanuLary 18. 
Nobody, 


> , , ’ 
οὐδείς, μηδεις, “Mit, -ἕν, 
Not a single person, 


οὐδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ εἷς. 


© Of ἐθέλω, θέλω (see 100, note a), the former is the common prose 


52 ov AND py. 


No longer, 

Not evén, 

Neither, nor, 

Neither, nor yet, 

Both, and, 

Unless, 

Go into, 

Go away, 

Company (=intercourse 
with), 

Bid, order, 

One is allowed (lice?), 

To be at leisure, 

Leisure, 


> ? 
οὐκέτι, unxétt.® 
> , , 
ovde, unde. 
” in , 
οὔτε---οὔτε: ujts—pyrte. 
” Pt Sa , 
ovre—ovde: μήτε---μηδέ. 
καί---καί, OF τέ--- καί. 
εἰ μή. 
> , 
εἰσέρχομαι. 
ἀπέρχομαι." 


ε , ¢ 
ὁμιλία, ας, ἢ. 


κελεύω. 

ἔξεστι. 

σχολάζω. 

σχολή (σχολῇ, slowly : with 
a verb τα am slow todoa 
thing, &c.) 


Ons. ré—«xai is very often used, where we should only use ‘and,’ 
—The notions are thus brought into closer connection, and the ré 
prepares us for the coming «ai. 


Exercise 20. 


5. τ When should μὴ κλέπτε be used? = when μὴ κλέψης 1 72. 


113. I will go away (65, note 5), that I may not see 
the battle. Let us no longer pursue what is disgrace- 
ful. He told me, that the road did not lead to Athens 
,108). Do not think, that the citizens serve you. If you 
jo not do what you ought (91. 6), you will not prosper. 
No longer accustom yourself to deceive your father. I 
will not take it, unless you bid (me). Let no one steal 
this. Let not asingle person go away. He says that 
the boys do not wish to go away. Let us not fly-from 
the company of the good. He said that, unless the citi- 
zens performed him this service**, he would lay waste 
the rest'® of the country. I shall be slow to do that.™ 


8 ir: is yet, still; with negatives, any longer. 
b ἔρχομαι, ἐλεύσομαι ἐλήλυθα, (ἤλυθον) ἦλθον. See 65. note g. 


VERBALS IN τέος. 


§ 20. Verbals in τέος. 


_ 114. These verbals are formed both from trans. and 
tnirans. verbs: and also from mid. (deponent) verbs, 
since they are sometimes used in a passive meaning. 
: 115. a) They are passive, and take the agent in the 
ative ; but they also govern the object in the same case 
as the verbs from which they come. 
: a) When used in the neuter (with the agent in 
the dat. omitted), they are equivalent to the participle in 
posal =r in the same way, and express: ‘one must, 
ought, &c.; § 
tyr ) ; ‘we, you, &c. must, ought,’ &c.; or, ‘isto 
117. δ) When formed from transitive verbs, they may 
“n ᾿ ἐρόλ τ Ὁ ἀκοὰς, with the object, the agent 
ing still in the dative. Here, too, they exactly agr 
with the participle in dus. sep Bere 
118. 'T'we peculiarities in Attic Greek deserve notice: 
1, The neut. plur. is used as well as the neut. 
sing. 
2. The agent is sometimes put in the accus. 
as well as the object. 
‘alt 19. c) When a verb has two constructions with 
6 erent meanmgs, the verbal adjective sometimes has 
pa ye sel with accus. has the meaning of per- 
uade (πείϑειν twa); with the dat. the 
(πείϑεσϑαί " cw:). : a 
120. a) G. ἐπεδυμητέον ἐστὶ τῆς ἀρετῆς, we, you, 
ah &c. should desire virtue. 
.ἐπιχειρητέον ἐστὶ τῷ ἔργῳ, we, you, KC. 
should set about the work. ὃ 
A. κολαστέον ἔστ᾽ τὸν παῖδα, we, yau, &c. 
should punish tie doy. 
you shauid 
cultivate vie - 
fue. 


> , > ΄ 
δ) ἄσχητεον ἐστί σοι τὴν ἀρετῇ ν, 
, > . 
ἀσκηφϑα ἐστί σοι ἡ AQEXS, 


' Perf. 2. (or mid.) πέποιθα, I trust, or jtel cure: I am persuaded. 


Ἵ + 
᾿ 
ἢ 
- Ἵ 
- + 
Ἢ 
ἘΠ 
? 
Ϊ ΠῚ 
Ϊ 
; “Ὁ 
 Ὸ 
Ϊ f \ 
q j 
a ] : 
ΕΠ ἢ" ΠῚ 
im) 
4 ἢ] 
ἡ ii HT 
ὃ ἢ 
᾿ 
ΠῚ ] ; 
i 
ἢ 


=k oe = 


pete 


peer awit ae no 


VERBALS IN Té0¢. 


δ) πειστέον ἐστὶν αὐτόν, we must persuade him. 
πειστέον ἐστὶν αὐτῷ, we must obey him. 


N. B. These examples may all be trans.ated passive 
ly. Virtue should be cultivated, &c. 


121. VocanuLaRy 19. 
ΤῸ practise, exercise, culti- 


vate. 
Desire 


Set about, take in hand, 


Work, task, production, 


Parent, 
Attempt, endeavour, try, 


Permit, suffer, 

Restrain by punishment, 
punish, chastise, _ 

Run or fly to the assistance 
of, assist in the defence of, 


ἀσκχέω. 
> , 
ἐπι-ϑυμέω (gen. from ἐπί; 
on, ϑυμός, mind, passion). 
ἐπι-χειρέω, (dat, from ἐπί, 
| Kee). . 
ἔργον, ov, τό. 
γογεύς, ἕως, ὁ. ᾿ 
πειράομαι, (verb. adj. πειρα- 
> as 
ἐάω" (verb. adj. ἐατέος). 


κολάζω, (fut. -ἀσομαι). 


βοηϑέωι (ἀ αἱ.) 


Oss. These verbals should be formed from aor. 1 pass.™ by reject 
ing the augment, turning θην into réos, and therefore the preceding 
aspirate (if there is one) into its mute (t. 6. 77, «7, for $9, x9). κι 

+> Form verbals from διώκω pursue, φεύγω Sly from, ὠφελέω 


benefit. 


Exercise 21. 


122. The great work must be set about. We must 
not shun the labour. All the citizens should confer 
benefits on the state. He said that all the citizens 
ought to confer benefits on their country (state), when 
there is any occasion. Wemust fly-to-the-assistance of 


—_— 


κ Augment ¢. 
1 From βοή cry, θέω run. 


= For if the aor. 1. has a different vowel, &c. from perf. pass., the 
rerbal adj. follows it, and not the perf. 


DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 58 


our country. Wemustset about the task of chastising" 
the boy. If the slave had done this, it would® be ne- 
cessary to punish him. If the boy should do this, it 
would be necessary to punish him. He told us, that if 
this were so,*” we ought to set about thetask. We must 
punish not only** my boy, but also my brother’s.6 Pa- 
rents’ and poets" love their own productions. He said 
that virtue should be cultivated by all. Whoever (ὅστις 
dy, 94, 2) is** caught, shall be punished. We must not 
be slow®™ to obey our parents. 


ᾧ 21. Double Accusative. 


_ 123. Verbs of taking away from, teaching, conceal- 
ing, asking, putting on or off, take two accusatives. 


124. a) Θηβαίους χρήματα» ἤτησαν,» they asked 

the Thebans for money. 

δ) οὔ σε ἀποχρύψω ταῦτα, Iwill not hide this 
Srom you. 

C) τοὺς πολεμίους τὴν ναῦν ἀπεστερήκαμεν, 
we have deprived the enemy of their ship. 

d) διδάσκουσι τοὺς παῖδας σωφροσύνην, they teach 
the boys modesty (moderation or self-re- 
straint.) 

6) τὸν παῖδα ἐξέδυσε τὸν χιτῶνα, he stript the boy 
of his tunic. 


125. VocapuLary 20, 
Thebans, Θηβαῖοι, oi. 
Money, χρήματα, ta (pl. of χρῆμα). 


5 The art. must be repeated before ‘ poets? or the meaning would 
be ‘ those who are parents and poets; in other words, bsth attributes 
would be spoken of the same subject. 

9 From xpdopa (see 8, note a). It is only in the plur. that it 
means money, etc. Properly, a thing used. 

P αἰτεῖσθαι in the mid. (sibi aliquid expetere) does not take two ac- 
tusatives, but one acc. ard παρά, or one noun and an infin. (Poppo.) 


56 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVEw 


Hide, κρύπτω," ἀπο-χρύπτω 

Ship, ναῦς," γεώς, 7. 

Deprive of, ἀποστερέω. 

‘Take away from, ἀφ-αιρέω." 

Teach, δίδάσκω." 

Modesty, moderation, self- 
restraint, 

To be wise, (i. e. prudent), 
or in one’s right mind, 

To be mad, pawouc.” 

Die, ϑνήσκω," ἀποϑνήσκω. 

Mortal, ϑνητός, ἤ, Ov. 

Immortal, ἀϑάνατος, ος ον. 

Strip, or take off, &xdv00, * in mid. “on or off 

Put on, évdveo,* 4 myself.” 

Tunic, χιτών, 7 ὥνος, ὁ. 

Misfortune, δυσπρᾶγία, ag, ἡ. 


΄ ε 
σωφροσυνγὴ," HS, 7. 


σωφρονέω. 


PHRASES. 


But for, εἰ μὴ διά (acc.) 
All but, ὅσον ov (1. 6. just as much 
as not). 


4 In aor. 2. this verb has 8 for charact. 

¥ vais, νεώς, νηΐ, ναῦν, --α νῆες, νεῶν, ναυσί, vais. These are the forms 
as used in Attic Greek. 

® αἱρέω (ήσω, &.), εἷλον, ἡ έθην. ᾿ 

t ri abba palbe, Coe oT ta Act. Iteach Mid. [have (them 
taught. 

5 Σωῤροσύνην .... quam soleo equidem quum _temperantiam tum 
moderationem appellare, nonnunquam etiam modestiam. (Cic.) —cévn, 
abstract nouns from adj. in ων (especially) and others. σώφρων (from 
σῶς salvus, φρήν mens), moderate, temperate ,—prudent. ἐᾷ 

¥ μαΐνομαι, μανοῦμαι, μέμηνα (with meaning of pres.), aor. ἐμάνην. 

Ὑ θνήσκω, θανοῦμαι, τέθνηκα, ἔθανον. The perf. and aor. = I am dead. 

* δύω, go into, and also make to go into,—sink, enclose. Act. fut. 
and aor. with the trans. meaning. Mid. δύομαι, (δύσομαι, ἐδυσάμην) en- 
close myself=put on (a garment). ἔδυν (δῦθι----ὐῦναι, dis) has also this 
meaning. Hence ἐνδύω, put on: ixdiw, put off, strip (with fut. and 
aor.) ; both of another: mid. of myself. 

y And under-garment with sleeves, over which a mantle was worn 
out of doors. 


THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, ; eens: 57 


Outside, without, ἔξω (ery τὰ ἔξω, external, 


outward things. 
External, ὁ ἔξω (27). E L7A 
Within, ἔνδον (also, in doors, at 

home; ἔνδον καταλαβεῖν, 

to find a man in, or at 


home). 


Exercise 22. 
> What is the literal English of εἰ μὴ διά 1 

126. I will put on my tunic. Do not hide your mis- 
fortunes from me. We will teach our daughters mod. 
esty. O mother, do not teach your daughter impudence 
We will take away this from the woman, Let us not 
teach these most disgraceful things to our boys. The 
rest of the Thebans were there to see the battle. He 
would have died*’ but for the dog. Let us not fly from 
the all but present war. I will put. his tunic on the 
boy. Ifthe enemy do this,** we will deprive them of 
their ship. I should have died®’ but Jor my faithful 
slave. This man has stript me of my tunic. Tf you do 
not perform me this service,? I will deprive you of your 
pay. Ifwe find him at home, we will kill him.” He 
killed all who were within. Let us love the compatiy 
of the temperate. Let us not fear external evils, 


$22. The Accusative after Passive and Neuter Verbs 


127. The accus. of the active becomes the nom. of 
the pass. 

128. a) If the verb governs two accusatives, that of 
the person becomes the nominative ; that of the thing 
continues to be the object of the passive ver), as in Latin. 
But also, 


129. δ) The dat. of the active sometimes becomes 
3* 


NS: ee ye a te 


ἡ 
| 
\ 


i 
a 
i} 


} 
Ι 


Σ Pee: ἐπ ΟΣ; 


ἘΞ τ᾿ 


| ᾿ 
ἜΝ 
εὶ 
@ 
; 
ἱ iW) 
i H ti 
=. Νὰ 
} 


58 THE ACCUSATiIVE AFTER PASSIVE, ὅσο. VERBS. 


the nom. of the passive; the object of the active coir 
tinuing to be the object of the passive in the accusative 
(ἐπιτρέπειν, πιστεύειν τινί τι). 

130. d) Intransitive verbs take an ace. of a noun of 
kindred meaning ; and (as in ῥεῖν γάλα) of one that 
restricts the general notion of the verb to a particular 


instance. 
e) Here the ordinary accus. of the object is found together with 
this limiting accusative. 
131. a) ἀφαιρεϑεὶς" τὴν ἀρχήν, having had his 
government taken from him. 
b) ὃ Σωκράτης ἐπιτρέπεται τὴν δίαιταν. Socra- 
"tes is entrusted with the arbitration ; 
πεπίστευμαι" τοῦτο, this is entrusted to me, 
or Tam entrusted with this. 
c) éxxonsig τοὺς ὀφϑαλμούς, having had his 
eyes knocked out. eS 
d) ῥεῖν γάλα, to flow with milk ; ζῇν" βίον, to live 
a life ; κινδυνεύειν κίνδυνον, to brave a dan- 
ger; πόλεμον πολεμεῖν, ἰο wage a war, 
ὕπνον κοιμᾶσϑαι, to sleep a sleep. 
e) ἐνίκησετοὺς βαρβάρους τὴν ἐν Magadan 
μάχην, he conquered the barbarians in 
the battle of Marathon. 


132. VocaBuLary 21. 
Tu commit, confide, or en- 


trust to, 
Entrust to, 


s , 
ἐπιτρέπω.ἷ 


πιστεύωϊ (also with dat. 
only, to trust a person). 
Arbitration, δίαιτα, mS, ἢ. 
Faith, πιστις, EWG, ἢ. 
Disbelieve, disobey (ἃ pei- νπιστέω (dat.) 
son or law), 


- 


5 125, note 8. ; . 
® ἐγὼ πιστεύομαι (ὑπό τινος), [ am trusted, confided in, or believed. 


> ζάω, xpdopat, πεινάω, διινάω (live, use, hunger, thirst), contract as 


ima η (neta). ζῶ, ζῇς, ἄτα. ; 
+ For the distinction between these words, see Index under ‘ en 


tra sé to 


THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PASSIVE, &c. VERBS. 59 


Law, 

Cut out, knock out, 

Cut to pieces, 
Government, magistracy, 


Danger, 

Brave, incur, expose one- 
self to a danger, 

Kye, 

T’o sleep, 

Sleep, 

Fountain, 

Flow, 

Flows with a full or strong 
stream, 


Honey, 

Conquer, 

Victory, 

Barbarian, (i. e. one who is 
not a Greek), 


To hold a magistracy or 
office. 


Milk, 


River, 


ψόμος, Ov, ὃ. 

ἐχ-κόπτω. 

κατα-κύπτω. 

ἀρχή, ἧς, ἡ (also, begin- 
ning: act. ἀργήν, or τὴν 
ἀρχήν, used adverbially 
for at all, or ever, after 
negatives, when an ac- 
tion is spoken of ). 

κίνδυνος, ov, ὃ. 


, , 
κινδυνεύειν κίνδυνον. 


ὀφϑαλμός, οὔ, ὃ. 

κοιμάομαι (aor. - ϑην). 

ὑπνος, Ov, ὃ. 

πηγή, ἧς, ἧ. 

peo.° 

πολὺς ῥεῖ, (the adj. being in 
the case and gender of 
its noun). 

μέλι, tt09, τό. 

γικάω. 


ψίκη, ης, ἧ. 
βάβαρος, ov, ὁ. 


ἄρχειν ἀρχήν. 


γάλα, γάλακτος, τὸ (R. γα" 
λακτ). 
ποταμός, οὔ, ὁ. 


Exercise 23. 


133. I have had the arbitration entrusted tome. He 
said, that he had had the arbitration entrusted to him (72, 
6). ‘The eagle hashadits eyes knocked out. The foun- 


© ῥέω, ῥνήσομαι, ἐῤῥῥηκα ; aor. ἐῤῥύην (flowed) ; (ἐῤῥεῦσα and ῥεύσομαι, 


not Attic). 


60 THE ACCUSATIVE. 


tains flow with milk and honey. If the fountains flow 
both with milk and honey, we shall become rich. If the 
rivers had flowed with wine, the citizens would have be- 
come rich. If the citizens are wise, they will put him to 
death. Ifthe citizens are mad (aor.), they will put you 
to death. You will not be able (86*. δ) to disbelieve 
your mother. The rivers are flowing with a strong 
stream. “I'he thing has all but** been done. 1 should 
have killed you, but for your father. Sophroniscus 
had his government taken away from him. Hehashad 
his government taken away from him. Hares have 
large eyes.* Let us try to bear what comes from the 
gods.** We must try® to bear what Sortune sends. 
He conquered the Persians in the battle that took place 
there (in the there battle). I will not expose myself te 
this danger. The people outside were cut to pieces. ] 
asked the boy himself, whether (72. c) the river was 
flowing with a strong stream. I asked Sophroniscus 
what magistracy he held. 


§ 23. The Accusative continued. 


134. a) The accus. is used after nouns and adjectives 
where κατά, as to, might be supposed understood, 


It thus limite the preceding word to a particular part, circum. 
stance, &c. 

135. b) The accus. of a neut. pronoun or any gener- 
al expression, is often used in this way after verbs that 
would govern a substantive in another case. 

136. c) The accusative is used to express duration 
of time, and the distance of one place from another. 

137. a) καλὸς τὸ σῶμα, beautiful in person. “«Σωκρά- 

τῆς τοὔνομα," Socrates by name. πλήττομαι 
τὴν κεφαλή», Tam struck on the head. πᾶν. 
ta εὐδαιμονεῖ, he is happy in all respects. 


—- 


ἃ sr ὄνομα. 


THE ACCUSATIVE. 61 


δ) τἰχρῶμαι αὐτῷ ; what use shalt Imalse of it! 
what am 5 to do with it? οὐκ οἶδα ὅ,τι σοι 
χρῶμαι, I don’t know what use to maize of 
you ; I don’t know what to do with you. 

5) πολὺν χρόνον, a long time. τρεῖς ὅλους μῆνας 
three whole months. τὰ πολλά, mostly, (for) 
most of his time. ἀπέχει δέκα σταδίους, it is 
ten stadia off. 

d. tovvavrior,’ on the contrary. τὸ λεγόμενον, as 
the saying is. 

138. VocaBuLary 22, 


Whole, _7 ~ ὅλος, ἡ, ov. 

Body, person, σῶμα, ατος, τό. 

Month, μήν, μηνός, ὃ. 

Ν ame, ὄνομα, ατος, τό. 

To strike, πλήσσω (Alt. πλήττω : used 
by the Attics only in 
perf. act. and in the 
pass. For other tenses 
πατάσσω, ko, is used.) 

Unjust, ἄδικος, ος ον. 

Do injustice to, injure, ἀδικέω (acc. of person and 
also of thing.) 

Injusti ze, ἀδικία, ας, ἡ (ἀδικεῖν ἀδικίαν, 
to commit an injury). 

Staff, * ῥάβδος, ov, ἡ. 

Insult, ὑβρίζω (acc.: ὑβρίζειν εἴς τι- 
va, to act insolently to- 
wards). 

Insult, insolence, ὕβρις, εως, 7. 

Reverence, αἰδέομαι, ἔσομαι, et aor. 1 

pass. : (acc.) 

Run away from, ἀποδιδράσκωϑ ( acc.) 


9 The subj. used as in 99. c. expresses more doubt as to what is te 
be done than the fut. 

€ srd ἐναντίον. 

© διδράσκω, δράσομαι, δέδρᾶκα. ἔδραν (δρᾶθι, δραίην, δρῶ (ᾷς, &e.) coe 
“αι, dpas). 


62 THE ACCUSATIVE. 


Too have no fear of, to be 
without fear of, 

Mild, gentle, πρᾶος," πραεῖα, πρᾶον. 

Disposition, ἦϑος, εος, τό. 

T’o be distant from, ἀπέχω (mid, abstain from; 

gen.) 
Use, do with, χράομαι (dat.) 
Stadium, στάδιος or στάδιον. 


ϑαῤῥέω (acc.) 


Exercise 94. 


I> Why is ὅστις used in 137. 87) 12, note p. 


139. 'The boy is of a mild disposition. He told me 
that his daughter was of a mild disposition. If any one 
of your slaves should run away from you, and you 
should take him, what would you do with him? A 
certain philosopher, Socrates by name, was there, to see 
the man. Accustom yourself to have-no-fear-of death. 
I am not without fear of the king of the Persians. I 
have been struck on my head.‘' He struck the boy with 
a staff. Accustom yourself to reverence your parents. 
insult nobody. The injury (nom.) which they commit- 
ted against you. We ought to do® what is just,!® and 
abstain: from what is unjust. ψ city is three stadia 
off. Let us avoid insolence. We must pursue what is 
δα Let us insult nobody, Let us no longer act inso- 
ently towards those who' manage the affairs of the 
state. 


δ πρᾷος B. (πρᾶος P. R. K.) takes all fem. and neut. plur. as if 
from pais, πραεῖα, τι. pl. πραέα. Plur. mas. mpd, πραεῖς : G. πραέων: D. 
πρᾷοις͵ πραέσι(ν) : A. xpdovs, πραεῖς. 

i The verbal adj. from ἀπέχεσθαι is ἀφεκτέος, ἃ word not found in 
Passow’s Lexicon, but used by Xenophon. It, of course, governs the 
gen. 


THE GENITIVE. 


§ 24. The Genitive. 


Oss. The fundamental notion of the genitive is separation fi 
proceeding from; i. 6. the notion of the prepositions from, out o 


(B.) 

140. a) Partitives, numerals, superlatives, &c. θον- 
ern the genitive. 

141. 6) The genitive is used with adverbs of time 
and place. 

142. d) The genitive also expresses \he material 
out of which any thing is made; and generally such 
properties, circumstances, &¢. as we should express by 


So Vf. } 

Oss. 1. δ) Our indef. art. must be translated by the Greek (def.) 

art. in expressions like ‘once a day,’ &c., where ‘a’ is equivalent to 
‘each.’ 


Oss. 2. e) The gen. stands after possessive pronouns in a kind of 
apposition to the personal pronoun implied. It may often be trans- 
lated as an exclamation. ‘The gen. is also used alone, or after inter- 
jections, as an exclamation, 


143, a) οἱ φρόνιμοι τῶν ἀνθρώπων, sensible per- 
sons. οὐδεὶς Ἐλλήν ὦν, none of the Greeks. 
ἡ μεγίστη τῶν νόσων, the greatest of dis- 
eases. 

δ) τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας, three times a day. ποῦ γῆς, 
in what part of the world? πόῤῥω τῆς ἡ λι.- 
κίας, far advanced in years. 

6) ἔδωκά σοι τῶν χρημάτων, I gave you (some) 
of my money. πίνειν ὕδατος, to drink 
some water. ἐσϑίειν κρεῶν, to eat some 
meat (of a particular time: with the accus- 
ative the meaning would be to do it habitu- 
ally). 

a) στέφανος baxivdwr, a crown of hyacinths. 
δένδρον πολλῶν ἐτῶν, a tree many years 
ald. ἦν γὰρ ἀξιώματος μεγάλου, for he 
was of great consideration. 

6) διαρπάζουσι τὰ ἐμὰ τοῦ κακοδαίμονος, they are 


Te τ ----. “ = 


ae ere 


γϑάθιων 
“τὖ 


---.. 


SIE τος, πιο tS 


THE GENITIVE. 


puundering my property, wretched man 
thatlam! τῆς ἀναιδείας, what impudence ! 


144. VocapuLary 23. 


Sensible, prudent, 
Greek, 

Greece, 

To what place? whither ? 
Where? 

Far, far on, 

A person’s age, 

T’o drink, 

To eat, 

Flesh, meat, 

Crown, 

Tree, 

Year, 

Consideration, reputation, 
Violet, 

Lily, » 

Golden, 

Place on. 

Worthless, despicable, 
Arrive, 

To be given, 

Plunder, 

Wretched, unfortunate, 
Alas, 


’ 
φρόνιμος, ος OF. 
σ ε 
ἔλλην, νος, ὃ. 
€ , , ε 
Elias, adog, ἥ. 
ποῖ; 
ποῦ; 
πόῤῥω. 
€ , e 
ἡλικία, ας, ἧ. 
πίνω." 
ἐσθίω.: 
κρέας τό. 
στέφανος, ου, ὃ. 
ld 
δενδρον," ov, τό. 
΄ 
ἕτος, £0¢ (ovg), τό. 
> , 
ἀξίωμα, ατος, τό. 
» , ᾿ 
tov (Είο») ov, τό. 
, 
κρίνον, OV, τό. 
χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς.» 
2 , 
ἐπι-τίϑημι (dat.) 
φαῦλος, ἢ, ov. 
ἀφ-ικνέομαι.3 


δοτέος (from ἐδόϑην, δίδωμι. 
διαρπάζω (fut. mid.) 
κακοδαίμων, ὧν, OP. 


φεῦ: οἴμοι. 


k πίνω, (irreg. fut.) πίομαι, πέπωκα, πέπομαι. 
δ ἐσθίω (from ἔδω), (irreg. fut.) 


(from root gay), ἠδέσθην. 
™ G. aos, ws, ἄτα. 


® δένδρον, D. plur. δένδρεσι (also plur. δένδρεα, 


Tonic form). 


9 κρίνον has in plur. a collateral form κρινέα, D. κρίνεσιγ as if from 


«γένος, N. 


Ῥ χρύσεος, ois, χρυσέη, ἢ, χρύσεον, οὖν. 
χρυσέου, οὗ, χρυσέης͵ ἧς, χρυσέου, od. 
χρυσέῳ, ᾧ, χρυσέῃ, ἢ, χρυσέῳ, ᾧ, &c. 


© ἱνέομαι, ἴξομαι, ἴγμαι, ἱκόμην. 


» ᾿ 
ἔπιον ἐπόθην. 
ἔδομαι, ἐδήδοκα, ἐδήδεσμαι. 


devdpbors from another 


THE GENITIVE. 


PHRASEs. 


Till late in the day, μέχρι πόῤῥω τῆς ἡμέρας. 
Willingly at least, ἑχὼν εἴγαιτ 
So to say, to speak gener- ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν τ (showing 
ally, that a general assertion is 
not absolutely true.) 


Exercise 25. 


145. I will placea crown of violets on the boy’s head, 
The mother placed a crown of lilies on her daughter’s 
head. Let us imitate sensible persons. Let us not imi- 
tate worthless persons. I will be with you three times 
every year. If he wee not (a person) of great consider- 
ation,® the citizens wold have put him to death. At 
what part of the earth am [ arrived? I will] give each 
of them a golden crown. He told me that we ought to 
give to each of them a golden crown (71). If he had 
not been advanced in years, he would not have died. 
They slept (used to sleep) till late in the day. Let us 
hear whatever the gods please®? (90*). All men, so to 
say, admire rich men. No Grecian will do this, at least 
willingly. I will not drink any of the wine, at least 
willingly. I will give some of the flesh to this eagle. 
My property was plundered, wretched man that Iam ! 
Alas, what injustice! Alas for my possessions! Let 15 
dy from the greatest of diseases, shamelessness, 


ᾧ 25. The Genitive continued. 


146. a) Verbal adjectives with a transitive meaning 


* Such short phrases with the infin. are inserted in tie sentence: 
ἴδεν δὴ ἑκοῦσα εἶν α' οὐκ ἀπολείπεται ἡ ψυχή. See 15]. a 


66 THE GENITIVE. 


govern the genitive. That is, the object of the vern 
- Stands in the gen. after the verbal adjective. 
146". δ) Words relating to plenty, want, value, &c., 
govern the genitive. 
147. c) Verbs relating to the senses, except sight 
govern the genitive. 


Oss. ἀκούειν, hear, generally takes a gen. of the sound, and an ace. 
of the person producing it: butin neither case without exception. 


148. e. f) The genitive is often used where we may 
supply ‘in respect to’ in English. 
In this way, the gen. restricts a general expression to a particu- 
lar meaning; to some particular circumstance, object, &c. 
The genitive so used may often be supposed governed by ἕνεκα͵ 


on account of. It is very frequently used in this way after words 
compounded with a privative. 


149. a) πρακτικὸς τῶν καλῶν, apt to perform (or, in 
the habit of performing) honorable ac- 
tions. 

ὃ) μεστόν ἐστι τὸ ζῇν φροντίδων, life is full of 
cares. ἄξιος τιμῆς, worthy of honour. δεῖσ- 
Dae χρημάτων, to want money ; also δεῖσϑαι 
τινος (gen. of person), to beseech a person. 

c) ὄζειν μύρων, to smell of perfumes. ἅπτεσϑαι 
vexoov, to touch a corpse. axovew παιδίου 
κλαίοντος, to hear a child crying. 

τοὺς δούλους ἔγευσε τῆς ἐλευϑερίας, he allowed 
his slaves to taste of liberty. 

ἄγευστος τῆς ἐλευϑερίας, one who has never 
tasted of liberty. 

d) ἔχεσϑαί τινος, to cling to, or be next to. σω- 
τηρίας ἔχεσϑαι, to provide (carefully and 
anxiously) for one’s safety. 

6) ἄπαις ἀῤῥένων παίδων, without male offspring. 
ἐγγύτατα αὐτῷ εἰμι γένους, Tamvery near- 
ly related to him (literally, very near to 
him with respect to birth). δασὺς δένδρων, 
thick with trees; thickly planted with 
trees. 

SJ) εὐδαιμονίζω σε τ οὔ τρόπου, Ithink you hap- 


THE GENITIVE. 67 


py in your disposition. οἰκτείρω σε τοῦ 
πάϑους, 1 pity you on account of your 


affliction. 
150. VocapuLary 24, 


Apt to do or perform; in 
the habit of doing or per- 
forming, 

Apt, or fit to govern, 

‘To govern, 

To smell of, (i. e. emit a 
smell), 

Ointment, perfume, 

Touch, 

Corpse, 

Free, 

Freedom, liberty, 

Hear, 

Child, 

Cry, 

Give to taste, allow to 
taste, 

One who has not tasted, 

Childless, 


Male, 

Near, 

Race, family, birth, 
Thick, crowded, 

Think or pronounce hap- 


ΡΥ. 


πρακτικός, " ἥ, OV. 


ἀρχικός, ή, OV. 
ἄρχω ( gen.) 
ὄζω." 


’ * 
μύρον, OV, TO. 
9 
ἄπτομαι. 
, ~ e 9 ra 
vexooc, ov, ὁ (adj. “ dead”), 
> , 
ἐλεύϑερος, a, ov. 
ἐλ ϑ , < ε 
ἐλευϑερία, ας, ἧ. 
ax0v0). " 
, Vv , 
παιδίον," ov, τό. 
“ἌΝ 
κλαίω. 


γείω. 


ἄγευστος, ος ον. 

» ° ᾿ 

ἅπαις (One termin. G. dma 
δος). 

ἄῤῥην, * ἢ», ἕν. 

ἐγγύς (gen.) 

γένος, €0¢, τό, 

δασύς, εἴα, v. 


εὐδαιμονίζω. 


* «ds, appended to verbal roots, denotes jitness to do what the verb 
expresses. Appended to the root of substantives, it has the same lati- 


tude of meaning as os (20, note n.) 


* Kw, iow, ὅδωδα (with meaning of pres.) 

® ἀχούω, ἀκούσομαι, dxijxoay ἤκουσμαι, ἤκουσα. 

Ὕ —vov the principal termination of diminutives: mais, παιδίον 
Those that form a dactyl are parozytone ; the rest proparoxytone. 

~ κλαίω (xAaboopar, κλαυσοῦμαι); but aor. ἔκλαυσα. Att. κλάω (ἃ). 


= In old Att. ἄρσην. 


A cpm ere rene te -. “Ee = 
== - - Ὡς. =T τος = 
. — τ ακαοσσε πος -- - τ <7 See. 


ν 
4 t 
πὶ 
ε 
ἔ 
: 
Π 
ἣ 
] 1 ) 
} : 
Ϊ 
tt 
ΤΉΝ 
i 4 14 
ΓΝ ᾿ 
ἢ ἢ ΝΠ ΤΙ 
Ail Ὁ 
nis 
ι tt 
t iin 
: 
mt 
μ 1 ἡ 
| ‘ 
} 
ΗΙ ty 
te 
{ΠῚ 
᾿ 


SS τ Ὁ ΟΣ 


68 THE GENITIVE. 


Disposition, τρόπος, ov, ὃ. 
Pity, οἰκτείρω. 
Suffering, affliction, πάϑος, eog (ovs) τὸ ( plur 
“the passions”). 
Worthy, ἄξιος, a, ov. 
Honour, τιμή, ἧς, ἡ. 
Want, beseech, δέομαι (-ἤσομαι, -ἤϑην). 
Full of, μεστός, 1}, OV. 
Life, τὸ ζῇν. 
Cares, φροντίδες, αἱ (pl. cf φροντίς) 
Not at all, οὐδέν, μηδέν, often followed 
by τί: οὐδέν τι, &e. 
Who in the world? τίς mote ;* 
What is the verbal adj. in réos from εὐδαιμονίζω ? εὐδαιμονιστέος, 
What is the meaning of ἔχεσθαι with gen.? 149. d. 


Exercise 26. 


151. 1 asked whether (72. c) the children of the judge 
were in the habit of performing justactions. If you are 
in the habit of performing just actions, you will be hap- 
ΡΥ. I will make the boy fit to govern men. I am not 
at allin want of money. I would not touch a corpse, at 
least willingly. If the physician had been resent, my 
child would not have died. Let us ask yhe next (sub- 
jects) to these. I think you happy on account of your 
virtue. They pitied the mother on account of her afflic- 
tion. ‘The boy is nearly related to Socrates (149. e). 
He told me that the boy was very nearly related to So- 
crates. We ought to think the temperate happy. I would 
not willingly touch acorpse.* I asked the boy whether 
he thought life full of cares. What in the world am] 
to do with him (137. 5)? 


Υ τρόπος from τρέπω, to turn; as we say, @ man’s turn of mind. 

N.B. Nouns in os, from verbal roots, generally change ε of the roct 
into ὁ. 

5 ποτέ (enclitic), at any time; used with interrogatives, it expresses 
surprise. 

5 ἑκῶν εἶναι is confined to negative sentences. 


THE GENITIVE. 69 


Exercise 27. 


_ 152. Who in the world admires these things? Who 
in the world is this? If these things are so, let us care- 
fully provide for our safety. Let us speak what! comes 
next (149. d)to this. What inthe world are you admir- 
ing? I asked the judge, what in the world the citizens 
were admiring. The boy is nearly related to Sophronis- 
cus. Xenoclides will be general with three others.?! Let 
us rule over our passions. We must set about? the task 
of ruling over our passions. He told me that he was 
one-who-had-never-tasted-of liberty. Let uscling toour 
liberty. He told me thatthe whole** country was thickly 

lanted with trees. The judge is most worthy of honour. 

hat in the world shall we do with the boy ? 


§ 26. The Genitive continued. 


153. a) Most verbs that express such notions as free- 
ing Jrom, keeping off from, ceasing Srom, 
rtp or departing from, &c. govern 

δ) Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
getting ; caring for or despising ; spar- 
ms; aumiung at or desiring ; ruling over 
or excelling ; accusing of or condemning, 
&c. govern the genitive ; but not without 
many exceptions. 

154. VocaBuLary 25. 


(Verbs governing the genitive: the transitive ones with accus 
also, of course.) 


ἀπαλλάττω (y)* also, “to 
come out of an affair,” 
“come off” “ get off” éx, 
ἀπό. Mid. “take oneself 
off.” Aor. 2. pass. with 
mid. meaning. 


To fiee from, 


70 THE GENITIVE. 


Exclude from, 

Make to cease, 

Leave off, desist from, 
Miss, err, 


εἴργω." 

παύω (mid. * cease”). 

λήγω. 

ἁμαρτάνω " (also to sin, εἰς 


or περί With accus. 
against.) 

Differ, διαφέρω (60, note b). 

Way, ὁδός, ov, 7. 

Chase, hunting, ϑήρα, ας, 7. 

Sea, ϑάλασσα, 7, ἧ. 

Disease, ψόσος, OV, 7). 

Physician, ἰατρός, οὔ, ὃ. 

With impunity χαίρων (part. literally re- 

joicing”). 
πόνος, ov, ὃ (also “ trouble”). 


Toil, labour, 
ἀγορά, ἂς, 7. 


Market-place, 
Heavy-armed soldier, Hop- 


ε εἢ ε 
lité ὁπλίτης, OV, ὃ. 
3 


Exercise 28. 


155. Death will free us from all our toils. They 
will exclude the Persians from the sea. He told me, 
that the Athenians were excluding the Persians from 
the sea. They are here to exclude (72. ὃ) the Grecian ¢ 
Hoplites from the market-place. Speaking" fast is a 
different thing (differs) from speaking well. A good 
king does not αὐ allt differ from a good father. ‘The 
physician was there, that he might free the boy from 
his disease. He told me, that the physician had 
missed his way. If the judge had been there, you wouid 
not have escaped with impunity. If the king is there, 
they will not escape with impunity. They who have 
sinned' against the state, will not escape with impunity. 


ns 


b In Attic Greek, εἴργω is excludo, εἴργω inclado. (B.) 

© ἁμαρτάνω, ἁμαρτήσομαι, ἡμαρτήκα. ἡμάρτον. 

ἃ Of the Greeks. 

οὐδέν τι, not ἀρχήν: for ‘ at all’ dogs not here refer to an actiop 


THE GENITIVE. 7) 


The boy is desisting from tne chase. If I had known 
this, I would not have tried at alls‘ to persuade him. 


§ 27. The Genitive continued. 


156. VocaBuLaRy 26. 
Verbs governing the genitive. 


Remember, μέμνημαι." 

Forget, ἐπιλανϑάνομαι." 

Care ἴοσ, πᾶν any regard, 

for, κήδομαι. 

Hold cheap, ὀλιγωρέω. 

Despise, καταφρογέω. 

Spare, φείδομαι. 

Desire, ἐπιϑυμέω. 

Desire, ἐπιϑυμία, ας, ἡ. 

Aim at, στοχάζομαι. 

Master, κρατέω. 

Overcome, περιγίγνομαι. 

Get the better of, surpass, περίειμι. 

Accuse, charge, κατηγορέω (pass. “to be 
laid to the charge of”). 

Condemn, xaTAVLYVEOXO.€ 

Impiety, ἀσέβεια, ας, ἡ (impious, 
ἀσεβής, 87, note 2). 


© The third (paulo post) fut. is the fut. used for verbs that have a 
perf. of the pass. form with the meaning of a present: as μέμνημαι, pep- 
νήσομαι. 

f λανθάνω, λήσω, λέληθα. ἔλαθον. Mid. λανθάνομαι, λήσομαι, δέλησμαι. 
ἐλαθόμην. 

& γιγνώσκω, γνώσομαι, ἔγνωκα, ἔγνωσμαι. Aor. ἔγνων. (ἔγνων, γνῶθι, 
γνοίην, γνῶ, γνῶναι, yvots). 

Oss xarnyopé may have acc. of the charge or crime, gen. of the per- 
son: or, if no crime is mentioned, gen. of person. καταγιγνώσκω has ac- 
cus of the charge, or punishment; gen. of person. In the pass. the 
cc. will of course become the nom., and the gen. of the person remain. 


72 THE GENITIVE. 


Piety, εὐσέβεια, ας, ἡ (pious, evoe 
: βήρ). 
Banishment, φυγή, ἧς, ἧ. 

Former, ὁ πρίν (26). 
Folly, μωρία, ας, 1. 
Laughter, γέλως, WTOS, ὃ. 
I αἱ least, I for my part, ἔγωγε. 

F'ar (= much, greatly), πολύ. 


Forefather, ancestor, πρόγονος, OV, ὃ. 


Exercise 29. 


Zp What is the usual opt. of contracted verbs? inv, ῴην. 


157. 1 remember my former'' troubles. ‘They 


asked him whether he despised the Persians. Do not 
despise your neighbour. Let us spare our money. 
They accuse the judge himself of injustice. They con- 
demned them all to death (156, note 5). Do not aim at 
producing'* laughter. The men of the present day' 
have forgotten the virtue of their ancestors. Much in- 
justice is laid to the charge of Xenoclides. ‘The father 
of Xenoclides was found guilty®’ of impiety. Most 
persons desire money. Let us master our desires. Do 
not desire the property'® of your neighbour. Let us fly 
from the company of the impious. Let us not only 
speak well of the pious, but let us also confer benefits" 


upon them. 


Exercise 30. 


158. They have condemned Sophroniscus to banish 


nent (156, note g). He accuses the others of folly. If 
you had done this,** I for my part should have accused 
you of folly. If you do this, 1 for my part shall accuse 
you of folly. If any one should do this, the prudent 
would accuse him of folly. He said that, if any man 
did this, the prudent would accuse himof folly. I think 
you happy on account of your piety (149. f). ‘This boy 


ia 


THE GENITIVE. 73 


far surpasses his brother in virtue (dat.) Alas what 
folly *° These things happened in the time of * our 
forefathers. He said, that to be prosperous was not in 
our (own) power. 


§ 28. The Genitive continued. 


159. a. b) After verbs of price and value, the price 
or value is put in the genitive. 

160. After verbs that express or imply exchange, the 
thing for which we exchange another is put in the 
genitive. 

161. d.e) A noun of time is put in“the gen. in an- 
swer to the questions when? and since, or within what 
time ? 

If che point of time is defined by a numeral adjective, the time 


when is put in the dative: it stands however in the wi 
JSormer, the same, each, ἂς. i eta 


162. f. 5) The gen. expresses the part by which a 
person leads, takes, or gets hold of any thing. 
162". a) δραχμῆς ἀγοράζειν τι, to buy something for 
a drachma. 
δ) πλείστου" τοῦτο τιμῶμαι, IT value this αἱ ἃ 
very high price (very highly). 
6) τρεῖς μνᾶς κατέϑηκετοῦ ἵππου, he laid down 
three mine for the horse. 


χρήματα τούτων πράττεται, he exacts the 
money (or payment) for this. 
d) νυκτός, by night ; ἡμέρας, by day; χρόνου 
συχνοῦ, for a considerable time. 
6) πολλῶ ¥ ἡμερῶν οὐ μεμελέτηκα, I have nor 
practised for many days. 
J’) λαβεῖν (generally λαβέσϑαι) ποδός, to take 


Β πολῦς, πλείων ΟΥ πλέων, πλεῖστος. 


4 


-- 


- 


ἢ 
Υ 
: 
: 
ἢ 
“ ΓΕ 
Ῥ 
| al ih 3 
᾿ ΕΣ 
} ae os 
: Ϊ 
; Th 
᾿ξ if 
i 
᾿ 
. fie 
Μη 
Ay} 


1 
Ϊ Ha 
: Te 
) I 
ΠῚ 

F ὃ 
: if 

i " 

ἡ tne 
aw 
| 

fey 
+ 
᾿ bE 
| ? 4 
᾿ Η ᾿ 
“ὍἩ»ἰὶἰ 

᾿ ᾿ 

ΕῚ 
| ἢ ὃ 
; Ty 
; § 


THE GENITIVE 


(a person) by the foot. ἄγειν χειρός, to 
lead by the hand. . 
ὃν λύκον τῶν ὥτων χρατῶ͵ I get hold of 
the wolf by the ears. 

h) τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνδρὸς σοφοῦ, this ts not 
the part of a wise man. 

i) οὐ παντὸς εἶναι, not to be athing that every 
body can do. ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι, to be one’s 


own master. 


163. VocaBULARY 27. 


Purchase, buy, 


Drachma, 

To value, 

Mina, 

Lay down, 

To exact, to exact pay- 
ment, 

Considerable, long(of time.) 


To practice, 

To take hold of, 

To get hold of, 
Equestrian exercises. 


_ 


ἀγοράζω | ( properly “amin 
the market-place,” ἀγορά) 

δραχμή, ῆς, ἧ. 

τιμάομαι. 

μνᾶ, ἄς; ἥ. 

κατα-τίϑημι. 


πρἄττεσϑαι. 
συχνός, 7, ov (prop. “con- 
tinuous”). 


μελετάω. 
λαβέσϑαι (92, note). 


xoatéo (prop. “ ἴο master”). 


τὰ ἱππικά. 


Exercise 31. 


164. The king will not fight (these) ten days. No 
one has arrived for a long time. I should like to pur- 
chase*® this for three mine. It isthe part of a good man 


i (a) The being or having what the root denotes, is expressed by 
verbs. dw, fw, εὔω, ὥσσω, (drrw), ἄζω, Kw. (Ὁ) The making a thing 
into, or furnishing it with what the root denotes, is expressed by 
verbs in ὄω, ἔζω, ὕνω, (5), aivwe 

Ozs. These meanings are not invariably ooserved ; e. g. those in 

» are set down as belonging to both classes. The least subject to 
em are those in fw, c6w, dw. (R.) 


COMPARISON. 75 


to confer benefits upon his friends. He told me that he 
valued this very highly; _ He said that if he hada talent, 
he would lay it down for this horse (102). It is not 
every man that can master®® his desires. He took hold 
of the boy by his foot. ‘The mother leads her daughter 
by the hands. 1 have not practised equestrian exercises 
fora longtime. 'T'wo dogs had got hold of the same 
wolf by the ears. Three dogs had got hold of the wolf: 
by the same ear. The boys are practising equestrian 
exercises. ‘They exact payment for the horse. If you 
care for yourself, provide for your safety. If they cared 
for the boy, they would not do this. I had got hold of 
the wolf itself by the ears. It is not every man who can 
get hold of a wolf by the ears.* It is not every man 
that is-without-fear-of death. A slave is not his own 
master. I will go away by night. The Scythians went 
away by night. 


§ 29. Comparison. 


_ 165. a) The thing with which another is compared, 
is put in the genitive. 
The fuller construction is with ij, than; which however is used 
only where the genitive cannot be employed. 
b) The gen. is sometimes used, where it is not the immediate ob 
ject of comparison: e. g.in the phrase, κάλλζον ἐμοῦ Gees, the things 
ere are not ‘J’ and ‘your singing ;’ but ‘my singing’ and 
_ 166. 6) Greater, &c. than ever, than at any other 
time, is expressed by using αὐτός, before the gen. of 
the reciprocal pronoun. 
167. d. e) Too great, &c. is expressed by the com- 


parative with ἢ xara! before a substantive ; 7 ὥστε be- 
fore a verb in the infinitive. 


κ To get hold of, &c 
' Or ἢ πρός, 


is not the part of, &c. 


78 COMPARISON. ~ 


168. a) μείζων ἐμοῦ, taller (greater) than I. 

δ) κάλλτον ἐμοῦ ἄδεις, you sing better (more 
beautifully) than I (do). 

C) δυνατώτεροι αὐτοὶ αὑτῶν" ἐγίγνοντο, they 
became more powerful than ever (lite- 
rally, more powerful themselves than 
themselves, i. 6. than themselves were at 
any other time). 

d) μείζω xara δάκρυα πεπονϑέναι, to have 
suffered afflictions too great for tears. 

γεχρὸς μείζων ἢ κατ᾿ ἄνθρωπον," a 
corpse of superhuman size. 

ὅπλα πλέω ἢ κατὰ τοὺς νεκρούς, more 
arms than could have been expected 
from the number of the dead (quam pro 
numero). 

6) νεώτεροί εἰσιν ἣ ὥ στ ε εἰδέναι οἵων πατέρων» 
ἐστέρηνται, they are too young to know 
what fathers they have lost. 


108". Vocapviary 28. 


Sing, ἄδω." 

Sing better, κάλλτον ἄδειν. 
Powerful, δυνατός, 7, ov. 
Tear, δάκρυον, ov, τό. 
Suffer, πάσχω.» 

Arms, ὅπλα." 

Young, vE0C, , ὅν. 

Deprive, στερέω :" ἀποστερέω. 
Dance, χορεύω. 

Master, teacher, διδάσκαλος, ov, ὃ. 


™ So in superl. δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ἦσθα - 

5 Literally, greater than in proportion to (or according to} man. 

ἄδω (deidw), fut. ᾷσομαι, but aor. ἧσαξ: 

P πάσχω, πείσομαι, πέπονθα. ἔπαθον. 

a Properly, instruments or tools of any. kind. 

* This verb is most common in the’ pass. form, with fut. mid., in the 
sense, am deprived of :—-crepodpat, crephodpat, ἐστέρημαι; ἐστερήθην, &e. 
—dgocrepéw (124, c) is more common than στερέω. [στερίσκω is the 
common form of the pres. act : στέρομαι of the pres. pass. ] 


COMPARISON. 


Pupil, μαϑητής, οὔ, 6. 


Words that go with Baise to mark the degree of excess or 
efect. 


Still, ἔτι. 

Much, πολλῷ." 

Little, a little, ὀλίγῳ. 

The—the ὅσῳ --- τοσούτῳ (quanto— 
tanto). 


Exercise 32. 


169. The boy is taller than his father. The boy is 
Wiser than his master. The daughter sings better than 
her mother. You have become more powerful than 
ever (168. 6). ‘The Athenians have become more pow- 
erful thanever. The good judge is suffering afflictions 
too great for tears (167. d). More arms were taken than 
could have been expected from the number of the dead 
(167. d). He told me, that the corpse was of a super- 
human size. If I had practised,I should have sung 
better than my mother. If you do this, you will be. 
come more powerful than ever. If they were to do* 
this, they would become more powerful than ever. If 
they had done this, they would have become more pow- 
erful than ever. He said that, if they did this, they 
would become more powerful than ever (102). He said 
that, if they had done this, they would have become 
more powerful than ever. He is too wise (167. 6) to be 
deceived by his slave. The masters are too wise to be 
deceived by their pupils. The pupils practise by night, 
that they may become wiser than their masters. He 
said that he should have died but for®* the dog. The 
boys dance better than their masters. Practise virtue, 
that you may become really wise. They are too young 
to know that virtue ought® to be desired. The boy is 
still taller than his father. The girl is a little taller than 


* Sometimes the acc. is used ; μέγα, πολύ, ἄτα. ς 
* Imperf. because the meaning is, ‘ I should now be a better singer. 


7 COMPARISON. 


her mother. The daughter sings much better than het 
mother Tye more they have, the more they desire. 


§ 30. Comparison continued. 


170. a) Two comparatives are to be translated by 
more—than, or rather—than, with the positive. 


For adverbs it is often convenient, as in the example, to use a 
substantive. 


171. δ) ὡς and ὅτε (like the Latin quam) are used to 
strengthen superlatives. (So also ὅπως, 7, &c.) 
172. ἀ. 6) ef τις καὶ ἄλλος (si quis alius), and εἷς ἀνήρ 
(unws omnium mazxime), have the force of superlatives. 
(els ye ἀνὴρ dy is also used.) 


173. 7) περιττός (exceeding, over and above), and 
adjectives in -πλάσιος (-fold), govern the genitive from 
their comparative meaning. 

174. a) ταχύτερα ἢ σοφώτερα (Herod.), with 

more haste than wisdom. 

δ) ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible. σιγῇ ὡς 
ἀνυστὸν προσήεσαν, they came up as 
silently as possible. ὅτι μέγιστος, ᾳ8 great 
as possible. 7 

Ο) ὅσους ἠδύνατο πλείστους  “ἀϑροίσας, 
having collected as many men as he 
possibly could. 

d) καίπερ, εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος, ἔχεις πρὸς τὰ ἔτη [E- 
λαιναν τὴν τρίχα, though if any body has 
black hair for his years, it is you (i. e. 
you have remarkably black hair for your 
years). 

e) τοὺς ἀγωνιζομένους πλεῖστα εἷς ἀν ἣρ δυνάμενος 
ὠφελεῖν, being able to be of more service 


® Or, ὅτι πλείστους ἀθροίσας, 


COMPARISON. 79 


to the contending parties, than any other 


individual. 


J) περιττὰ τῶν ἀρκούντων more than enough (of 


money, &c.) 


΄ « ΕΣ > ~ 
πολλαπλάσιοι ἡμῶν αὑτῶν, 


many times as numerous as ourselves. 


175. VocaBuLARY 29. 


Silently, 
To come on, come up, 


As many as, 
Most, 


Feasible, 


Although, 

For your years, 

Hair, 

Collect, 

To be enough or sufficient, 

Many times as many or 
much, 

T'wice as many, 

Brave, 

Slow, 

Slowly, 

Gift, 

To give a share of, give 
some, 


σιγῇ. 

πρός-ειμι. 

σ 

σοι. 

πλεῖστοι. 

» , , ᾿ ’ 

ἀνυστός, ος ov (fr. ἀνύτειν, to 
perform). 

καίπερ. 
‘ \ ws» 

πρὸς τὰ ἔτη. 

ϑρίξ, τριχός, ἥ. 

» , 

ἀϑροίζω. 

ἀρχκέω (fut. ἔσω). 


πολλαπλάσιοι. 


διπλάσιοι. 

ἀνδρεῖος, α, ον. 

βραδύς, εἴα, v. 

βραδέως. 

δῶρον, ου, τό. 7 

μετα-δίδωμι (gen. ὁ thing ; 
dat. of person). ' 


Ezercise 33." 


176. One could not find (86*) a blacker dog than this. 
They are more wise than brave. If any man practises 
cemperance, it ishe. He received more gifts than any 


v In doing the exercises of the form: “ if any one—it is” (174 d), 
replace mentally ‘ it is’ by the verb ; “ if any man practises temperance, 
it is he”=if any man practises temperance, he practises temperance, 
».e. he, if any other man (does), practises temperance. 

In those of the form “more than any other single person,” replace this 
form by πλεῖστα els ἀνήρ, or εἷς γε ἀγὴρ ὦν. 


80 THE DATIVE. 


other man. If you had done this, you would have dons 
more bravely than wisely. I shall collect as many 
men as possible (174. c). The Persians came on as 
slowly as possible. He has injured the state more than 
any other single person. He has collected as many 
ships as possible. When you have collected*®* as many 
men as possible, march against Cyrus. The just judge 
has been of more service to the state than any other 
single person. The army of the Persians comes on as 
silently as possible (174. b). If you have more than 
enough, give some to your friends. If they were bold, 
they would conquer twice as many as themselves, More 
hares were taken than could have been expected from 
the (small) number of the dogs5* One could not find a 
more beautiful woman than the mother of this Scythian. 
If any man has been of great service to the state, it is he. 


§ 31. The Dative. 


177. The notion of the dative is opposed to that of 
the genitive, as its fundamental notion is that of ap- 
proach to. 

178. 'The dat. expresses the person to or for whom a 
thing is done: it also follows words that express union 
or coming together, and those that express likeness or 
(a) identity. 

179. δ) The instrument (c) the manner, and (d) the 
cause, are put in the dative. 

180. e) The definite time at which a thing is done, 
is put in the dative. 

181. 7) The dative sometimes expresses the agent ; 
especially after the perfect pass. aud verbals in τέος, 
τός. 

182. a) τὰ αὐτὰ πάσχω σοί, I suffer the same ἃ5 you. 


* Comparative sing. by rule 56; not plur. as in example. 


THE DATIVE 81 


Θησεὺς κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον Ἡρακλεῖ γενόμε- 
voc, Theseus who lived about the same 
time as Hercules. - 

δὴ πατάσσειν ῥάβδῳ, to beat with a stick. 

C) δρόμῳ παρῆλϑεν, he came running (literally, 
at α rumning pace). μεγάλῃ σπουδῇ, in 


great haste. 


d) φόβῳ, through fear. κάμνειν νόσῳ, to be suf- 
Jering from (or ill of) a disease. ἀλγεῖν 
τινι, to be pained at a thing. 

6) τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ, on the third day. 

J) ταῦτα λέλεκται ἡμῖν, these things have been said 


by us. 
183. VocaBuLARY 30. 


To live about the same 
time, to be contemporary 
with. 

Fear, 

Running, a running pace, 

To be suffering, or ill of a 
disease, 

On the next day, 

Heavy, severe, 

Thales, 

Solon, 

Why? 


Haste, 
Hercules, ‘He 
Staff, stick, ZL. a 


“ 
Ver 
Associate with, keep com- 
pany with, 
Follow, 


, , 
κατὰ TOV αὐτὸν χρόνον γενέσ- 
Gat. 


φόβος, ov, ὃ. 

δρόμος, ov, ὃ. 

κάμνω (καμοῦμαι, κέχμηκα, 
ἔκαμον. 

τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ. 

βαρύς, εἴα, v. 

Θαλῆς." 

“Σόλων, ὠνος, ὃ. 

τί; or διὰ τί; 

σπουδή, ἧς, ἧ. 

Ἡρακλῆς, Υ eog (ovg) ὁ 


ε 


ῥάβδος, ov, 7. 


vern the dative. 


bakin. 


σ΄ r 
ἕπομαι. 


* Θαλῆς, G. Θαλέω, D. Θαλῇ, A. Θαλῆν. (ητος, ητι, ητα, later.) 
7 Voc. 'Ηράκλεις. The voc. ὦ *Hpaxdes occurs only in this exclama: 


ben. 


® ἕπομαι, ἕψομαι. Imperf. εἰπόμην, aor. ἑσπόμην. 
. 


82 THE DATIVE 


Envy, grudge, 

“Ὁ meet, fallin with, . 

Blame, μέμφομαι. 

Find fault with, rebuke, ἐπιτιμάω. 

Scold, rail at, speak calum- λοιδορέομαι (λοιδορέω takes 
niously of, a ui the accus.) 

Accuse of, charge with 
blame, 

Plot against, ἐπιβουλεύω. 

Fight with, μάχομαι. 

Contend ογ΄ dispute with, ἐρίζω. 

Contention, strife, ἔρις, wWog, ἡ (acc. ἔριδα et 

ἔρων). 

Amangry with, ὁ ὀργίζομαι. 

Am ina. passion or rage, χαλεπαίνω. 

Like, ὅμοιος, a, 01. 


φϑονέω" (φϑόνος, envy). 
ἐντυγχάνω." 


> , 
ἐγκαλεω. 


Oss. Verbs of ~eproaching, &c. take ace. of the thing (as well as 


dat. of person), especially when it is a neut. pronoun. (ἐγκαλεῖν, &c. 
τί τινι.) 


Exercise 34. 


184. Do not associate with the bad (72. a). If you 
associate (67. 2) with the bad,** you will become bad 
yourself. ‘The boys are following the dog. Most men 
follow their neighbours. I envy you your wisdom 
(xote a). Do not envy your neighbour. Do not envy 
me.. If you had sttuck* the judge with a stick, you 
would not have got off with impunitys* -They set out 
the next day. What do you charge me with (183. 
Oss.)? Tasked whether (72.c) they were suffering the 
same as the geometer. If you had plotted against the 
general, you would not have come off with impunity. 
He will not fight with the king (these) ten days (161). 


I knew that he had suffered the same as I (had). 1° . 


a φθυνέω takes gen. of the object that excites the envy, or of the thing 
grudged. (See 149. f). 


δ τυγχάνω, τεύξομαι; τετύχηκα, ἔτυχον. With a gen. to obtain, re- . 


ecive (παρά from, with gen.) ; also, to hit (a mark—cxorés). 


» 


e , 1 ξ ἂ 1% » 
re’ rye Ψ ν tn he Pee ΘΥ ἘΠῚ τι See aba 
rites a ees χουν σους τ ae - : 
. + : ᾿ PP ας 7 OF 


Rae Ae wtp ie 


THE DATIVE. 83 


plotted against the king from envy. Do not contend, 


With your parents. I suffer similar treatment® to you, 
I should blame the citizens, if they had done this.’ He 
scolds, not only* the others, but also the judge himself. 
[ should have scolded the boy, if he had done this, 
Why are you jn a passion with your slave? I have 
hot met you (these) two days.. lam angry with those 
who transact the affairs of the state. O Hercules‘ 


what in the world*' am 1 to do (99.c)? Through fear 
he did not hit the mark. : 


Exercise 35. - 


_ 185. Do you wish, then (99. a), that I should strike 
him with this stick? .He told me that his father was 
suffering from a severe disease. Tliales was contempo- 
rary with Solon. I admire the wisdom of Thales. 
Hercules lived about the same time as Theseus. » If any 
one was brave, it was Hercules.* Ὁ father, do not scold 
your son. If you had kept company with the bad, you 
would have become bad your yourself. I asked the boy 
whether we ought to envy® our neighbours. The dam- 
sel has very beautiful eyes.'?’ Let us aim at speaking'* 
well of all the good. Let us abstain from acting inso- 
lently. All, and you among the Jirst,*““admire these 


things. Let us be contented with our present condition. ,. 


He said that, if Xenoclides had been wise, he would 
not have poe against the general.. He told me that 
he wished to give his slaves a ¢aste of liberty (149. c). 


Let us keep company with sensible persons. Let us obey 


the lawsofthestate. I-should like to hear* the boy sing 


(part.) Do not associate with those who! pursue what, 


is disgraceful,"* Why do you charge me with injus- 
tice #5 Through fear he missed the mark. I admire 
both¢ your horses and those of your friend.’ The rest 


9 Like things. 


ὁ τέ following tho article. 


- 
ν᾽ 


“διό ls χοὰς ada apse eat ems m τς - 
OER OU PARRY REE HES 


am = 


Tay! ys 


84 MIDDLE VOICE. 
of the country'® has been laid waste by the Greeks. He 
told me that we ought to persuade the judge (120. c). 


§ 32. Aliddle Voice. 


ΤΠ middle voice denotes: 


1) ‘That the agent does the action upon him- 
self; or 


2) That the agent does the action Sor his own 
advantage ; or 


3) That the agent gets the action done for his 
own advantage, 


The strict refiexive meaning is found but in ve 
cipally those that describe some simple action done to our own per- 
sons; as aslo clotne, crown, &c. The reflexive sense is often equiv: 
alent to ἢ new simple meaning; which may be either fransifire or 
intransitive, 


ry few verbs; prin- 


187. ‘The tenses that have the 
the verb has it at all, are 
1) Pres. and imperf. ὺ iene dle 

2) Perf. and Pluperf. ὁ of the passive form. 


middle meaning, when 


3) Futures and aorists mid. 
And in some verbs 

4) The aor. 1. pass. i. e. of the passive form. 
LSS. Vocanutary 31. 


(1.) 

λούει». M. wash myself, batlie,* 
λούεσϑαι. 

Strangle, ἀπάγχειν, ἀπάγξαι. M. to Strangle (or hang) 


myself, ἀπάγχεσϑαι. 
a) With new infransitive meaning. 


; στέλλει», M.(to send one’s self ) to 
journey, στέλλεσϑαι." 


9 It may have an accus. of a part of one’s own person. 


f στέλλεσθαι, to clothe oneself, and to send for, hus aor. 
στέλλεσθαι, 10 travel, σταλῆναι. 


ΤῸ wash ; 


‘T'o send 


στεΐλασθοι} 


) 
MIDDLE VOICE. 85 


) If cease 
ΠῸ make tocease, παύειν. M. (to make myself ») 


to stop, cease, leave ofl, 
παύεσϑαι. 


b) With new transitive meaning. 


ΤῸ puta man over (a river), 
περαιοῦν (τινα). ᾿ 
To pluck, τίλλειν. 


M. to cross (a river, acc.) 
περαιοῦσϑαι. 

M. to mourn for (ace.) 1. 6. 
hy tearing one’s hair, τίλ- 
λεσϑαι. 


(2.) 


ΤῸ make a man one’s ally 
(to form an alliance with 
a person), i.e. for one’s 
own advantage, 

To place guards (over one’s 
own property; for one’s 
own protection,) ὁ 

To lift or take a thing up, 
αἴρειν τι. 


To find, ELQLOZEL?. 


To provide, παρασκενάζειν, 


~ , ᾿ 
σύμμαχον ποιεῖσϑαι τινα. 


καταοτήσαοϑαι ξ φυλακας. 


M. to take up for one’s ad- 
vantage, i.e. to keep for 
one’s self, atpecOat. 

M. find for myself, procure, 
get, εὑρισκεσϑαι. 

M. to provide (for one’sown 
use), παρασχευάζεσϑαι. 


(3.) 


I cause a table to be sct be- 
fore me, 
To let out for hire, prodow. 
To teach, διδάσχειν 


, 
To weep for, καταχλαίειν. 


, 
mupceridenae τράπεζαν. 


M. cause to be let to myself, 
i, 6. to hire, μισϑοῦσϑαι. 
M. to get or have taught, 
διδώσκεσϑαι. 

M. to weep for (one’s own 
misfortunes, acc.) xata- 
κλαίεσϑαι. 


6 καθ ἐστημι. 


A 
——— > ek. a ER, CW". 
" Ξ- . ΒΒ" ΤΥ ΠΛ τος αν Re 2) eh ᾿ ἐν δ oe. δ; “κ᾿ 
ea ee, | RE ἜΝ f Aad ὁ ἮΝ ὧς ἐσ ρα PS eo Dy ae eee - 
Ae tho: ὧν Me aes & OU Sere rp p a . ce : . 
νῷ ἘΠῚ ; 


wy ᾿ 


it 


ie 


Or 


ore: ἐλιά.» Meanie 
1 RRM See Ae 


ΗΝ  ΨΟΝ 


86 MIDDLE VOICE. 

Having shown his own , a ag 
wickedness, ἐπιδεδειγμένος τὴν Tova 

To enact laws (of an abso- 
lute price who does not 
make them for h imself), 

To enact laws (of the legis- 
lator of a free state, who 
makes them for himself oé50¢ 
as well as for his fellow- 
Cilizens),» 


ϑεῖναι τόμους. 


΄ 
t τόμους. 


Ons. In general any remote refe 


‘rence of the action to δεί Is ex 
Pressed by the middle. 


Wicked, πονηρός, (, OP. 

T’o weigh anchor, αἴρειν ἄγκυραν, understood), 

"ΤῸ commence or engagein ἄρκσϑαι πόλεμον πρός, &c. 
a War against, (acc.) 


Sail-away, “n0-2)¢0.! 


Exercise 36. 


189. Solon enacted laws for the Athenians. Wash 
yourselves, O boys. The son of Xcnoclide 
self. Allof them washed their hands and their feet. Hire 
your neighbour’s eyes. [ will let you my house. I will 
take into my pay (hire) as many Hoplites as possible.*2 


Ss hung him- 


The mother wept for her sufferings. I provided « inyself 
long ago with this stick. © daughters, mourn for your 
mother. The citizens, fearing, placed guards. © ye 
rich, cease to act insolently (partie. 238). The soldiers 
crossed over the river, Let us form an alliance with 
the Athenians. If we had been wise, we should have 
formed an alliance with the Athenians. What kind-of 


4 This difference is not, however, stri 
: πλέω, πλεύσομαι and πλευσοὺ 


* Perfect, as I still Keep it. 


ctly observed. (B.) 


μαι,--αἴπλευσα. Pass. πίπλευσμαι, ἐπλεόσθην 


MIDDLE VOICE. 87 
laws has the king of the Persians enacted ? The boy 
has shown his wicked disposition. If you oor you 
will get something good. ‘lhe Athenians cugagec 5 
war with the Persians. ‘The Athenians having w ag 1- 
ed anchor, sailed away. . He told me that we as 
obey the laws of the state (120. c). (Rigel ap onset 
been wise, they would have enacted laws. Phe Ath 
nians crossed the river and attacked the Persians. 


ᾧ 33. Aliddle Voice continuea. 


190. VocaBuLary 32. 


‘o take.) αἱρεῖν. ΔΙ. choose (followed by ἀ:- 
nA EO τί With gen.), αἱρεῖσϑαι. 
To take, receive, λαβεῖν. M. take hold of, λάβεσϑαι. 


2) Verbs whose Mid. Voice seems to have a reciprocal meaning. 


"λεύειν M. to consult together, de- 
ta cae ‘ liberate: but also (with 
: eregular mid. significa- 
tion) to counsel myself, 
adopt a resolution, (in 
the sense of deliberate it 
is followed by περί with 
gen.), βουλεύεσϑαι. 
To reconcile (others), δια- M. to be ‘ad Sager ig each 
λύειν»). other (πρός with ace.), 
διαλυεσϑαι. 


3) Middle forms of which there is no acfire and which must there- 
fore be considered simply as deponents. 


I receive, δέχομαι. 
I perceive,aminformedof, αἰσϑάνομαι. 


1 αἱρέω, &c. εἷλον, εἱλόμην, ἡρίθην. 
™ λέω, λύσω, &c.—iritpa, ἐλύθην. 
ἢ αἰσθάνομαι, αἰσθόσομαι, goOnuar. Ῥσθόμην 


r 


PRESEN GEREN RE 


A Brie Nine Sate ote ΣῪ ΔΤ ΤΣ 


tage, 
ὑφαρες 


ait 


4 
᾿ 73 £04 ᾽: 
δε τ ANAL, οἴ ϑαμ St φ' 


(4a ἡ", 


MIDDLE VOICE. 


4) Aorists passive with mid. meaning. 


Laid myself down ; laid 


J 
down, κατεκλιϑη»." 


Took myself off, ἀπηλλάγην. 
50, ἐπεραιώϑην ἐφοβήϑην, - ἐκοιμήϑην, ἠσχκηϑης, 
(from περαιοῦσϑαι, φοβεῖσϑαι, κοιμᾶσϑαι, ἀσκεῖσϑαι). 
5) Some first futures of mid. form have ἃ pass. meaning. 
. ὠφελήσομαι, ὁμολογήσομαι, φυλάξομαι, ϑρέψομαι, 
from ὠφελέω, ὁμολογέω, φυλάττω, τρέφω. 
(aid, help,) (confess,) (uard,) (nourish.) 
6) To be on one’s guard, 
to guard against, (with φυλάττεσϑαι (mid.) 
ace. of thing or person), 


7) By (agent after pass. ὑπό (with gen.): also παρα 
verb), et πρός. 


Exercise 37. 


191. They will choose to obey rather than P to fight, 
I would choose liberty before wealth. Xenoclides was 
chosen general with three others. The multitude often 
choose ill. He took hold of his hair (plur.) Let us 
consult. about the state. To deliberate quickly is a 
different thing (differs) from deliberating’ wisely. Let 
us consult together what we ought to do.*¥ They con- 
sulted together what they should do with (137. b) the 
unjust judge. I exercised-myself-in (190. 4) that art. 
Go to sleep. Having said this, he took himself off. 
The boy, having shown (188.3) much virtue and tem. 
perance, died. O boys, receive this. I have received 
this. The city will receive many times as much (174. 
J) as this (plur.) O slaves, receive somet® of the wine. 
The physician being informed of what had happened, 
came in great haste. 1 crossed over the river in great 
haste. Ifyou do this, you will be greatly benefited, 


------.. 


© κοτο-ελίνω. 9 μάλλον ἢ. 


ON THE PERFECT 2. 89 


I will guard against this danger. faving a pain in 
both my ears, I lay down. ‘This will be confessed by 
all. This will be confessed, willingly at least, by 
none. ‘he army shall be maintained from the king’s 
country. lam glad that® the children are well brought 
up. ‘The city shall be well guarded by the citizens. 1 
feared the very men (those themselves) who' guarded 
the city. 


ᾧ 34. On the Perfect 2. 


192. The Perf. 2. (improperly called the Perf. mid.) 
prefers the intransitive signification, but never has 
the pure reflexive meaning of the middle. 

1) If the verb has both the frans. and intrans. meaning, the perf. 
1. has the former; the perf. 2. the latter. 2) If the intrans. mean 
ing has gone over to the mid., or to the pass. (as often vi 
the perf. 2. belongs in meaning to that voice. 3) If the verb is in 


trans, the perf. 2. has the same relation to it that any other perf 
has to its verb. 4 


193. VocabuLary 33. 
Perf. 1. Perf. 2. 
΄ » , 
Open, ἀνοίγω; ἀνέῳχα, stand open, ἀνέῳγα. 
bet ee 5 EERE 28 
Arouse, éyeign, ἐγήγερκα, am awake, ἐγρήγορα. 
Persuade, πείϑω, πέπεικα, am confident, trust, have 
confidence, πέποιϑα. 
Break, dyrvmt,* ν΄. am broken, ééya. Ξ 
Destroy, ὄλλυμι,", ὁλώλεκα, am undone, (perii), ὅλωλα. 
Pix, ajyrvpt,' am fixed, am congealed, 
ke. πεπηγα. 
Ons. ἀπίλλυμι, κατάγνυμι, more common than the simple verbs. 


a This verb prefixes the temporal to the syllabic augment—ivémyov 
ἐνέῳξα, inf. ἀνοῖξαι. dviwya belongs to later Greek writers: dvéwy jay 
¥ 18 used by the older authors. 

Σ ἄγνυμι, ἄξω, aor. ἕαξα, ἐάγην (a). 

" ὄλλθμι, ὁλῶ, ὁλώλεκα. deca. ὄλλῆμαιψ ὁλοῦμαι, ὄλωλα, ὡλόμην. 

“ τήγνυμι, πήξω, &e.—nrinnya, ἐπάγηι (ἃ). 


CE τ ΜΕΤ 


is τὰς - ς ‘ Ξ ~——— = 

ie adi areal apres rt . praqugseiear pee emp: 
treet iva τα ee ὅς peas 
Phe pn OTe ere gt re τὰ Saar νι 


ἐδ bt oe νυ ΤΥ, 
να ἐν σον - ‘ £ . 


τον 
ae 
Age ii 
wo x 
te 
Sb 
OS ia 
is 
7 ἄν: 
.. 
4“ 
ae 


etre ce eres 


WERE SE 


as. tke ae 
my ΝΕ et ot 


90 PERFECT 2. 


Pot, pitcher, χύτρα, ας, ἡ. 

One more, Ett εἷς. 

Gate, πύλη, ης, ἧ. 

Spear, δόρυ," δόρατος, τό. 

Breast, στέρνον, OV, τό. 

To watch over, ἐγρηγορέναι περί (with ger.) 

T’o raise a war, ἐγείρειν πόλεμον (in pass. 
arise). 

Safety, ἀσφάλεια, ag, 7. 

Roman, 2 “Ῥωμαῖος, ov, ὃ. 

Jupiter, Ζεύς, Διός, ὁ (voc. Zev). 

Early in the τηοτηϊηρ,᾿ πρωΐ. 


Exercise 38. 


194. ‘The pitcher is broken. If we conquer the 
Romans.in one more battle,“? we are undone. The 
spear was fixed in his breast, Ali the water*® is congeal- 
ed. I broke the boy’s head. The boy’s head is broken. 
I have watched over your safety for many years. Hav- 
ing lost’ all his property, he took himself off. The 
gates are open. ‘I'he servants opened the gatesearly, as 
their custom was. Brave men have confidence in them- 
selves. ‘Then only (91. c), when they obey the laws, 
will the citizens be prosperous. If we do not bear what 
comes from the gods,* we are undone. Who in the 
worlds' has broken this pitcher? It is the ρατγίδ5 of a 
general to watch over the safety of his army. O Jupi- 
ter, the folly of the man !5° If a war should arise (be 
raised), we are undone. If you break one pitcher more, 
O worst of slaves, you shall not come off with im- 
punitys* My property was plundered, wretched man 
that Tam!** Ifany man is in the habit of performing 


just (actions), it was he.t? Ihave not met either my 
friend or my brother’s.* 


“δόρυ, δόρατος, &c.—Poet. δορός, δορί : of which δορί is found in Attic 
prose, in the phrage δορὶ ἑλεῖν. 
τ ἀπόλλυμι. 


δον Ce ear Ce ee a ον 2 ς - ἰο 


MOODS AND TENSES. 91 


§ 35. Additional Remarks on some of the Moods and 
Tenses. 


195. a) The fut. 3. (or future perfect) expresses a 
future action continuing in its effects. 

196. The fut. 3. diflers, therefore, from the Latin 
Suturum exactum, in not being used to express merely 
the future completion of a momentary action. 


197. δ) The fut. 3. is, however, sometimes used to’ 


express 1) the speedy completion of an action, or 2) the 
certainty of its completion in the most positive manner. 

198. The fut. 3. is obviously the natural future of 
those perfects, that, from their marking a continued 
State, are equivalent toa present with a new meaning: 
6. £. μέμνημαι, κέκτημαι. : 

199. Some verbs have the fut. 3. as a simple future: 
6. ξ΄. δεδήσομαι," πεπαύσόμαι, κεκόψομαι. 

200. c) In the active voice a continued future state, 
or a future action continuing in its effects, is expressed 


by ἔσομαι with perf. participle ; a circumlocution which — 


is also used in the passive (as in the example 205. c.) 
201. d. e) The perf. has also a subjunctive and op- 
tative, and the future an optative, which are used when- 


ever that kind of uncertainty or contingency peculiar to . 


those moods agrees with the time of these tenses. 


Only, however, when particular distinctness is required; and 


even then, the perf. part. with εἴην or ὦ is generally preferred to the 
regular opt. and subj. of that tense. 


202. The imperat. perfect is principally used in 
those verbs whose perfects have the meaning of a pres- 
ent: μέμνησο, &c. . 

203. f) The third person of the imperat. perf. pass. 
marks a decided resolution: it is a strong expression for 
let it be done, &c. 

204. Obs. εἴϑε with the optative—and also the opta- 


* From δέω to bind. 


τ το το Fare NORE EL BCI AS Obras geste 


ce ate SP PE date he Sig αν πο * BTL © 


wry 


TARE SP LAY A λο 


‘ 


92 MOODS AND TENSES. 


tive alone »—expresses a wish. If the wish expressed 
has not been (and now cannot be) realized, εἴϑε is used 
with indic. of aorist or imperf., according as the time to 
which the wish refers is past, or present. So ὥφελον 
. (ες, 8) alone, or with εἴϑε, εἰ γάρ or ὡς, and followed by 
the infinitive. 


205. a) ἡ πολιτεία τελέως κεκοσμήσεται, ἐὰν ὁ τοιοῦ- 

49 “τος αὐτὴν» ἐπισκοπῇ φύλαξ, the constitution 

ἕω will have been perfectly arranged, if such 
~ “yt guardian superintends it. 

δὴ poate καὶ πεπράξεται, speak and it shall 
(immediately) be done. 

6) τὰ δέοντα ἐσόμεϑα ἐγνωκότες," καὶ λόγων 
ματαίων ἀπηλλαγμένοι, we Shall have voted 
on the subject as we ought, and be freed 
Srom empty speeches. 

d) εἴϑε ὁ υἱὸς νενικήκοι, would that my son 
had conquered ! 

6) εἶπεν ὅτι ἥξοι ἡμέρᾳ τρίτῃ, he said that he 
should come on the third day. 

J) πεπειράσϑωυ, let it be attempted. 


206. VocaBuLaRy 34, 


Constitution, πολιτεία, ας, ἡ. 

Arrange, adorn, κοσμέω. 

Superintend, overlook, ἐπισκοπέω. 

What we ought, τὰ δέοντα. 

Empty, vain, useless μάταιος, α, ον. 

I am come, ἥκω * (with perf. meaning). 
I am gone, am off, οἴχομαι" (perf. meaning. ) 
Endeavour, πειράομαι. 


* Asin ὦ παῖ, γένοιο πατρὸς εὐτυχέστερος, See also 298. 6, 

Y γιγνώσκειν interdum de plebiscitis vel populi jussis. (Bremi ad 
Demosth. Phil. I. 54.) 

® ἥκω, ἧκον, igo; no other tenses in use. βίου εὖ ἥκειν, to have ar- 
rived at an advanced age (Herod.): a construction seldom found ip 
Attic Greek. 


5. οἴχομαι; οἰχύσομαι, ᾧχημαι (οἴ χωκα). 


ΝἝ 


ae 


OC τι. 


40 6. (2. 


MOODS/AND ἸΕΝΞΕΞ. 98 


Would that ....! εἴϑε, εἴϑ᾽ ὥφελον" εἰ γὰρ 
ὥφελον, ὡς ὥφελον, Or ὥφε- 
λον alone). 

To make to disappear, ἀφανίζω. 

If it is agreeable to you, if 
you are willing, 

And that too, καὶ ταῦτα. 

For the present at least, τό ye νῦν εἶναι... 


ΑΒ farastheyareconcern- . 8, κ᾿, 
aa τὸ ἐπὶ τούτοις εἶν 7 


΄: 


se. 


aA 


Exercise 39. 


207. For thus we shall have done (205.c) what we 
ought. For thus what we ought (to do) will have been 
done (205. δ). I will remember my former" folly. He 
told me that they had forgotten their former virtue (205. 
c). Let us place the wise and good as guardians of this 
most beautiful constitution. If it is agreeable to you, 
these things shall (instantly) bedone. Let these things 
be done (205. f). Do not attempt to deceive the gods, 
If you do this, I am off. The physician told me, that 
he would come on the fourth day. If you obey God, 
your soul will be adorned with all virtues. Would that 
the wise superintended the state! Would that the 
prudent managed the affairs of the state! Would that 
the wise judge had superintended the whole constitu- 
tion! Would that Thales were alive! Would that 
the man hadescaped death! If youobey the physician, 
you will be freed from your disease. "Would that the 
Greeks had conquered! They condemned him to death 
(156, note g. obs.) and that too though he was (Say: 
‘being’) your citizen. For the present at least, we will 
use him. I don’t know what in the worlds! we are,® 
for the present at least, todo with him, As far as 


b ὀφείλω (debeo), owe, ought. ὀφειλήσω. Aor. ὥφελον (un-Attic ὄφε- 
λον) used only in wishes. ὡς ὥφελε ζῇν Σωκράτης (how Socrates ought to 
ve alive), would that Socrates were alive! εἴθε κλέος ἔλαβες. 

* χρηστέος is the verbal adj. from χράομαι. 


/ 


” A 
εἰ σοι βουλομένῳ ἐστί. ᾿Ξ Zz 


94 ON THE INFINITIVE. 


that (person) is concerned, 1am undone. For the pres: 
ent, at least, let us desist from the chase. O boy, may 
you become wiser ! 


§ 36. On the Infinitive. 


208. The use of the Greek infinitive is much nearer 
to that of the English than that of the Latin is; thus :— 

209. ὃ. ὁ) It expresses the purpose, and (ὁ. d) is often 
used in the active, after both verbs and adjectives, where 
the passive would be admissible, but less common. 


Hence it must often be translated into Latin by the participle ir. 
dus, or by the supine in u. 
210. The particle ὥστε ἃ expresses a consequence, and 
is used with the infinitive ; or, if the consequence be a 


definite consequence that has actually occurred, the in 
dicative. 


211. § So—as to = ὥστε with infinitive always. 
ἡ So—that = ὦστε with infinitive or indicative. 
With the infinitive the consequence is more closely connected 
with the principal clause, as contemplated or resulting immediately 


and naturally from what is there stated. The consequence may 
be equally real. 


212. ‘ So that’ should not be translated by the indic- 
ative, except where the sense would allow us to substi- 
tute therefore or consequently (itaque) for so that. 
Thus: “the road was so bad that I did not reach my 
inn till midnight” =“the road was very bad; conse- 
quently I did not reach my inn till midnight :” here the 
indicative would be properly used. ὥστε properly an- 


swers to οὕτως, or some other demonstrative, in the pre: 
ceding clause. 


214. a) 6 ἄνϑρωπος πέφῦχε φιλεῖν, it is the nature of 
man to love. 


ἃ More rarely ὡς. 


ON THE INFINITIVE. 95 


δ) παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν ἐρωτᾷν, I offer myself to be 


questioned. 


c) ἦλϑον ἰδεῖν os, Tcame (or am come) to see 


you. 


d) ἡδὺς ἀκούειν, sweet to hear. δεινὸς λέγειν, 
. 4 ~ 
clever at speaking. χαλεπὸς λαβεῖν, hard to 


take (or catch). 


e) οὕτως ἀνόητός ἐστιν, ὦστε πόλεμον ἀντ᾽ εἰρήνης 
αἱρεῖσϑαι, he is so senseless as to choose 
war in preference to peace. 

οὕτως ἀνόητός ἐστιν, ὥστε πόλεμον ἀντὶ εἰρήνης 
αἱρεῖται, he is so senseless, that he (actually) 
chooses war in preference to peace. 

Sf) φιλοτιμότατος ἦν, ὥστε πάντα ὑπομεῖναι τοῦ 


ἐπαινεῖσϑαι ἕνεκα, he was very ambitious, so 


as to bear any thing for the sake of being 


praised. 
914, VocaABULARY 35. 
To put forth naturally, 


Supply, afford, οἵου, 
Sweet, pleasant, agreeable, 
Terrible, clever, 

Hard, difficult, 

Senseless, 

In preference to, instead of, 
Peace, 

Ambitious, fond of honour, 
Undergo, bear, 


On account of, for the sake 
of, 
Leaf, 


φύω (πέφυκα et ἔφυν are in- 
trans.; I am_ produced 
=I am by nature, or it is 
my nature to, &c. 

παρέχω." 

ἡδύς, εἴα, ὑ. 

δεινός, 7, Ov. 

χαλεπός, ή, ὄν. 

ἀνόητος, OG, OF. 

ἀντί. 

εἰρήνη, ης, I. 

φιλότιμος, os, ον. 

ὑπο-μένω. 


ἕνεχα (4 61.) 


φύλλον, ov, τό. 


© παρέχεσθαι, mid. is also used for to afford, without any perceptible 
difference of meaning. (See example in 298. ὁ.) 
f —vos, an old pass. termin. (like réos, rés), whence δεινός terrible 


ervyyts hateful, &c (B.) 


96 ON THE INFINITIVE 


Bring up, educate, παιδεύω. 

Very, πάνυ.Ξ 

Wing, πτερόν, OV, τό: πτέρυξ, ὕγος, fp. 

Young bird, ψεοσσός, οὔ, ὃ. 

Art, also, contrivance, τέχνη, 7s, ἧ. 
trick, 

Long, μακρός, &, Ov. 

Not yet, οὕπω." 

Endure, bear, ἀνέχομαι." 

To get teeth, feathers, &c., φύω. 

To giveone trouble,to mo- πόνον ΟΥ̓ πράγματα παρέχειν. 
lest, harass, &c., 


Exercise 40. 


215. It is the nature of man (213. a) to love those 
who confer benefits upon him. The city is a difficult 
one to take. The woman is a terrible one to find out 
contrivances. ‘The man is unable to hold his tongue. 
He told me that his daughter had been well brought up. 
If you give me any trouble, I will not endure it, at least 
(not) willingly.** 'Theeagle has long wings.'* He had 
been so brought up as very easily to have enough. He 
is so beautiful as to be admired by all. You are so 
senseless, that you are always hoping for what is im- 
possibie.'*? ‘They are too wise®® to choose war in prefer- 
ence to peace. The young birds have already got « 
feathers. "ΓΘ trees are already putting forth their 
leaves. ‘The child has not yet got (any) teeth. If you 
molest me, you shall not come off with impunity.6* They 
harassed them so, that the army was not able (indic.) 


& This word is often strengthened by the addition of ri (πάνυ τι). 

Β πώ, πώποτε, ever yet, ever up to this time. The former is joined 
to οὐ, ph; the latter to οὐδέ, μηδέ; and both relate to the past. Οὐδέποτε, 
μηδέποτε, are commonly employed only generally, or with reference to 
the future. (See 238*, note on examp. ὁ.) 

* This verb has a double augment: imperf. ἡνει χόμην, aor. ἠνεσχόμην. 

« Aor. 1., as perf., has a different meaning. 


ON THE INFINITIVE. 97 


to advance.' This wine is pleasant to drink. It is the 
nature of boys to pursue what is pleasant. 


§ 37. The Infinitive continued. 


216. a) The infinitive with the article in the gen. 
sometimes denotes a motive or purpose. 


It may be considered as governed by ἕνεκα understood. 


217. b) When the infinitive has a subject of its own, 
the general rule is, that it stands in the accusative. 


This rule holds good, when the infin. is used with τό, (as in 
221. c). 

218. b) A preposition with the infin. may be equiva- 
lent to a sentence introduced by a conjunction. 

219. d) But when the subject of the infinitive be- 
longs to and 15 expressed with the former verb, it is 
generally not expressed with the infinitive. 

The examples in 221, show that this rule holds good, whether the 
eubject of the infin. be the subject of the preceding verb or an 


oblique case governed by it—1n the second example the accusative 
would be expressed even in Latin: αὐτὶ se festinare. 


220. e) When the subject of the infinitive is omitted 
because expressed with the other verb, an adjective or 
substantive that forms the predicate with the infin. is 
mostly put in the same case that the subject of the in- 
finitive stands in in the other clause. 


Thus (in 221. δ) υἱός conforms to ᾿Αλέξανδρος " θεός to ἐγώ * προθύμου 
to αὐτοῦ, &c.—This construction is called Adiraction, 


221. a) ἐτειχίσϑη δὲ καὶ ᾿Αταλάντη, τοῦ μὴ λῃστὰς κα- 
κουργεῖν τὴν Εὔβοιαν, and Atalanta also 
was fortified, that robbers (or pirates) 
might not commit depredations in Hubaa. 

ὃ) οὐδὲν ἐπράχϑη διὰ τὸ ἐκεῖνον μὴ παρεῖναι, 


ἱ πορεῦομαι. 


5 


ON THE INFINITIVE. 


nothing was done, because he was not 


present. 


6) οὐκ ὀρϑῶς ἔχει τὸ καχῶς πάσχοντα ἀμύ- 
ψεσϑαι ἀντιδρῶντα κακῶς, tt is not right 
for one who suffers wrong to avenge him- 
self by doing wrong in return. 

d) δεομαί cov παραμένειν, I beseech (or entreat) 
you to stay with us. ἔφη σπουδάζειν, he 
said that he was in a hurry. συνειπεῖν 
ὁμολογῶ, I confess that I assented. 

6) ὁ ᾿Αλέξανδρος ἔφασκεν εἶναι Διὸς υἱός, Alex- 
ander used. ο say that he was the son of 


Jupiter. 


ἔπεισα αὐτοὺς εἶναι Peds, I persuaded them 
that I was a god. 

ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ εἶναι προϑύμου, they en- 
treated him fo be zealous. 

ἔξεστί μοι γενέσϑαι evdainort, | may (if I 
please) become happy. 


222. VocABULARY 36. 


To wall, fortify, 

A wall, 

Evil-doer, rascal, villain, 

Villainy, 

Misdeed, 

To do evil towards, de 
harm to, to inflict dam 
age on, &c. 

Τὸ ward off, 


To return a man like for 
like. 
ΤῸ remain Witn, 


τειχίζω. 

τεῖχος, 80g (ovg) τό. 
κακοῦργος (κακός et ἔργον). 
κακουργία, ας, ἧ. 
κακούργημα, ατος, τό. 


κακουργέω. 


ἀμύνειν τί τινι (also with 
dat. only, ἀμύγειν τινί, to 
defend. In Mip. ward 


off from myself ; repel, 
requitle, revenge niyself 
on, with acc. of person : 
also without case, to pro- 
tect oneself. 


~ « , > , 
τοῖς ὁμοίοις auvrec Pa. 


παραμένω 


ON THE INFINITIVE. 99 


Say, φάσχω (= give out “with 
a slight intimation that 
the thing is not exactly 


so.” Vémel.) 

T’o feel or be thankful for pi gai 

return thanks for, ’ χάριν εἰδέναι (gen. of thing) 
One may, ἔξεστι (licet). 
One might, ἐξῆν. 
It is right, ἐρϑῶς ἔχει. 
Master, δεσπότης, ov, ὃ. Sess: 
Laugh, γελάω (With fut. mid. -ἄσο- 


μαι). 


Evercise 41. 


223. The city was fortified, that no one™ might do 
injury to the citizens. Nothing was done, because 
(221. δ) that villain gave us trouble. Let us beseech our 
friends to be zealous. He said that he would be with us, 
if it was agreeable to us.** 1 persuaded them that 1 
was a philosopher (221. e). 1 persuaded the judges 
that Abrocomas was a rascal. It isa hard thing (65) to 
conquer one’s temper. He is too young*® to have mas- 
tered his temper. If you ward off from me this danger, I 
shal) feel thankful to you for your zeal. I willrevenge 
myself on him who has injured you. Ifyou return like 
for like to him who has treated you ill, you commit a 
sin. You used to say (221, 6) that you were master. 
We ought to defend the laws of the state. It is in our 
power* to become happy. You may (if you please) be- 
come a philosopher. He says that he will deliberate. 
Nothing was done, because (prep.) all the citizens envy 
the judge. He says that he will brave this danger. It 
15 not right, that a citizen should plot against the con- 
stitution. Ifall the citizens defend the laws, it will be 


well. 


™ μηδείς, a8 ἃ purpose is expressed. 


100 ON THE INFINITIVE. 


224. VocaBuLARy 37. 


PREPOSITION éx. 


Before a vowel ἐκ becomes ἐξ it governs the gen. and 
means in general, out of, forth from. Hence, of 
cause=in consequence of ; from, Jor: also, of sue- 
cession of time. 


Out of the city, ἐκ τῆς πόλεως. 
For this cause or reason. ἐκ ταύτης τῆς αἰτίας. 
This being the case, for 
this reason, therefore. 
After our former tears, ἐκ τῶν πρόσϑεν Suxpvor. 
Unexpectedly, ἐξ ἀπροσδοκήτου (ἀπροσδοκη. 
τος, unexpected). 


ἐχ τούτου. 


Exercise 42. 


225. We are now laughing after our former tears. 
‘The men from (out of) the city are plotting against the 
king. He says that he is watehing over the safety of all. 
The Grecian cavalry, unexpectedly charging the ranks 
of the Persians, conquer (them). It is sweet to laugh 
after troubles. The physician says that diseases are 
from Jupiter. This being the case, it seemed good to the 
generals to depart. The slave says that the pitcher is 
broken. He says that he is glad the citizens are rich. 
He says that he takes pleasure in sleeping. He said 
that the judge had an upper chamber, whenever he stay- 
ed intown. This being so, let every man provide for 
his own safety. I asked him how much he thought the 
gcometer’s possessions would fetch,’ if sold. I wonder 
at what has been done' by the general. It is not every 
man,** that can bear unexpected (evils). This man has 
inflicted more damage upon the city than any other 
single person.“ Would that the physician had remain. 
ed with (us)! Would that the physician were here 
Would that the physician had been here! 


ON THE INFINITIVE. 


ᾧ 38. The Infinitive continued. 


226. Attraction may take place (that is, the predi- 
tate substantive or adjective be in the nominative), 
when the infinitive is introduced by the article or ὥστε. 

227. a) πρὸς τὸ συμφέρον ζῶσι, διὰ τὸ φίλαυτοι εἶναι, 

they make self-interest the object of their 
lives, because they are lovers of themselves. 

b) ἐκπέμπονται ἐπὶ τῷ" ὅμοιοι τοῖς λειπομένοις εἶναι, 
they are sent out,on the understanding 
that they are to be equal (on an equal foot- 
ing with those that are left behind. 

Ο) οὐδεὶς τηλικοῦτος ἔστω mag ὑμῖν ὥστε, τοὺς νόμ- 
ους παραβὰς, μὴ δοῦναι δίκην, let no one be 
so powerful amongst you, as not to be 
punished if he transgresses the laws. 


225. VocABULARY 38. 


It isexpedient or profitable, 
Expediency, utility, 


To make self-interest the 
object of one’s life, 

Self loving, a lover >f self, 
selfish, 

Self-love, selfishness, 

‘T'ransgress, 


So great, so powerful, 

Τὸ be punished, suffer pun- 
ishment, 

Infinitely many, very ma- 
ny, a vast number of, 


συμφέρει (dat.) 
τὸ συμφέρον: (τὰ συμφέροντα, 
what is expedient.) 


πρὸς TO συμφέρον ζῇν. 


, 
φίλαυτος, ος, ον 


φιλαυτία, ac, ἧ. 

παραβαίνω" (of a law, &c., 
to break), 

τηλικοῦτος,- αὐτη,-οὔτο. 

δίκην διδόναι (gen. of thing, 
dat. of person by whom). 


μυρίοι, αι, α. 


5 ἐπί with dat. often marks a condition. 288. 


© βαίνω, βήσομαι, βέβηκα, ἔβην. 


βήσω and ἔβησα, trans. (ἔβην, βῆθι, 


βαίην, BS βῆναι, βᾶς.)--τ-παραβαίνω has also perf. pase. παραβέβᾶμαι, aor, 


raosG aby. 


102 ON THE INFINITIVE. 


Ten thousand, μυρίοι. 

Soldier, στρατιώτης, OV, ὁ. 

Country, πατρίς,» og, ἧ. 

Treaty, σπονδαί, ὧν (properly “li 
bations”). 

Excessively, ἄγαν. 

Excessive, ὁ ἄγαν. 


PREPOSITION, ἀντζί. 


Governs genitive: signification, instead of ; in prefer 
ence to ; (213. e) ; equivalent to. 


Exercise 48. 


929- Let us fly from excessive self-love. Let us pur- 
sue the honorable rather than the expedient. ‘They 
choose war in preference to peace, because they have 
not tasted the evils of war. They undergo every toil. 
because they are ambitious. He says that a king is 
equivalent to very many soldiers. All men, so ¢o say,** 
are lovers of self. If he were not ambitious, he would 
not endure this. Iam come on an understanding, that 
I am to be on-an-equal-footing with the other citizens. 
Do not transgress the laws of your country. They bear 
every thing for the sake of being praised, because (prep.) 
they are excessively ambitious. Let us choose what is 
honorable in preference to what is expedient. It is not 
right, to make self-interest the object of one’s life. It 
does not belong to a pious man, to fear death excessive- 
ly. It is not every man that can®* master self-love. 1 
have not fallen in with Abrocomas for along time. 1 
love both the children of Abrocomas: and those of Phi- 
lip. Every body aims at becoming happy. It is profita- 
ble to men to be pious. If you do this, you shall be pun- 


Ρ Properiy a poetical fem. adj. agreeing with γῆ. 
4 Nouns in as have the Doric gen. in a (for ov), when they are the 
names of foreigners, or of Doric Greeks of no celebrity ; as ' A Bpoxopas 


ἃ ᾿Αβροκόμα. (R.) 


THE PARTICIPLE. 102 


ished for your villainy. All the laws of the state, so to 


say,** were transgressed by this villain. He thinks that 
the treaty has been broken. 


ᾧ 39. The Participle. 


230. A participle asswmes an assertion; or rather 
states it attributively, not predicatively. Whenever it 
is convenient to express this assertion by a complete 
sentence, we may do so; connecting it with the princi- 
pal sentence by a relative pronoun, or a conjunction (or 
conjunctional adverb) of time, cause, condition, or lim- 
itation. Hence, vice versa— 

231. a. ὃ. c. d) Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
troduced by when, after, if, since, because, although, 
&c. may be translated into Greek by omitting the rela- 


tive or conjunction, and turning the verb into a parti- 
ciple. 


In translating from Greek into English, the proper particle to be 
used must be found by considering the relation in which the parti- 
ciple stands to the principal verb. 


Thus, “I visited my friend νοσοῦτα,᾽" may mean, ‘who was ill,’ or 
‘ because he was ili,’ or ‘when he was ill.’ 


232. e) The English verbal or participial substantive 
under the government of a preposition, may often he 
translated by a participle agreeing with the nominative 
zase of the sentence. 

233. g) A past participle may often be translated in- 
to English by a verb, connected with the pyncipal verb 
by ‘ and,’ 


Of course, vice versa, the first of two verbs connected by ‘and 
may be translated into Greek by a past participle. 


234. a) γυνή τις χήρα ὄρνιν εἶχε καϑ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν oor 
αὐτῇ τίκτουσαν, a certain widow woman 
had ahen which laid her anegg every day 


THE PARTICIPLE. 


δ) τὰ χρήματα ἀναλώσας ἀπήγξατο, when oF 
after, he had spent all his money, he hang- 


ed himself. 


C) χαλεπόν ἐστι λέγειν πρὸς τὴν γαστέρα, ὦτα οὐκ 
ἔχουσαν, tt is difficult to speak to the stom- 
ach, because it has no ears. 

d) γιγνώσκοντες ὅτι xaxd ἐστιν, ὅμως ἐπιϑυμοῦ- 
σιν αὐτῶν, though they know that they are 
hurtful, they nevertheless desire them. 

Ε) ληϊζόμενοι ζῶσιν, they live by plundering. 

JS) κρατῶν δὲ ἡδονῶν καὶ ἐπιϑυμιῶν, διαφερίντως 
ἂν σωφρονοῖ, but if he gained the victory 
over pleasure and his desires, he would be 
temperate in an uncommon degree. 

&) λαβὼν, ἔφη, τοῦτον, μαστίγωσον, take this fel- 
low said he, and flog him. δίψας δ᾽ 6 ποι- 
μὴν πέτραν, τὸ κέρας αὐτῆς κατέαξεν, but the 
shepherd threw a stone and broke her horn. 


235. VocaBULARY 39. 


A widow, 
To know, 
ΤῸ consume, spend, 


Stomach, belly, 

The future, 

To plunder, 

Remarkably, ip an uncom- 
mon degree, 

To scourge, flog, 

To throw, 

Stone, 


Bare, uncovered, 


χήρα, ας, ἥ. 

γιγνωσκο. 

ἀνᾶλίσκω (fut. ἀναλώσω, aor. 
ἀνάλωσα). 

γαστήρ, ἔρος, ἥ. 

τὸ μέλλον, 

ληΐζομαι. 


’ 
διαφερόντως. 


μαστῖίγόω. 

ῥίπτω. 
, ε , 

πέτρος, OV, ὁ (πέτρα, ας, ἢ, 
in good authors, is a 
rock.) 

, ΕΞ 
ψῆλος, ἡ, Ov. 


Participles with peculiar meanings, 


At first, at the beginning, 


ἀρχόμενος, ἢ, OV. 


F γιγνώσκω, γνώσομαι, ἔγνωκα, ἔγνωσμαι, ἔγνων. (ἔγνων, γνῶθι, γνοίην͵ 


γνῶ, γνῶναι, yrots.) 


THE PARTICIPLE 


At last, τελευτῶν, WOK, OPV. 
After some time, διαλίπὼν χρόνον." 
With, (often translated by) ἔχων, ἄγων», φέρων, χρώμε:νς. 


Exercise 44. 


> Oss. Sentences in Italics are to be translated by 
participles. 


236. I shall be happy, if Iknow myself. The judge 
himself shall be punished, if he transgress the laws of 
the state. The master himself took the slave and flog- 
ged him. He fled for refuge into the temple, that”? he 
might not be punished. Since you see this, are you not 
without fear of death? Jf you do what you ought, you 
will be happy. That shameless (fellow) lives by flat- 
tering the rich. What impiety !5° He set off with ten 
thousand Hoplites. Cyrus was riding with his head 
uncovered. T'ake the boy and punish him. He has 
spent both his own money and his® father’s. It is not 
every man who can** be without fear of the future. 
He threw a stone and broke the eagle’shead. He cross- 
ed the river, though it was flowing with a εἰ stream. 
The wolf was persuaded, and went away. The physi- 
cian, with much skill (art.), freed the boy from his dis- 
ease. At last he wentaway. At first you spoke ill of 
every body. After some time I will be with you. 


ὁ 40. The Participle continued. 


237. a) The participle of the future is used to ex- 
press a purpose." a ὴ 


* So διαλ, πολύν or ὀλίγον χρ. 

* Of course in choosing which may be used, we must consider 
whether the persons merely had, or led, or brought, or used the thing 
or person with which he performed the action. 

" The intention is spoken of in a less certain way by the addition 

ὡς. He had Qyrus arrested, ὡς dzoxrevav. 


δ᾽ 


106 THE PARTICIPLE 


238. δ) Many verbs that signify emotions, perception 
by the senses, knowledge, recollection, cessation or con- 
tinuance, &c., take the participle, where we should use 
the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or, 
‘that, &c. 


238." a) ἐγὼ ἔρχομαι ὑμῖν ἐπικουρήσων, Tam com: 
ing to aid you. 
τὸν ἀδικοῦντα παρὰ "τοὺς δικαστὰς ἄγειν δεῖ 
δίκην δώσοντα, he who wrongs another 
should be taken before the judges to be 
punished (literally, one should take, &c.) 
τοὺς τοῦτο ποιήσοντας ἐχπέμπει, he sends 
out men to do this. 
δὴ dew τοὺς παῖδας ϑνητοὺς γεννήσας, I knew 
that I had begotten mortal children (or, I 
knew that the children I had begotten 
were mortal). 
jotouny αὐτῶν οἰομένων εἶναι σοφωτάτων, 
I perceived that they thought themselves 
extremely wise. 
σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ σοφὸς ὧν (Or σοφῷ ὄντι), 
I am conscious of being wise (or, that 1 
am wise). 
οὐδέποτε" μετεμέλησέ μοι σιγήσαντι, I have 
never repented of having held my tongue. 


239. VocapuLarRy 40, 


To bring assistance, toaid, ἐπικουρέω (dat.) It may 
succour, have besides an accus. 
of the thing : ἡ ἐπικουρεῖν 
voow to bear help against 
a disorder ; to combat it.) 

Judge, δικαστής," ov, ὁ. 


¥ See 214,h.: “but οὐδέποτε, like nunquam, is occasionally found 
with past tenses even in the best writers.” (P.) 

st τῳ χειμῶνα ἐπεκούρησα. (Xen.) 

“ The δικαστής decides in a court of justice according to right and 
law: the κρίτης in the other relations of life according to equity ard his 
snowledge of human nature. (Pass.) 


THE PARTICIPLE. 


Beget, γεννάω. 
Dare, attempt, τολμάω." 

Verbs that take the participle. 
See, ὁράω. 
Learn, am aware, μανϑάνω." 
I repent, μεταμέλει" μοι. 
Make to cease, stop, παύω. 
Cease, λήγω, παύομαι. 
Am ashamed, αἰσχύνομαι." 
Remember, μέμνημαι. 
Appear, φαίφομαι." . 
Am evident, δῆλός εἶμι ὅτε am evidently, 
Know, οἶδα (2 perf. of eidw.) 
Am conscious, σύνοιδα ἐμαυτᾷ. 
Rejoice, χαίρω. 
Perceive, αἰσϑάνομαι. 


Exercise 45. 


299." Iam ashamed of having flattered Xenoclides. 
Remember that you are a man. He was conscious of 
acting unjustly. He rejoices in being praised, because 
he is ambitious. I have ceased to be a flatterer. Iam 
conscious of fearing death. Iam not ashamed of hav- 
ing conferred many benefits upon him. J know that I 
am mortal. I do not repent of having ravaged the 
whole country. Iam conscious of wishing to destroy 
whatever I may take ‘pew have taken +: He is evi- 
dently doing disgraceful things. He evidently cannot 
either speak well of his friends or treat them well. 
Cyrus knew that the son he had begotten, was mortal 


Υ Of things requiring courage. It has also the meaning of susti- 
nere, to bear to do so and so. 

2 μανθάνω, μαθήσομαι, μεμάθηκα. ἔμαθον. 

® μετα-μέλει, μετα-μελήσει, Sc. ᾿ 

b αἰσχύνομαι ποιεῖντεε am ashamed to do it: αἰσχύνομαι ποιῶν ΟἹ 
τοιῆσας, I am eshamed of doing, or having done it. 

© ἐὰν φαίνωμαι ἀδικῶν, if it should appear that I have acted unjustly 

ἃ δῆλός loro ἑνιώμενος, he is evidently vexed. 

® Sle. 


108s THE PARTICIPLE. 


(238* δ). Iwill puta stop to his inflicting damage on 
the city. I knew that the children he begot were mortal, 
Do not cease to love yourmother. Know that you shall 
be punished for your injustice. ‘The physician is here 
to (p)* combat the boy’s disease. ‘T'ake the villain be- 
fore the judges to be punished. They will evidently 
attempt this. I knew that he had done more service to 
the state than any other single person." I will send out 
men to (p) inflict damage on the city. 


ᾧ 41, The Participle continued ; τυγχάνω, λανϑανω, 
φϑάνοω. 


240. Φϑάνωξ (come or get before) and λανϑάνω" 
(am concealed) are generally rendered by adverbs, 
the participle that accompanies them must then be 
turned into a verb. 

241. The participle λανϑάνων or λαϑών may be ren- 
dered secretly, without being observed, seen, &c. Hence 
ἔλαϑεν εἰσελϑών is nearly equivalent to εἰσῆλϑεν λαϑών, 
but gives more prominence to the notion of secrecy. 

242. a) ὁ Κῦρος, ἅτε! παῖς ὧν, ἥδετο τοῖς τοιούτοις, 

Cyrus, as being a boy, was pleased wich 
such things. 
δ) ἔτυχον παρόντες, they happened to be present. 
τυγχάνει ov, he happens to be (or simply, ts.) 
6) λανϑάγω τι ποιῶν, 1) am concealed from 
myself doing it=do it without knowing 
it ; unconsciously, unknown to myself. 


f A (p) after the first word of a clause shows that it is to be turned 
into a participial clause, as explained in the two preceding sections. 

© φθάνω, φθήσομαι, ἔφθᾶκα. ἔφθασα, ἔφθην. Fut. φθάσω in later wri- 
ters. (ἔφθην----φθαίην, 906, φθῆναι, φθάς). ἔφθην is the older aorist: but 
ἔφθασα is used once even by Thuc., and from Xenophon downwards 1s 
the more common form. (B.) 

δ λανθάνω, λήσω, λέληθα. ἔλαθο:. (See 156.) 

ἐ Often ἅτε ch. (See 371.) 


THE PARTICIPLE. 109 


2) am concealed from others doing κἴ -- 
do it without being observed ; secretly, 
without being seen or discovered. 

d) ἔφϑην αὐτοὺς ἀφικόμενος, I arrived before 
them. ἔφϑην ἀφικόμενος," I arrived first. 

8) οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοις ποιῶν τοῦτο, YOu cannot 
do this too soon. 

J) οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοις ποιῶν τοῦτο; won't you 
do this directly 3 --- ἀο it directly. 

5) λέγε φϑάσας, speak quickly; at once 
ἀνύσας!" τρέχε, run immediately. 


243. VocaBuLarRy 41 


PREPOSITION ἀπό. 
Signification, from ; governs the genit. 


To fight on horseback, ag ἵππων. 
To have done supper, ano δείπνου γένεσϑαι. 
To do a thing of them- 
selves, 
At the suggestion of others, ἀφ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἑτέρων. 
Openly, ἀπὸ τοῦ προφανοῦς (frow 
adj. προφανής). 


» Ft ~ 
aD ἑαυτῶν. 


PREPOSITION πρό. 


Signification, before (of time, place and preference), in 
behalf of, for: governs genit. 


For (=in behalf of) the 
king, 

To value very highly, to πρὸ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι (to 
attach great importance value before, i. e. more 
to, than, much. See 282). 

ΤῸ choose war before, in πρὸ εἰρήνης (for which ἀντὶ 
preference to, peace. is used in 213, e). 


πρὸ tov βασιλέως. 


-- 


© ἱκνέομαι (commonly d¢ixvéopar), tlopat, Typat. ἱκόμην. 
} From ἀνύειν or ἁνύτειν, to accomplish. 


THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, WC. 


Exercise 46. 


244. The physician happened to be preseut. You 
cannot punish the boy too soon (242. 6). The enemy 
arrived at™ the city before us. Go away immediately 
(242. 2). Won't you go away directly (242. f)? If you 
do this before our enemies (do it), we have conquered. 
If you do this before me, I am undone. If we arrive at 
the city before them, all will be well. The slave broke 
the pitcher without being discovered. ‘The Scythians 
fought on horseback. The father went in to the gener- 
al without being observed. These Hoplites were drawn 
up before the king himself. He is too sensible*® to choose 
war before peace. He has done supper. Speak at once 
(242. 2), if it is agreeable®* to those who are present. To 
incur danger in behalf of the state is honorable. It is 
the part of a good man to incur dangers himself for his 
friends. He did this at the suggestion of other persons. 
I should never have done this of myself. If Xenoclides 


had not been their general, they would never have dared 
to commence a war openly. Menenact laws, that’® they 
may not be injured. Having done supper, they prac- 
tised equestrian exercises. 


§ 42. The Genitive Absolute, &c. 


245. a) The case absolute is in Greek the genitive: 
it marks the time, or generally any such relation to the 
principal sentence, as we should express by when, after, 
since, as, because, though, if, &c. 

246. ὃ. c) The participles of impersonal verbs are put 
absolutely in the nominative ; of course withouta noun, 
and in the neuter gender. 


@ εἰς, if they went into -t. 


THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &c. 11) 


247. ἃ) When the time relates to a person, ἐπί is gen- 
erally expressed. 

248. e) When a motive is attributed to another per- 
son, the particle ὡς is generally used with the gen. ΟἹ 
acc. absolute. 


249 a) ἐμοῦ καϑεύδοντος, whilst Iwas asleep. τούτων 
οὕτως ἐχόντων, this being the case; ΟΥ̓́, as 
this is the case. 

δ) διὰ τί μένεις, ἐξὸ ν ἀπιέναι; why do you re- 
main, when you are at liberty ἐο go away 3 

c) So δέον ἀπιέναι, When, whereas, &c. you 
ought to go away. δόξαν" ἡμῖν ἀπιέναι, 
when we have determined fo go away. 
Also δόξαν ταῦτα,» this being determined. 

d) ἐπὶ Κύρου βασιλεύοντος, in the reign of Cyrus. 

6) ἐσιώπα ὡς πάντας εἰδότας (or πάντων 
εἰδότων), he held his tongue, as suppos- 
ing that all knew. 


250. Vocabulary 42. 


Words used in Nomin. Absolute. 

When or whereas it was 
said or told, 

[t being disgraceful, possi- 
ble, impossible, plain or 
evident, 

There being an opportuni- 
ty, when Imay or might, 

it being fit or incumbent, προσῆκον. προσήκει (dat.) it 

belongs to. οἱ προσήκον- 
zec, those that belong to 
us = relations. 

When, whereas one ought, δέον. 


εἰρημένον. 


> ‘ 4 > , 
αἰσχρὺν---δυνατον---ἀδυνάτον 
--δῆλον ὅν. 


4 
mapor.? 


® So δοκοῦν, δεδογμένον. 

© Also détav-os τούτου, δοξάντων τούτων, and dégavra ταῦτα, 

P ἔστιν, ἔνεστι, πάρεστιν, ἔξεστι, &c. πράττειν, all signify, one can ΟΥ̓ 
may: but ἔνεστι relates to physical possibility (it is possible) : ἔξεστι to 
moral possibility (it is allowed): ἔστι and παρέστι stand between these 
two meanings, without being confined to either of them ; the latter im- 
plying also the notion of facility. (B.) 


112 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE, &c. 


As far at least as this is con- 
cerned, as faras depends τούτου ye ἕνεκα. 
on this, 
For the sake of, χάριν (with gen. = prop- 
- \ tr ; but χάριν ἐμήν, for 
my. sake). 
After the manner of a dog, 
like a dog, 
Without, ἄνευ (gen.) 


4 , 
κυνὸς δίκην. 


For any thing the other 
heavenly bodiescould do érexa τῶν ἑτέρων ἄστρων. 
to prevent it, 


Exercise 47. 


251. Without you I should have perished for any 
thing my other friends could have done to prevent it, 
Why do you remain, when we have determined to suc- 
cour our friends? Why do you hold your tongue, 
whereas you ought to speak? Why do you remain, 
now that you have an opportunity to depart? He ask- 
ed the boy, why he remained, when it was his duty tc 
depart. Though they were toldt to be present, they are 
not come. If itis agreeable to you,®* we will go away. 
I hope that we shall thus arrive before’? the Persians. 
He had the same upper-chamber, whenever he wished. 
The slave told me, that the physicians were come (p) to 
combat the boy’s disorder. If you act unjustly towards 
your slaves, know” that you will be punished by the 
gods. I knew thatall the rest of the country had been rav- 
aged by the Persians. Why did you choose war, when 
you might havechosen peace? He told me that all were 
permitted to go in to the general, whenever he was at 
leisure. 


+ It being told. 


THE RELATIVE. 


Exercise 48. 


252. Cyrus evidently™* desired to be praised. I per- 
ceived that he wished to disobey the laws of his country. 
O boy, cease to do this, since (p) it is disgraceful to de- 
spise your father. The boy went secretly (241) into his 
father’s house. But this being determined, we cannot 
set out too soon.” ‘T’he master, as being a fool, wasde- 
ceived by his slave. Do not practise many arts, since it 
is impossible to do every thing well. Letus not despise 
our relations. As far as money is concerned, you will 
rule over all the Greeks. Know that you will get off 
well, as far at least as this is concerned. He told me 
that, if any man was well suited to govern men, it was 
Cyrus.** The physician told me, that he had come for 
my sake. This animal runs like adog. This being 
the case, I will go away at once. All men, so fo say, 
desire what is absent. Itis the part of a senseless man, 
to hold cheap what is present, from the desire of what is 
absent. He said nothing himself, as supposing” that 
all felt grateful to Xenoclides. 


§ 43. The Relative. 


253. a. ὃ. c) The relative is often used to introduce a 
cause, ground, motive, or design of what is stated. 


Oss. 1. When it expresses a cause or ground it takes the indic. ; 
when it expresses a purpose (as in 258. c), the fut. indic. [or the sub- 
junctive 1]. 

Ons. 2. The relative is not used merely to connect a sentence with 
the one before it so frequently asin Latin. When so used, it is 
probably always expressive of some emotion. (B.) 


4 ‘Conjunctivus cum pronominibus adverbiisve relativis consdciatus 
nonnisi in veterum epicorum sermone fini indicando inservit.?’ (Herm. 
ad (Ed. Col. 190. So Krager, Lachmann,&c.) Some MSS. read ὅπως 
in the passage of Thucydides, 258. c. 


ΠΝ κ΄ ΝΣ τ IES εν 


STROM γι 


| 
| 


Te on ee ane 


IE PR TR DRS PE STE I I Ce 


eo NRE OO 


- 


THE RELATIVE. 


Oss. 3. dde is not used as a mere antecedent to the relative, but 
οὗτός, which is not so strongly demonstrative. 


254. d) 'The antecedent is often expressed in the 
relative clause, and omitted in the principal clause. 


Wher. this is the case, the relative clause often stands first; the 


subst., which mostly loses its article, is then not to be placed im- ~ 


mediately after the relative. 


255. e) The relative is often made to agree in case 
with the antecedent in the principal clause. 


This is called Attraction of the Relative: it seldom takes place ex- 
cept where the relative should regularly stand in the accusative, the 
antecedent being in the gen. or dat. and without a demonstrative 
pronoun (as οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος). 


256. g) When the relative is attracted, the antece- 
dent is often placed in the relative clause, but in the 
case in which it would stand in the principal clause. 


257. g) 'The antecedent is sometimes wholly omitted. 


As, for instance, when it is some general or indefinite notion 
(man, thing, &c. as in 258. g, ex. 2), or has been before mentioned 
as in 258. h. 

In (258. ἢ) the rel. seems under the government of a preposition 
belonging to the other clause. As in English sometimes,—“ she 
would have the head of whusoever advised it.” 


) 


258. a) ϑαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν 31805, you act 
strangely in giving us nothing. 

δ) ἐμακάριζον τὴν μητέρα, οἵων τέκνων ἐχύρησε, 
they pronounced the mother happy in 
having such children. (Here οἵων = ὅτι 
τοιούτων.) 

C) ἡ ναῦς πρεσβεῖς ἄγει, οἶπερ τὰ σφέτερα φράσωσιν," 
the ship is bringing ambassadors to 
make (or, that they may make) their own 
statement. 

ὅπλα κτῶνται, οἷς ἀμυνοῦνται τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας, 
they are procuring arms to defend them- 
selves with against those who injure 
them (or, with which to repel or punish 
those who injure them). 


® More probably, φράσουσιν. (Kritger.) 


THE RELATIVE. 115 


d) οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃν εἶδες ἄνδρα, ) This is the man 
ὃν εἶδες ἄνδρα, οὗτός ἐστιν, YOu saw. 


ATTRACTION OF RELATIVE. 


6) μεταδίδως αὐτῷ τοῦ σίτου, οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις, 
you give him a portion of the food which 
youhave yourself. ὃ ἑ ΐ 

ΤῸ τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν ᾧ ἂν Κῦρος δῷ, we will 

τ ρΟΉΠα in any general whom Cyrus may 
give us* (for ov ἄν"). 

5) ἀπολαύω" ὧν ἔχω ἀγαϑῶν, I enjoy the good 
things I possess. μεμνημένος ὧν ἔπραξε, 
remembering what he had done. 

h) μετεπέμπετο ἄλλο στράτευμα, πρὸς ᾧ πρόσϑεν 
εἶχε, he sent for another army, in ad- 
dition to the one he had before. 


959. VocaBuLARY 43. 


Surprising, strange, ϑαυμαστός, ή, ov. 
To act strangely, ϑαυμαστὸν ποιεῖν. 
Corn, (food for man in gen- 

eral, ) 
Ambassador, πρέσβυς, EOS, ὁ. 
To send for, μεταπέμπομαι. 
To enjoy, ἀπολαύω." 


σῖτος. 


PREPOSITIONS ἐν, avd, εἰς. 


ἐν = in, answer to where ?—governs dat. 

ἀνά —(properly) up : in, on, through (of a large space 
of time)—governs accus. 

eis= into, towards, against, in reference to—goverms 


accus. 4 ἣ 
be mrdeS 


5. Dederit. t See 94. 

« This verb (which is probably from the same root as λαβεῖν. P.) ie 
properly to receive from; to receive whether advantage or disadvan- 
tage from any thing. So that (like our, to reap the fruits of > it is used 
in both a good and a bad sense. 

* Plur. often σῖτα in Att. Greek, which is also found in Herodotus. 

* drodatw, ἀπολαύσομαι. Imp. dréduvov, aor. dréhavea, though no sim- 
ple verb is found. ἀπήλαυνον, ἀπήλαυσα are later forms. 


Oa a “ΝΡ 


™ 


aa Se SDT PC LE TE RT AL er 


116 THE RELATIVR. 


The first of all, ἐν τοῖς πρῶτος." 

[τ depends upon you, ἐν σοὶ ἔστι. 

Through the whole country, ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν. 

Through the whole day, ἀνὰ πᾶσαν THY ἡμέραν. 

Every day, ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν. 

Every year, ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος. 

By fives, or five and five, ἀνὰ πέντε. 

To attend a master, sig διδασκάλου φοιτᾷν" (ob 
xiav understaod). 

Το send (a boy) to a mas- 


> , ’ 
εἰς διδασκάλου πέμπειν. 
ter, 


Exercise 49. 


260. I pity the mother for having been deprived ot 
such a daugher (258. δ). 1 will give him some of the 
wine which Ihave. He sent for more wine in addition 
to what he had drunk already (258.h). This is the 
hare you saw (258. d). You act strangely in speaking 


Bs ill even of your friends. He knew that I should enjoy 
~ ion good things I possess (258. @). Receive the good 
᾿ ings you desire (258. @). 1 have ἃ stick to beat you 


with (258.c). ‘The Hoplites arrived first of all.- All 
these things depend on you. ‘They harassed us all the 
day, so that (211) the Hoplites could not march. They 
went into the city by fives. ‘Those who had plotted 
against the king entered (went info) the city by threes 
without being observed."* Say quickly, what your 
opinion is (what seems good to you). I, for my part, 
would choose peace in preference to all that I possess, 
I knew that (p) the citizens would choose™ peace in 
preference to war. Why do you wait, when it is your 
duty to succour your friend? The Athenians used to 
do this every year. They are not aware that (p) they 


x This phrase is elliptical : ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι παρῆσαν-τεεἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν 
πρῶτοι παρῆσαν. Thuc. uses ἐν τοῖς even with a fem. superlative. (See 
iL 81.) 

7 Properly, to go frequently into his house. 


THE RELATIVE. 117 


are despised” by every body. They do this, not only 
every year, but alsoevery day. I admire yourlilies, but 
not* your brother’s. The boy attends no master. We 
send our boys to masters. 


Exercise 50. 


261. I repented of having flogged” the slave. I im- 
deed eat that I may live, but others live that they may 
eat. Socrates said, that he indeed ate that he might 


- Jive, but that others lived that they might eat. The 


beauty of the city was admired by all who were-there.' 
He said that if the citizens obeyed the laws of the state, 
they would prosper (102). I wonder at the water being 
turned into wine. The widow would have died®™ but 

or®® her hen, which (p) laid her an egg every day. 

he beauty of the boy was admired by Socrates him- 
self. The Persian cavalry unexpectedly charged the 
ranks of the Greeks. He says that he (219) has a pain 
in his head. I perceived that he rejoiced” in the wealth 
of the citizens. Iam ashamed of being glad” that my <~ 
daughter is beautiful. He is evidently’* vexed at the 
misdeeds of his brothers. Henceforth let us despise no- 
body. The judge told me that we must persuade (120. c) 
the citizens. Wouldthat you had done what you ought! 
Would that you would do what you ought! Tamata 
loss what to do (98). 


§ 44. The Relative continued. 


262. a) When the relative, with such a verbas ἕο be, 
call, believe, &c. stands in apposition to a noun, it gen- 
erally agrees in gender with it, rather than its proper 
antecedent. + 


« 


® οὐ should stand last: it then takes an accent (οἴ). 


118 THE RELATIVE. 


263. δ) totw-of*==%n01, some,and may be declined 
throughout :— 


N. ἔστιν of, ἔστιν al, ἔστιν ἅ. 
G. ἔστιν ὧν. 
D. ἔστιν ois, ἔστιν als, ἔστιν ols, &e. 
, 264. c) In the same way ἔστιν ὅτε =sometimes ; ἔστιν 
ὅπου, somewhere, &c. 
265. d) So also ἔστιν with ὅστις is used as an inter 
rogative. 
+ ae κὸν ᾿ 
266. 6) ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ᾧτε 5, ‘on condition that, with the 
future indic. or the infin. 
The relative in this construction answers to the demc nstrative 
ἐπὶ τούτῳ: which, or ἐπὶ τοῖσδε, is not unfrequently expressed. 
> »" τ > , 
267. 4) av? ὧν, because, for ( --ἀντὶ τούτου ὅτι). 
It may, however, be used in its proper meaning: ‘in return for 
those things which,’ &e. τ J 
” b 
268. h) εἴ τις " does not express any doubt as to 
whether there was any, but is used as equivalent to 
ὅστις, Whosoever, whatsoever (= all that). 


269. a) φόβος, ἣν αἰδὦ καλοῦμεν, the fear which we 
call bashfulness, 

δ) ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ πόλεων ἔστιν oy, Srom 
some of the cities in Sicily. 

Ο) οὕσπερ εἶδον ἔστιν ὅπου, whom I saw some- 
where. 

d) ἔστιν οὕστινας ἀνθρώπους τεϑαύμακας ἐπι 
σοφίᾳ ; are there any persons whom you 
have admired for their wisdom ? 

6) λέξω σοι, Eq ᾧ σιγήσει, I will tell you, on con- 
dition that you will hold your tongue. 

FS) ἐρέϑησαν ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε συγγράψαι νόμους, they were 
chosen on the condition that they should 
draw up laws (i. e. to draw up laws). 


5 For ‘sunt qui dicant’ the Greeks said, ἔστιν of λέγουσιν, or εἰσὶν of 


λέγοντες, OF εἰσὶν of λέγουσιν. Examples of the last construction are no? 
uncommon. (Kr.) 


b τὶς indef. has gen. tov, dat. τῳ (both enclitic), for τινός, rvi.. 90 
ὅστις has ὅτου, ὅτῳ 


THE RELATIVE. 119 


4) χάριν σοι οἶδα ἀν ϑ' ὧν ἦλϑες, I feel thankful 
to you for coming. 

h) ἔφϑειρον εἴ τι χρήσιμον ἦν, they destroyed 
every thing of value. 


270. VocaBuLaRy 44. 


ΤῸ be banished, φεύγειν." 
To return from _banish- 
ment, 

Τὸ wound, τιτρώσχω ὁ 
Some, ἔστιν οι. 
Somewhere, ἔστιν ὁπου. 
Sometimes, ἔστιν OTE. 
Hold my tongue, σιγάω." 


κατέρχομαι, κατειμι. 


PREPOSITION διά. 


Governs accus. and genitive. 
Signification : (with gen., ‘through,’ of space 0 «ue; 
and of means. 
μ (with accus.) ‘on account of; also, 
through, of a cause. 


On your account, ok 

After a long time, διὰ πολλοῦ χρόνου : 8150, διὰ 
χρόνου, after some time. 

Every five years, διὰ πέντε ἐτῶν." 

To pity, di οἴκτου ἔχειν. 

To be angry with, δὲ ὀργῆς ἔχειν. ' 

To be at enmity with, δί ἔχϑρας γίγνεσϑαί tm.8 

At a little, at a great dis- 

tance, 
To have in one’s hand, 


δί ὀλίγου, διὰ πολλοῦ. 


ww 
διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν. 


* φεύγειν is used for φυγεῖν, to be in banishment. (Heindorf.) 
τιτρώσκω, τρώσως &c. 
ὁ Fut. generally, σιγήσομαι. It cannot, like σιωπάω, take accus. of 
thing. 
f Also διὰ πέμπτου ἔτους and διὰ πέμπτων ἑτῶν. 
6 So διὰ φιλίας ἱέναι τινί, (Ken. nab. iii. 8.) 


e rT ‘ Ν.. νὶ 
0 060g σὺ ἀνήρ. 


Exercise 5 


i. 


271. I deem you happy in having received®* such 
guod things. Most men evidently desire™® the good 
things which their neighbours possess. I will go away 
on condition that the physician shall stay. Some οἱ 
them were wounded by the enemy. 1 will tell you, on 


condition that the others shall 
there any person whom (269. d) 


hold their tongue. Is 
you have praised for® 


his forwardness? 1 will endeavour to do this so that 


(211) even you shall praise? 
liberty before all the good thir 
He chose war, when he mig h 


me. I would choose 
igs I possess (258. g). 
¢ have peace. Xeno- 


clides was chosen general, with three others.2' I τα. 
joice to have been elected 74 general by the Athenians, 
Why am I wretched, when I may become happy? 1 
am at enmity with Abrocomas, He was banished 
through the Athenians, 1 rejoice in seeing you” after 


some time. Know that itis thro 


ugh the gods* that you 


are doing well. Know that it is through me that you 


have returned from banishmer 


it. The physician is 


come on your account. They do this every five years, 


The boy pursues the dog with 
hand. 


(having) a stick in his 


¢ 


ᾧ 45. ὁ οἷος σὺ 


272. The relative adjectives, 
suffer attraction not only in the 


ἀγήρ. 


οἷος, ὅσος, ἡλίκος, &c. 
accusative, but also in 


the nominative, when the verb εἰμί With an express 


b Gen.—aiviw takes acc. of person, gen. of thing. 


“τ ΞΞΞ Infin. pres. 
ΚΟ i.e. know, doing well (nom. partic.) 
sentences of this kind (having ‘it is’ fo 
turned in the same way. 


through the gods. The other 
llowed by ‘ that’) are to be 


ὁ οἷος σὺ ἀνήρ. 121 


» ἐς 
subject stands in the relative sentence; ὅδ. ἔραμαι οἵου 
: , ” > ‘ ’ τ συ εξ : 

v ἀνδρός, for ἔραμαι ἀνδρὸς τοιούτου οἷος As 
an 1. This attraction consists in the omission of 
the demonstrative adjective in the gen., dat., or accus., 
and then putting the relative adject., by oat 
the case of the preceding substant. ‘The verb o ad - 
ative sentence (εἰμί) is also omitted, and the subject of the 
relat. sentence agrees with the attracted relative. = 

Oss. 2. In this construction, ὅσος follows — ts τ ἐν 
͵ , ~ 4 Ξ ὁ ε ve 
as ϑαυμαστός, ete ἄφϑογος : and ὡς the a 
ϑαυμασίως, ϑαυμαστώῶς, &. of 
273. a) G. ἔραμαι οἵου cov ἀνδρός, I love sucha 
man asyou. Ὁ : Σ 
D. χαρίζομαι οἵφ coi ἀνδρί, I gratify such 
aman as you. ; 
A. ἐπαιγῶ οἷον σὲ ἄνδρα, I praise such a 
man as you. 
b) Νὁ οἷος ov! (ἀνήρ), such a man as you. 
G. τοῦ Siov aod (ἀνδρός), of such a man as 
you, &c. &c. "te F 
c) ϑαυμαστὸν ὅσον προὐχώρησε, he made 
astonishing progress. ' 
d) ϑαυμασίως ὡς ἄϑλιος γέγονε, he has be- 
come Surprisingly miserable. 
274. VocaBuLARY 45. 
To love, “ἐράω." 

To gratify, χαρίζομαι 

Advance, make progress, προχωρέω 

To leap, ἄλλομαι. 

Τὸ throw ῥίπτω. Με} ᾿ ΤῈ 

The truth, τὸ ἀληϑές (ἀληϑής, true; ἀλ- 

ήϑεια, truth). 


1 πέρ is often added: οἱ οἷοί περ ὑμεῖς ἄνδρες. 
= pte poet. ἔραμαι, ἐρασθήσομαι, ee om) wry (See Index.) 
Pres. pass. iodpat, (ἐρᾶσθαι ἐρώμενος ᾿ to e loved. 
5 rts Bodnar. Aor. 1. ἡλάμην with ἃ in the moods, aor. 2. ἡλόμην 
with a. Aor. 1. should probably be preferred for indic. and purt. ; om, 
2. for optat. and infn. (B.) Hermann rejects the indic. and imver. o 


sor. 2. 6 


122 ὁ οἷος σὺ ἀνήρ. 


True happiness, ἡ ὡς ἀληϑῶς εὐδαιμονία, 
To dwell, οἰκέω. 
Miserable, wretched. ἄϑλιος, a, ον. 


PREPOSITION, κατά. 


Properly κατά signifies a motion from a higher place 
downwards: and governs the genié. and accus. 

With genit. it means, down from, down, under; but 
more commonly against, with verbs of speaking, 
thinking, &c. 

With accus. it means, at, by, near, during, in an in- 
definite way ; also, according to, and with the distri- 
butive sense of our ‘by’ (by twos, &c.) 


According to reason, κατὰ λόγον (also. with gen. 
“in proportion to”). 


During, in, or-at the time 
of the disease, 

In villages, κατὰ κώμας (vicatim). 

Το by two, κατὰ δύο. 

In all respects, κατὰ πάντα. 

Sensual pleasures, αἱ κατὰ τὸ σῶμα ἡδοναί. 


According to Plato, κατὰ Πλάτωνα. 


‘ ‘ , 
κατὰ THY VOTO. 


Exercise 52. 


275. They cling tosensual pleasuies, because”! they 
have never tasted true happiness. They are too wise** 
to cling to sensual pleasures. (Men) gladly gratify such 
aman as you are. Iwould gladly gratify such men 
as you. They leapt down from the wall. Do you 
wish (98) that I should, speak the truth against my 
friend? ‘The boy is lie his father in every respect. 
This is (65) hard, and for men like us impossible. ‘The 
king loved such men as you are. The boy has made 
astonishing progress. He said that he would” very 
gladly gratify a man like you. Men like you always 
speak well of the good. A man like you is praised by 
every body. I would.rather see men like you, than the 
king of the Persians himself. He has become very 


“ξης 


δ δρου.»...ὕ...........- Ὅλο - 


4 σ 
οὐδεὶς OOTIS οὐ. 123 


wretched, unknown to himself."* I cannot gratify a 
man like you too soon.77 Will you not gratify a man 
like me direcily?"’ Sophroniscus, as being selfish, 
obliged nobody, willingly at least.* ΑἸ] men, so to 
say,** like to oblige such men as you. All men, so to 
say, rejoice in praising’’ such a man asyouare. These 
things happened in the time of the disease. I know that 
they dwell” in villages. ‘The eagle has wings in pro- 
por‘ion to its body. ‘To live according to reason isa 
dilicrent thing (from living) according to passion. I 
will tell you on condition that you (will) send your boy 
to some master (259). 


§ 46. οὐδεὶς ὅστις ov. 


276. In ovdsig ὅστις οὐ (nemo non) the declinable 
words are put under the immediate government of the 
verb. 

Kihner calls this inverted attraction, because the noun (or word 


representing it) conforms to the relative, not the relative to the 
noun. 


Sometimes adverbs are affected by this kind of attraction: βῆναι 
κεῖθεν, ὅθεν περ ἥκει (for κεῖσε). 


277. N. οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὐκ ἂν ταῦτα ποιήσειεν. 

G. οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὗ κατεγέλασεν. 

D. οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀπεχρίνατο. 

A. οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλαυσε. 
There is no one who would not do this. 
There was no one whom he did not laugh at. 
There was noone whom he did not answer. 
There was noone whom he did not weep for. 


278. VocaBuLary 46. 


‘l’o laugh at, καταγελάω.» 


Φ The art. must be expressed, though the infin. is to be omitted. 
P γελάω, -acopat, but ἐγέλασα. Short a. 


STs π΄ π᾿ Sota 


es 


124 οὐδεὶς ὅστις οὗ. 


ΤῸ answer, ἀποκρινομαι." 


To weep for, κατακλαίω. 
Especially, 3 ἄλλως τε καί (poth other 


wise and also). 


There is nothing like hear- οὐδὲν οἷον ἀκοῦσαι. 
ing, 

As fast as they could, 

The agricultural popula- 
tion, 


ς΄ ’ zy 
ὡς τάχους εἶχον." 


e ‘ ~ 
οἱ ἅμφι γῆν ἔχοντες. 


Exercise 53. 


279. There is noone who would not weep for such 
men as you.*® 'There is nobody whom he does not de- 
spise. Thereis no one whom he does not hold cheap. 
There is no one whom they do not gladly oblige. 
There was none of those present* whom he had not 
plotted against. 1 act strangely in not gratifying” a 


man like you.’ I know that I shall love™ a man like 
you. lam ashamed of having plotied’* against a man 
like you. He evidently wished"® to oblige such men as 
you. That isa hard thing, and for a man like me at 
least,t impossible. "ΤῸ live according to reason is un- 
pleasant (not pleasant) to most persons, especially 
(when they are) young. There is nothing like hear- 
wing the ambassadors themselves. The agricultural 
population are doing well. ‘They pursued the dog as 


fast as they could. 


4 Aor. 1. ἀποκριθῆναι is passive, from droxpivw (secerno), except -n 
late writers, who use it for ἀποκρίνασθαι. (B.) 


® Gen. of τάχος. 
* Put the partic. after the negatives. Οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ πάντων ἂν ὑμ ὧν 


καθ᾽ ἡλικίαν πατὴρ εἴην. (Plato, Protag. 317. c.) 
* οἵῳ ys ἐμοί. 


οἷος. δέω. μέλλω. 


ᾧ 47. οἷος. δέω. μέλλω. 


280. α. δ) οἷος with the infinitive implies great ἠέ- 
ness or ability in a thing: τέ is usually joined with οἷος 
in this signification ; as οἷός ze εἰμὶ ποιεῖν, I am the man, 
the fittest one to do it, 1 am able to do it, can do it, 
Without the infinitive, with neuter, οἷον denotes possi- 
bility. 

281. c. d). dé with ὀλίγου, πολλοῦ, &c. is used both 
personally and impersonally, in the meaning of 7 want 
but little of, am far from doing, &c.: impers. πολλοῦ δεῖ, 
there wants much, far from it ; ὀλίγου δεῖ, there wants 
little, all but, &c. Sometimes δεῖν is omitted with ὁλέ 
yav, ἄτα. 

282. 6. 7) μέλλω is followed by an infin. of the fu- 
ture, present, or aorist. 

Ops. The future infin. is the most, the aorist the 
least common." (P.) 


283. a) οἷός τὲ εἰμι, I am able (i. 6. am such as to 
doathing). οἷον τέ ἐστι, it is possible. 
b) οἱ πρόσϑεν ὀδόντες οἷοι τέμνειν εἰσίν, our 
Jront teeth are adapted for cutting. 
οὐ γὰρ ἦν οἷος ἀπὸ παντὸς κερδαίνειν, he was 
not of a character’ to do any thing what- 
ever for the sake of gain. 


* There is a large glass of verbs the object of which, expressed by 
an infinitive, relates to future time, and may, therefore, be in the fu- 
ture, though it often is in the pres. or aor. “ The present is preferred 
when either the certain definite occurrence of the action is to be 
marked, or its immediate commencement from the time the words are 
uttered.” (K.) Buttmann properly observes, that a distinction should 
be made between verbs whose object is necessarily future (e. g. hope 
promise, expect) and those where the object is not necessarily future 
(6. g. say, think, &c.): with the latter the pres. or aor. might be mis- 
understood ; with the former, not. But the MSS. often agree in giving 
the pres. or aor. (with reference to future time) after such verbs. (B 
ad Plat. Crit. 14. 3.) 

Υ Or, was not a man to, &c. 


a et tt 


a tt tt I tt a στ.» 


ts, MP et ttt ts tnt 


οἷος. δέω. μέλλω. 


€) ὀλίγου δέω δακρῦσαι, I could almost cry ; Οἱ 
am near crying. 
ὀλίγου δεῖν ἐδάκρυσα, I was near crying. 
ὀλίγου πάντες, nearly all (δεῖν omitted), 
τοῦτο γὰρ πολλοῦ δεῖν εἴποι τις ἄν, for a 
man would not assert that, far from it. 
d) δυοῖν déorta™” εἴκοσι, eighteen. 
6) μέλλω γράψειν, γράφειν, γράψαι, lam going to 
write. 
J) εἰ μέλλει φιλόσοφος γενέσϑαι, if he is to be- 
come a philosopher. 


283*. VocaBuLARY 47. 


Cry, shed tears, δαχρύω. 

I am far from, πολλοῦ δέω. 

Nearly, almost, ὀλίγου δεῖν (used as an aa- 
verbial phrase; or odi- 
you only). 

Far from it, πολλοῦ δεῖν. 

Am going to, μέλλω (also, am likely to, 
and am to, &c.) 

Τὸ gain, κερδαίνω. 

Gain, κέρδος, £09, τό. 

Stove, καάμῖνος, OV, 7. 

Mostly, τὰ πολλά. 

Front (adject.), ὁ πρόσϑεν. 


PREPOSITIONS, ἀμφί, περί. 


Govern genit., dative, and accus, . 

Signification: ἀμφὶ or περὶ τόν, ‘about, in answer to 
both where? and whither? ἀμρὶ OP περί τι or τινὰ ἔχειν 
or εἶναι is, to belong to,* to be, or be employed about. 


~ The construction δυοῖν δεόντοιν has disappeared, under the infla- 
ence of modern criticism, from the works of the great writers, with the 
single exception of Xen. Hell. i.1,5: ἐπεισπλεῖ δυοῖν δεοῦσαιν εἴκοσι ναυσίν, 
where δεοῦσαις is undoubtedly the proper reading. (Krager.) 

Ὁ of ἀμφὶ (or περὶ) "Ἄνυτον, Anytus and his followers or party. a 
phrase employed by Attic writers, when they chiefly allude to only one 
‘ndividual ; leaving it at the same time, for some reason, undecided 
and in the dark, whether they mean that individual alone, or others 


besides. (B.) 


og. δέω. μέλλω. 121 


περι τῷ denotes care about: it follows verbs of fearing 

, (δεδιέναι), being at ease about (ϑαῤῥεῖν), &e. 

ἀμφί and (more commonly) περὶ τοῦ are of, about (de) 
asin ‘to talk about. Also, φοβεῖσϑαι, φιλονεικεῖν (to 
contend) περί τινος. 

περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι or ἡγεῖσϑαι,Υ to value highly, to 
make a great point of, or attach great i meportance to. 


Exercise 54. 


284. He asked whether this was possible. We cut 
with our front teeth. He told me that his father had the 
tooth-ache in one of his front teeth. He has large’? front 
teeth. He was not of a character to fear death. He 
says that he does not choose to go in to the general, 
since (p) he is not at leisure. The Athenians sailed 
with (part.) nineteen ships. It is not possible that oue 
man should ever do” all this. You will notescape from 
(86*. δ) death. He is* mostly about the stove. Do not 
think that I do this from insolence. Young men are of 
a character to desire many things. Nearlyall (of them) 
wish to entrust the arbitration to Socrates. They will 
be entrusted with this! by nearly all (of them). I am 
far from desiring all that you have. He fears the same 
things that we do(182). He says that he (219) is with- 
out fear of death. He says that the mother is afraid 
about her daughter. The agricultural population are 
doing well. LIasked the general, whether he was going 


to march against the king. He says that he has been 
entrusted with this,*! 


, 80 περὶ πλείονος, πλείστου, &c. περὶ μικροῦ. (See 243.) 
Ey. 


ont 


<-_ 


τότ --- 


Sita 


SSS SS a tee 


se ἊΨ ee 


Ste σιν ee COS ee A ee 


ᾧ 48. ὅπως. οὐ μή. 


285. a. ὃ) ὅπως," when it refers to the future, has 
either the subj. or the future indic.,t and retains them 
even in connection with past time, when the optative 
might have been expected (69). 

286. c.d) The verb on which the sentence with ὅπως 
depends is often omitted. 

Rem. This construction is equivalent to an energetic imperative " 
——dpa OF δρᾶτε may be supplied. 

287. ov μή," with the fut. indic. or aor. subj., is used 

as an emphatic prohibition or denial. 


Rem. 1. This construction is probably elliptical: ot (δέος ἐστὶ) 
ph... ἄτα. 
With the second pers. sing. of the future indic. it is a prohibitions 
with the subj., and other persons of the future, a denial. 


Rem. 2. Elmsley says: ‘od μή cum futuro vetantis est, cum 
subjunctivo vero negantis ;” but Hermann shows, that the prohib- 
itive meaning depends on the person, not on the tense. Elmsley 
explained this phrase in what seems the simpler way, by join 
ing the μή to the verb. Thus οὐ μὴ λαλήσεις ; = will you not not-talk 
= will you not hold your tongue? = hold your t ée. But Her- 
mann (who at first agreed with Elmsley), Rost, Kiihner, &c. adopt 


the other explanation, supposing δέος ἐστί, or some such phrase, 
understood. 
287". a) φρόντιζε ὅπως μηδὲν αἰσχρὸν ποιήσεις, take 
care to do nothing disgraceful. 
ὃ) ξυνεβούλευεν οὕτω ποιεῖν, ὅπως ὁ σῖτος ἀντίσχῃ, 
he advised them to do this, that the pro- 
visions might hold out. 


* ὅπως is properly ‘how, and it cannot be used for ‘ that, except 
where for ‘ that’ we might substitute ‘ that by this means, or ‘ that so.’ 
With the future indic. it is always strictly ‘ how, ὅτῳ τρόπῳ. 

t The fut. with ὅπως exprésses a definite intention, for the accom- 
plishment of which vigorous measures are to be pursued. (R.) 

» Dawes laid it down as a rule, that the subjunctive of the aor 1. 
act. and mid. was never used with ὅπως, οὐ μή, but that the fut. i, fic. 
Was used instead. This rule is now given up by the best scholars ; but 
Battmann thinks that the subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind 
of predilection, and that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut 
tndic. was used in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1. 


ὅπως. οὐ μή. 129 


δ) ὅπως ἀνὴρ ἔσει, that you behave (or quit 4 our 
self) like a man. 

d) ὅπως μὴ ποιήσητε, ὃ πολλάκις ὑμᾶς ἔβλαψεν, be 
sure not to do what has often been detri- 
mental to you. 

6) ov μὴ λαλήσεις ; do not chatter pray. ov py 
γένηται τοῦτο, this will assuredly not hap 


pen. 
288. VocaBuLARY 48. 


To bethink myself, consid- 
er, take care, 

Talk, chatter, λαλέω. 

Whilst he was walking, μεταξὺ περιπατῶν. 

Nevertheless, ὅμως. 

To be at dinner, δειπνέω (δεῖπνον, cena, the 
principal meal of the day 
taken towards evening). 


φροντίζω. 


PREPOSITION ἐπί. 


Goverus genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification: in answer to question where? generally 
with genit., sometimes with daz. in the sense of ‘on’: 
as ἐφ᾽ ἵππου ὀχεῖσϑαι : ἐφ᾽ ἵππῳ πορεύεσϑαι. 

In answer to questions whither 2 with accus. ; as ἐπὶ λό- 
gor τινά, to a certain hill ; and more generally, on, in, 
towards to, &c. 


They marched to Sardis, ἐπὶ Σάρδεων. 
They sailed to Chios, ἐπὶ τῆς Χίου. 
Towards home, ἐπὶ οἴχου. 


ἐπί With dative denotes in addition to, besides ; close 
by (as ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ); an aim or condition (266), and 
the being in one’s power (65). 

ἐπί With genit. often marks the time by means of some- 
thing contemporary, generally a contemporary per- 
son (65). 


To come for (to effect it), ἐλϑεῖν ἐπὶ τούτῳ. 
( 


this, to fetch it), “« © τ 


0" 


¢ 


To bedrawn u πὶ 
pfourdeep, ἐπὶ τεττάρων τετά 
δταχϑαι. 
To be named after a per- , ” ‘ ; ; 
son, ὁνομὰ ἔχειν Ei τινος. 
Toendure athing forthe .,, , 
sake of praise, Epa 


Exercise 55. 


289. Be sure to be here yourself (287*. d). Takecare 
that your children may beas good * as possible*? (287* ᾿Ξ 
Be sure to behave like men worthy of the liberty you 
possess. ‘Take care not to say what has often hurt fe 
lake care to injure nobody. 'The Grecian Hoplites vais 
drawn up three deep. Cyrus marched for Sardis with 
(part.) his Grecian Hoplites. He said that these things 
were not in his power.*® They made (mid.) a treat on 
these conditions. He is named after the great hie 
He said that his boy was named after Thales, the phi- 
losopher. They killed him whilst he was at dinner 
I'he Athenians, though (p) they were able to take the city. 
nevertheless sailed back home. In addition to all this the 
Athenian generals have already sailed home. He told me 
that the general was not of a character®® to act unjust! 
by the citizens. They are not sent out (on an slides 

standing that they are) to be slaves (227. Ὁ). He says 
that he dwells close by the river. He is very ambitious 
so as (211) to do every thing for praise. He said that 
the corpse was of asuperhuman size5® Hesaid that he 
had suffered things ¢oo great for tears3® Do not do 


this, pray. They will assured] 
y not obey the law 
the city. Leave off chattering, y aws of 


ᾧ 49. μή. μὴ οὐ. 


or Η 
290. a. b) After expressions of fear, solicitude, un- 
cer tainty, &c. μή is used with the subjunctive or indic. 


© βέλτιστος. 


μή. μὴ οὐ. 131 


Oss. The indic. is used when the speaker wishes to intimate hia 
conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really come to pass 
Of course the subj. becomes the ορέ. in connection with time past. 


and in a dependent proposition. (70, 71.) 


291. c) The notion of fear is often omitted before μὴ 


ov, the verb being then generally in the sz. 
292. f. 4) μὴ ov is also used with the infin. after 


many negative expresslons :-— 


1) After to hinder, deny, feel misgiving, &c. when they have a 
negative with them; if not (as in 293. e), they are used with μή, 
where we use no negative.t 

2) After such expressions as δεινὸν εἶναι, αἰσχρόν OF aio xivny εἶναι» 


αἰσιγώνεσθαι. 
3) After such negative expressions as, to be unable, impossible, 


no right, &c. 
?) μὴ οὐ is also sometimes used with the participled and with 
ὧι re and infin., after negative expressions. 


293. a) δέδοικα μὴ ϑάνω, I fear that I shall die. 
δέδοικα μὴ ov ϑάνω, I fear that I shall not 
die. 

b) φοβοῦμαι μὴ εὑρήσομεν, I fear we shall find. 

φοβοῦμαι μὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμαρτήκαμεν, ΓΙ͂ΘΑΥ 
that we have missed (lost) both. 

c) ἀλλὰ μὴ οὐκ ἢ διδακτόν, but perhaps it is a 
thing that cannot be taught. 

d) εἰ δὲ νενησόμεϑα ἐπὶ βασιλεῖ, τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ 
οὐχὶ πάντα τὰ δεινότατα παϑόντας ἀποϑα- 
γεῖν ; but if we shall fall into the power 
of the king, what will prevent us from 
being put to death, after suffering all 
that is most terrible ? 

e) ἀποκωλῦσαι τοὺς Ἕλληνας μὴ ἐλϑεῖν, to pre- 
vent the Greeks fromcoming. ἦρν οὔ ν- 
το μὴ πεπτωκέναι, they (denied that they 
had fallen) said that they did not fall. 
ἀπιστοῦντες αὐτὸν μὴ ἥξειν, not believing 
that he would come. 


-- ---- 


+ But the μή is not always expressed after verbs of hindering, pre- 
venting, &c. σχήτω σε πηδᾷν, &e. 

ἃ Thus ὀυσέλγητος γὰρ ἂν | εἴην τοίανδε μὴ οὐ κατοικτείρων ἕδραν (Soph 
Ant. 96.) 


μή. μὴ ov. 


J) σὺ γὰρ ὑπέσχου ξητήσειν," ὡς οὐχ ὅσιόν σοι δ, 
μὴ ov βοηϑεῖν δικαιοσύνῃ, for you prom- 
ased to investigate it (with us), as hold- 
ing it impious in you not to come to 

_ the assistance of justice. 

&) οὔτε μὴ μεμνῆσϑαι δύναμαι αὐτοῦ, οὔτε μεμνημέ- 
γος μὴ οὐκ ἐπαινεῖν, I can neither not re- 
member him, nor remembering not 
praise him. 


293". VocaBuLarRy 49. 


Capable of being taught, 
that can be taught, 

Science, 

Know, know how, 

To fall into a_person’s 
power or hands, 

Τὸ prevent a person, 


Right, lawful (as deter- 
mined by divine or nat- 
ural laws. 

Fall, 

Hinder, prevent, 

To deny, 

Fear, 

Suspect, 


διδακτός, 7, ὅν. 


ἐπιστήμη, ἧς, ἡ. 
> , 
ἐπίσταμαι. 


, > , 
γίγνεσϑαι ἐπί τινι. 


ἐμπόδων εἶναι μή, or after 
negatives or in ques- 
tions implying a nega- 


live, μὴ ov. ἐχποδών is, 

, out of the way of. 

oowog:® δίκαιος, a, ον, (of 
what is permitted by 
human law. 

πίπτω." 

κωλύω, ἀποκχωλύω. 

ἀρνέομαι. 

δείδω." 

ὑποπτεύω (accus. of person). 


PREPOSITION μετά. 
Governs genit., dative, and accus. 


9 282, note c. 


͵ ἐπίστημαι, ἑἐπιστήσομαι ) ἧπιστήθην. 


orc +at, 


Imp. ἠπιστάμην. 2 sing. pres. ἐπί- 


© But as opposed to ἱερός, ὅσιος relates to man, i. e. to natural Jaws: 
hence ἱερὰ καὶ ὅσια, ‘ divine and human things.’ 


πίπτω, πεσοῦμαι, πέπτωκα. ἔπεσον. 


* δείδω, δείσομαι, ἐέδοικα and δέδτα (both with meaning of pres) Aor 


L. ἔδεισα. 


* 


μὴ WITH RELATIVES, &c. 


Signification: with accus., after. 
“ “ with genit., with. 
ἐ “ — with dat.(only in the poets),among, inter, 


ι5 3 


Exercise 56. 


294. I fear his coming to some harm (lest he should 
suffer something). I feared the boy would come to 
some harm. I fear we shall find, that (p) these things 
are not so. I fear about my boy lest he should come to 
some harm. The father, though he feared about his 
boy, nevertheless went away. I cannot either go or 
stay (110). I knew that they would prevent” the king 
from coming (293. 6) into the country. I fear that we 
have treated them ill. I fear that the rascal will not 
die. It is disgraceful not to defend the laws of our 
country. Nothing prevents this from being (293. e) 
true. What prevents us from dying at once? Itisa 
disgrace not to be without fear of death. It is a terrible 
thing, not to bear what comes from the gods. -It is not 
right, not to choose to fight for one’s country. It is not 
right not to die for one’s country, if it benecessary. Iam 
ashamed not to appear to have conferred great benefits 
upon my country. Ifearthis will happen. After this, 
what prevents us from dying? They sent out men to 
prevent themt from coming into the country. 


ᾧ 50. μή with Relatives, the Infinitive, &c. 


295. a.c) μή is used in relative sentences and vith 
participles, adjectives, &c., whenever the negative does 
not directly and simply deny an assertion with respect 
to some particular mentioned person or thing. 


Hence relative sentences, participles, and adjectives take pr, 


* See 238*, the third example. 


—— 


μῇ WITH RELATIVES, &c. 


whenever they might be resolved into a sentence with ‘if, or de 
scribe oniy a supposed case: not particular individuals, but individ- 
uals of a class. 

296. d) The infinitive generally takes. μή, except 
where the opinions or assertions of another person are 
stated (i sermone obliquo). See 110. 

297. δ) With ὥστε! the infinitive takes μή, the in- 
sdlicative ov. 


298. a) τίς δὲ δοῦναι δύναται ἑτέρῳ, ἃ μὴ αὐτὸς ἔχει; 
but who can give to another what he has 
not got himself ? 

ἢ) ἀσφάλειάν σοι παρέξονται, ὥστε oe μηδένα 
λυπεῖν, they will afford you security, so 
that no man shall annoy you. 

πράγματα παρεῖχον, ὥστε οὐκέτι ἐδύνατο 
τὸ στράτευμα πορεύεσϑαι, they harassed 
them, so that the army could not ad- 
vance further (any longer). 

6) οὐδεὶς... ὅστις μὴ παρέσται, no one who shall 
not be present (or, who is not present).™ 
ὁ μὴ πιστεύων, he who does not believe. 
τὰ μὴ καλά, dishonorable things. 

d) τὸ μὴ τιμᾷν γέροντας ἀνόσιόν ἐστι, it is wrong 
(an unholy thing) not to honour old men. 

6) μὴ γένοιτο," may it not be so! μὴ ἴδοις τοῦτο, 
may you never see this ! 


* The thing to be considered, with respect to a relative or parti- 
cipia) clause, is, whether it introduces some new particular concerning 
the object spoken of, or forms one complex notion withit. In this way 
it nierely restricts the general notion to a particular sense ; the thing 
spoken of being, not the substantive itself, but the substantive so limited. 

! Or ὡς, which is used (though less frequently) in the same way. 

m In connection with future time, the Greeks and Romans marked 
the futurity of the condition or connected notion. We generally do 
not. Thus in the example we should say, ‘a man who is not present,’ 
taking that asa general notion, without referring it to the time of the 
other verb. The future must be used when it is necessary to mark this 
out ; but to use it always, as some writers do, who plume themselves 
upon their accuracy, is against the idiom of our language ; of which 
any one may convince himself by examining a few consecutive pages 
et the English Bible. 

5 Translated by ‘God forbid !’ in the English Bible. 


μή WITH RELATIVES, Wc. 


299. VocasuLaRy 50. 


One who has slain a man 
with his own hand, the 
actual murderer, 

Wrong, wicked, impious, 

Security, safety from dan- 
ser, 

Safe. 

To be in safety, to be safe, 

Voluntarily, 

Lazy, idle, 


αὐτόχειρ, ρος, ὃ et ἣ (One ter: 
min.) 


ἀνόσιος, og, ov. (See 293*.) 


> , « 
ἀσφάλεια, ας, ἥ. 


» , , , 

KOPAANS, ἧς, ἐς. 

ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ εἶναι. 
ἐθελοντής," οὔ, ὁ. 

ἀργός, Os, ov (from a, ἔργον) 


PREPOSITION παρᾶ. 


Governs genit., dative, and accus. 
Signification: with genit. from, after such verbs as fo 
receive, learn, bring, come ; and with the agent after 


the passive verb. 


With the accus., to, and (in answer to where?)at. παρά 
with the acc. has also the meaning of the Latin pre- 
ter ; besides, beyond, against. 

With the dative, beside, along side of, by, among &c. 
as ἔστη παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ, “he stood in the king’s pres- 
ence : παρ᾽ ἐμοί, “in my opinion” (meo judicio.) 


Besides his bread, 

Beyond, more than the 
others, 

Against the laws of the 
gods, 

Contrary to or beyond 
what was expected, 


‘4 4 ” 
παρὰ TOY ἄρτον. 


‘ 4 a 
παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους. 
~ ~ , 
παρὰ τοὺς τῶν ϑεῶν ϑεσμούς. 


παρὰ δόξαν. 


PHRASES. 


I hada narrow escape from 
death, 
[ had a narrow escape, 


4 ‘ Ύ > 
παρά μικρὸν ἤλϑον ἀπο: 
ϑανεῖν. 
2. 2 , , 
παρ ohiyor διέφυγον. 


© Properly, as a volunteer. 


SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &c. 


Exercise 57. 


300. fle who (p) does not love his father, is impious 
I fear it may be impious not to honour old men. No one 
who is not present (298. c), shall receive money. I en- 
treat you not to stay. The sons of the Persians of the 
present day'' pursue what is dishonorable. He who 
( p) does not trust God, has become miserable, un- 
known to himself."* Wot to love one’s own children is 
wicked. It is not possible for me to give you what I do 
not possess myself. He is too wise®® not to know that. 
Not to do good to your friends, when (p) you can, is 
wicked. Pursue those things which are not (p) against 
the laws of the gods. He said that, if there was any oc- 
casion, he would labour*’ more than the rest. Know 
that I will incur’é this danger with you(pl.) Besides 
his bread he has wine. I amconscious’® of having had 
4 narrow escape from death. He was very lazy, so as 
to undergo no labour voluntarily. He was very lazy 
so that he underwent no labour, at least willingly. 
Ihada narrow escape from those who were pursuing 
me. ‘These things happened contrary to what was ex. 
pected. If we conquer the barbarians in‘? one more 
battie, we shall be in safety. I have received this wine 
from the faithful slave. They denied that they were 
(293. e) the actual murderers. I suspect? that this is 
impious. He went away, because ( Pp) he suspectea 


§ 51. Some Adverbs of Time, ὅ 6. 


301. a) Some adverbs govern a noun in the same 
ase as the adjectives from which they are derived. 


P ὑποπτεύω is followed by acc. and injin., or (when it implies fear 


vy Pi. ὑποπτεύσας μή τι πρὸ τὰς τὼ 
fs ! ς τῆς πόλ ͵ 
ii. 1,52} f ἧς πόλεως ὑπαίτιον εἴη, &e. (Xen. Ap 


SOME ADVERBS OF TIME, &c. 137 


302. 1) Hence comparatives and superlatives take 
the genitive. 2) Some particles are sometimes simply 
adverbs, and sometimes prepositions governing a case: 
6. g. ἅμα ὁμοῦ, together :--- ἅμα, (or ὁμοῦ) τοῖς ἄλλοις. 

903. δ) ὡς, as a preposition (= πρός); 15 only joined to 
persons. 

304. Some adverbs, especially relative ones, refer to 
verbs and whole clauses, and thus connect propositions 
This is the origin of conjunctions. 

305. d) ἄχρι or μέχρι, ἕως « and ἔστε, both in the sense 
of ‘until, and in that of ‘as long as, govern the subj. 
or opt. when there is any wncertainty ; the indic. when 
not. 

306. 1) Of course the opt. will appear without ἄν 
in oratione obliqua, even where there is no uncertainty. 
2) Hence, when a thing is spoken of as an object or 
purpose contemplated, the subj. with ἄν" will be used 
inconnection with pres. or future time; the optative,* in 
connection with past time and the oratio obliqua. 

307. 6) πρίν, as being a comparative, takes 7 (which 
however is often omitted), and generally the infinitive, 
but the subj. with ἄν, if the event is future. 


Hence the subj. with ἄν will be used after the imperative and fu- 
ture with negatives: i. e. when before = till. 


308. a) ἀξίως ἡμῶν πολεμήσομεν, we will conduct 
the war in a manner worthy of ourselves. 
b\ εἰσῆλϑεν ὡς ἐμέ, he came in to me. 


4 μέχρις οὗ is often found: So ἕως ot, &c. 

® With πρίν and ἡνίκα, and (in poetry) with μέχρι, ἄχρι, ἕως, the 
subj. is sometimes found without ἄν. (K.) 

* And according to Hermann (against Elmsley) with ἄν. “ Ubi in 
recta oratione πρὶν ἄν et similes particule conjunctivum requirunt, in 
oratione obliqua manet ἄν, sed conjunctivo substituitur optativus ut pro- 
prius orationis oblique modus.” (Preef. ad Trach. p. 8.)—Hartung says: 
“ When the optative thus takes (in oblique narration) the place of the 
subjunctive (in direct), the particle ἄν may, whenever one pleases, be 
left at his old post.” (Partikellehre, ii. 304.)\—Poppo, however, rejects 
ἄν from Xen. An. vii. 7,35. ἐδέοντο μὴ ἀπελθεῖν πρίν ἂν ἀπαγάγοι τὸ orpa- 
ευμα (which in direct narration would be, μὴ ἀπέλθῃς πρὶν ἂν draydyyt 

. «+ ),@ passage queted by Hartung. 


SOME ADVERBS of TIME, &c. 


6) παρέσομαι ὁπότε κελεύσεις, I will be with you 
whenever you bid me. 
a) περιμενῶ ἕως ὧν (or μέχρις ἂν) ἐλ ϑ 7, 1 will 
wait till he comes (venerit). 
ποίησον τοῦτο ἕως ἔτι ἔξεστι, do this whilst 
you still may. 


ἔστε (μὲν) αἱ σπονδαὶ ἤ » 
ἡμᾶς οἰκτείρων, as long as the treaty lasted, 
I'never ceased to think upon ourselves 
with pity. 
οὔποτε λήγουσιν ioe ἃ γ» ἄρχωσιν αὐτῶν, ther 
never leave off till they rule over them. 
6) πρὶν ἢ ἐλϑεὶῖν ἐμέ (OF πρὶν ἔλϑεῖν ust before J 
came. πρὶν av ἔλϑω, till J come (= till ] 
shall have come; venero). 


309. VocaBuLary 51. 
Near, 


ἐγγύς. 
Near the city, ἐγγὺς τῆς πόλεως. 
Apart, χωρίς. 
Apart from, or without the χωρὶς τῶν 
rest, τινὅς). 
Immediately, directly, εὐθύς. 
Directly or Straight to the .., . 
city évdy ® τὴς πόλεως, 
᾽ 
Immediately on his arrival, εὐϑὺς ἤχων. 
From our very birth, as_, 


Soon as We are born, EVV US γενόμενοι. 
Most of all, 


μάλιστα πάντων. 
Except a very few, πλὴν πάγυ ὀλίγων. 
Except if, πλὴν εἰ, 
Out of, without the city, ἔξω τῆς πόλεως. 


” , 
σαν, οὕποτε ἐπαυόμη 


ἄλλων (80 διχα 


Exercise 58. 
210. Do not 80 away till I come. 


-........ 


I will not cease 


clause has often πρόσθεν in it 
" εὐθύς and εὐθὺ 


but the Atti 
dentally, 


139 
ON INTERROGArcIVE SENTENCES. 


i ible for 
fighting till I have conquered you. 2 . cap hp er 
you to conquer your enemies out 0 Ἄς a κὐ sr alee 
have chastised those in the city itse ae eid 
before I came. I was banished myse — fp estes 
turned-from-banishment. Whilst you τως - ἜΝ oto 
speak. We were afraid, till (μέχρις) t τ ey χκος το 
away. ‘hey did not cease till (before) ν ἐδ iS cae 
boy’s father. We used to wait about : i ny riots 
were opened. I will not go away till (bef bay 
conquered you. He said, that he = ᾷ “eis Pi 
whilst he still might. Do not cease, till yo Bets ae 
tered yourtemper. Whilst you remain, = seg Ou 
disorder. He said that he feared the go she περ ss 
ever he was most —— pat Ave ἢ καὶ δε, i 

ieral went in to the king. aa 
lamp pinto ip hes 
hing. He said tha ν 
They march straight to the city. ee 
arrival, he told me that we ought to — Bag days 
From our very birth we want many things. 
soon as he was born. 


. 9, 
§ 52. On Interrogative Sentence 


; δὰ 
311. Besides the interrogative ssbb = pronouns, 
following particles are used in questions. 
Meth ae Oe s that imply somes 
312. aga is mostly used in question: 
| . 6. 
thing of uncertainty, doubt, or os. ὡς 
313. The answer ‘ Yes’ is expec ed by;—_ 
dd eb; ἦ γάρ; οὐ; οὔκουν; ἄλλο τιῆ; 
ag οὐ; j οὖ; ot - 
314. The answer ‘ No’ is expected by, ὑπ Ae 
dow μή; ἦ που (num forte?) μή or por, 


oe i is sometimes 
ν Fs πειδὸ μὴ ow: but the etymology being no ΤΙ 2 
pov= wv > Ὁ : ne ; cr 
i i a N53 an pov ov; he atter requ Γ ng an assent 
used with it. Also pov p d 
my wnswer (==nonne 7) 


ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


Oss οὐ expects yes; μή, no.—od is often followed by pévroc: alan 
by δῆ, δή που, with which it has an ironical force, I imagine, forsooth, 
Adso οὔτι που. 

315. h. i) εἶτα, ἔπειτα (then—and yet—and neverthe- 
less) express astonishment and displeasure, implying 
that what they suppose has been done, is inconsistent 
with something before mentioted. 

316. 1) From-the frequent use of ἄλλο τι #, it came to 
be used as a simple interogative particle, and the ἥ 
was often ἀγορί." It is then better to write it as one 
word, ἄλλοτι (K.) 

317. εἰ παϑών ; (having suffered what? = ) what pos 

sesses you to... &e.? 
ti μαϑών ; (having learnt what? =what in 
duces you to... &c.' 


These phrases are used in indignant, reproachful questions: the 
former obviously relates to the feelings; the latter to the under 
standing, and consequently to more deliberate offences. 


318. a) ag εὐτυχεῖς ; are you prosperous ? 
ἀρ οὐκ ἔστιν ἀσϑενῆς ; ts not he ill ? 
dor an ndinw” [Yes.] 
he is ill, isn’t he? 
b) 7 a. 3 ’ . . ? 
ἄρα μὴ ἔστιν ἀσϑενής ; is he ill: N 
; 77 Σ 2 [1 0. 
he is not ill, is he ‘ 

6) ἦ mov τετόλμηκας ταῦτα ; you have not surely 
dared todo this? [No.] 

d) ἦ γὰρ, ἐάν τι ἐρωτᾷ σε Σωκράτης, ἀποκρινεῖ; if 
Socrates puts any question to you, you 
will answer him, will you not ? [Yes.] 

6) οὔτι mov ἐγὼ ἀγροικίζομαι ; surely Iam not 
behaving rudely am I? [No.] 

J) μῶν τί σε ἀδικεῖ; he has not injured you in 
any respect has he? [No.] 
&) μή τι νεώτερον" ἀγγέλλεις ; you bring no bad 
news I hope, do you? [No.] 
* Stallbaum thinks it was dropt in animated, impassioned ques- 
iions, and retained in those of a more sedate and sober character. 
_ ¥ The present of this word is used for the perfect, for a man con- 
f¢nues to wrong us till he has made us reparation. (Heindorf, Protag. 


463.) 


* νεώτερον for νέον (a new thing; news), and that per euphemismum 
Gr κακόν. (Heind. Prot. 461.) 


ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 14] 


h) εἶτ ἐσίγας Πλοῦτος ὦν; and did you then 
hold your tongue, you Plutus ? 

i) ἔπειτ οὐκ οἴει ϑεοὺς ἀνθρώπων τι φροντίζειν ; 
do you then really not think that the 
gods regard mankind ’ : 

k) ἄλλο τι ἣ περὶ πλείστου ποιῇ, ὅπως ὡς βέλτιστοι 
οἱ νεώτεροι ἔσονται ; do not you look upon 
it as a thing of extreme importance, 
that the rising generation should turn 
out as well as possible? 

ἄλλοτι οὖν οἵγε φιλοκερδεῖς φιλοῦσι τὸ κέρδος, 
what! do not the covetous love gain ? 


319. VocaBuLaRy 52, 
To strike, τύπτω. 
Free, ἐλευϑερος, α, ov. 
Weak, ill, ἀσϑενής, ἧς, ἐς (a, σϑένος, 
strength). 
Weakness, infirmity, a 
complaint, ere 
Fond of gain, φιλοκερδής, ἧς, ἕς. 


ἀσϑένεια, ας, ἧ. 


PREPOSITION πρός. 


Governs genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification: to, close by ; in answer to whither? πρός 
generally takes the accus.: in answer to where? the 
dative. 

With ace. πρός also means towards, against, in refer- 
ence to, with a view to, in comparison of. 

With genit. πρός means from, by (after to hear, to be 
praised or blamed by, and frequently after the pas- 
sive verb). 

It is also used with genit. of situation and in adjura- 
tions. 


[I am wholly wrapt up in 
this, 

To pay close attention to 
one’s affairs, ager 

In addition to this, πρὸς τούτοις. 


4 , ¢ PN 
πρὸς TOUTYH ολος εἰμι. 


πρὸς τοῖς πράγμασι γίγνεσϑαι 


142 ON INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


To fight against a person, πρός τινα. 

To calculate with one- λογίζεσϑαι πρὸς ἑαυτόν (80 
self, with σκέπτεσϑαι, σκοπεῖν, 

to consider), 

ΤῸ be dishonoured by, ἀτιμάζεσϑαι πρὸς τινος 

On the father’s side, πρὸς πατρός. 

1) “ΤῸ be consistent with, 
like, characteristic of; 2) 
to be on his side; 3) to 
make for him, to be for 
his interest ; to bea good 
thing for him. 


/ 
εἶναι πρός twos. 


Exercise 59. 


320. Are not these things for our interest rather than 
for that of our enemies (318.)? Is not he wholly wrapt 
up in these things? You do not surely wish to have 
wine in addition to your bread (318. c)? Idonot surely 
act insolently do I (318. e)? Youare not come to bring us 
(p) any bad news, I hope (are you) ? ee Andare you, 
then, not without fear of death, thoug (p) a pious man 
(318. h)? And do you, then, not think that you shall 
be punished for what you have done ( p. pass.) against 
the laws of the gods? What possesses you to strike* 
a freeman? What induces you not to choose to stay 
with us any longer? What possesses you, that you 
will not cease to behave-insolently’* towards your 
friends? Thesethings are not more Sor the interest of 
our enemies than of us, are they? [No.] Have you 
been in any respect dishonoured by Xenoclides? Do 
you not think it a most important thing, that your child- 
ren should be brought up as well as possible (318. &)? 
It is not like a pious man to fear death excessively. 
The other party are more on Cyrus’s side. Know that 
these things are” for the interest of Cyrus. Iknowthat 
he is on the side of the Athenians. De we not both see 
and hear from our very birth 2% 


* Translate as if it were, ‘ having suffered what do you strike?’ &c 


SL A A Re, Sa 


INDIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 


ᾧ 53. Indirect single Questions. 


321. a) The proper forms for indirect questions are 
those pronouns and adverbs which are formed from the 
direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 
o—, which gives them a connecting power. 


Thus from πόσος ; ποῖος ; ποῦ ; πόθεν; πῶς 3 &c. are formed ὁπόσος, 
ὁποῖος, ὅπου, ὁπόθεν, ὅπως, ἄχα. 

So ὅστις, formed by prefixing the relative to τίς, is the proper de 
pendent interrogative. See 72, note y. 


322. But as the Greeks often pass from oblique to 
direct narration, so they often use the simple interroga- 
tives in dependent questions; and even, as in (b), inter- 
mix the two. 7 

323. c) Occasionally, though very seldom, the rela- 
tive forms themselves are used in dependent questions. 


c) When, as in this example, a pronoun or noun is the accus. 
after the first verb, and the nom, before the second, it is generally 
expressed in the accus.,» and not in the nominative. 


324. d) When the person of whom the question is 
asked repeats it, he uses the forms beginning with 6 —. 


325. a) οὐκ οἶδα (or οὐκ ἔχω) ὅποι τράπωμαι. (See 72. b). 
οὐκ οἶδα ὅστις ἐστί, I don’t know who he 
is. οὐκ οἶδα ὅπως τὸ πρᾶγμα ἔπραξεν, J 
don’t know how he did the thing. ἀπό. 
κρίναι ἀνδρείως ὁπότερα σοι φαίνεται, an- 
swer boldly which of the two is your 
opinion. 
δ) ἴσμεν" πόσα τέ ἐστι καὶ ὁ ποῖα, we know both 
how many they are, and of what kind. 
C) ὁρᾷς οὖν ἡμᾶς, ἔφη, ὅσοι ἐσμέν; do you see, 
said he, how many we are? (or how 
many there are of us ?) 


> The accusative is generally retained in the English Bibe ; “} 
know thee, who thou art,” &c. 
* See 71. c. 


INDIRECT SINGLE QUESTIONS. 


d) οὗτος," τί ποιεῖς ;--- τι ποιῶ ; you there, what 
are you doing ?—avhat am I doing ? 


326. VocABULARY 53. 


PREPOSITION ὑπό. 


Governs genit., dative, and accus. 

Signification: with genit., by, after passive verbs and 
active verbs with a passive notion. Also, to express 
ἃ cause ; from, out of, through. 

With dat., under, after verbs of rest only: sometimes. 
instead of the gen., after passive verbs (δαμῆναι ὑπό 
τινι). 


With accus., under, after verbs of rest as well as verbs 
of motion. Also, about, of time. 


To die by the hands of, ἀποϑανεῖν ὑπὸ (gen). 

To learn by compulsion, ix ἀνάγκης. 

He did it through or from 
fear, 

To be mad from intoxica- .. , , 
Gon. ὑπὸ μέϑης waiver Pat. 


At or about nightfall, 


ὑπὸ δέους (δέος, ove, τό). 


ὑπὸ νύχτα (sub noctem). 


Exercise 60. 


“ 327. The slave died by the hands of his master. 
Most boys learn by compulsion. I perceived ( p) that 
the boy learnt by compulsion. I do not repent of hav- 
ing learnt” these things by compulsion. He said that 
the shameless flatterer was mad from intoxication. 
The few are wounded by the many. I willgo away on 
condition that (269. 6) you will yourselves set out at 
nightfall. Do you see, said he, how many men are 
wounded by a few? I don’t know how the eagle had 
his eye knocked out.‘' I shall praise (all) whom I see 
(94. 1) marching in good order. How much would your 
possessions fetch, if they were sold? He says that he 


4 οὗτος, αὕτη, are used (instead of voc.) in exclamations ; you there ! 


DOUBLE QUESTIONS. 145 


will hold his tongue though he should have *' much to 
say. Ifthe slave should die by your hands, you will be 
punished. Do you see how many there are of the ene- 
my? He says that he has been entrusted with these 
things.‘ These things happened about the same time. 


ᾧ 54. Double Questions. 


328. Direct double questions are asked by πύτερον» 
‘or πότερα)---ἦ, less commonly by ega—z. 
Rem. μῶν---ἤ is still less common: ἤ---ἤ belongs to poetry, espe- 
cially epic poetry. ἥ 
329. Indirect double questions are asked by eize— 
εἴτε : εἰ---ἴ : «εότερον---ἤ. 
Rem. ἤ---ῆ belongs to epic poetry, though occasionally found in 
Attic poets. elre—ii, and ei—cire, are also used by poets. 
330. a) πότερον ἕψονται Κύρῳ, ἢ οὔ; will they follow 
Cyrus or not? ; Ξ ἘΠ 
πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι... πότερον ἕψονται Κύρῳ, ἢ 
οὔ, before it was known, whether, ἄς. 
b)-covrp τὸν νοῦν πρόσεχε, εἰ δίκαια λέγω, ἢ μή, 
attend to this, whether what I speak is 
just or not. I rae ᾿ : 
C) σκοπῶμεν εἴτε εἰκὸς οὕτως ἔχειν, 8678 μή, let us 
consider whether it is likely to be so, or 
not. 


331. VocaBuLaRy δά. 


‘The road home, ἡ οἴκαδε" ὁδός 

To suffer a thing to be ; 
done, to allow it to be segrpao.‘ 
done with impunity. 


4 οἴκαδε is from the ace. of a shorter form (such as otf, oixés) of οἶκος. 
Tnough this form does not occur, several similar ones do; 6. g. ἀλκί, 
όκα, for ἀλκῇ, κρόκην. (B.) ; se 
Kp γὼ It talice' Ge infinitive if the thing is to be prevented 3 the aa 
ple if itis to be avenged. Of course (by 73, note τὴ) περιϊδεῖν will be use 
for aor., περιόψεσθαι for fut-—The phrase brings to one’s mind our ‘ te 


146 OBSERVATIONS ON δἰ, ἐάν. 


Boldly, ϑαῤῥῶν (participle). 

Restore an exile, κατάγω. 

To pay attention to, to at- τὸν γοῦν προσέχειν, or 70038 
tend to, yew Only, with dat. 

Likely, natural, εἰκός." 


Exercise 61. 


332. I don’t know whether he is alive or dead. If 
you attend to your affairs yourselves, all will be well. 
If you attended to your affairs yourselves, all would he 
well. If you had attended to your affairs yourselves, 
all would be well. I will not allow our land to have 
been ravaged with impunity. Are the same dogs pur- 
suing the sheep, or not? Go away boldly on condition 
of holding your tongue. 

I fear that we shall forget our road home. I knew 
that they would not suffer’ their country to be ravaged. 
O citizens, let us not suffer our country to be ravaged. 
They will not stand by and see us injured. ‘They 
made peace on condition that both (parties) should re- 
tain (have) their own. He said that Xenoclides was 
too wise®* to be deceived by his slaves. He says that 
more arms were taken than could have been expected 
Srom the number of the dead5* He says that he"? is 
not afraid of death. The king sent persons to restore 
(the exile) Xenoclides (238, third example). 


§ 55. Observations on si, ἐάν. 


333. a) εἰ is used for oz (that, after ϑαυμάζω, and 
some other verbs expressive »f feelings. 


stand by and see’ (a man injured) ; but it gets its meaning in a different 
way; 2. 6. not from the notion of seeing and yet not acting, but from 
tnat of not seeing, of looking round about an object instead of at «εἴ. 
Hence it agrees more nearly with our to overlook (an offence). 

© Neut. of εἰκώς, part. of ἔοικα (am like), which has three forms o 
Part, ἐοικώς, εἰκώς, οἰκώς. (B.) 


OBSERVATIONS ΟΝ εἰ, ἐάν. 147 


This arises from the Attic habit of avoiding positiveness in speak 
ing; which, in this case, speaks of what may be quite certain as 
only probable. ὡ 


994, b) εἰ is (as we have seen, 80) used for ‘ whether -" 
it has this meaning after verbs of seeing, knowing, con- 
sidering, asking, saying, trying, &c. 

335. ἐάν is also used in this way with the subjunctive 
when the question relates to an expected case that re- 
mains to be proved. (K.) 


a“ 


336. a) ἀγανακτῶ εἰ οὑτωσὶ" ἃ νοῶ μὴ οἷός τ εἰμὶ 
εἰπεῖν, Tam indignant at being so unable 
to express my meaning. 

οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἶ μὴ δίκην ἔδωκεν, he is not con- 
tented with not having been punished. 
ϑαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν ὀργίζεται, Iam as- 
tonished, that not one amongst you is 
angry. 
δ) σκέψαι! εἰ ὁ Ἑλλήνων νόμος κάλλιον ἔχει, con- 
sider whether the Grecian law is better. 
σκέψαι ἐὰν τόδε σοὶ μᾶλλον ἀρέσκῃ, see 
whether this pleases you better. 
μηδὲ τοῦτο ἄῤῥητον ἔστω μοι, ἐών σέ πως πείσω, 
nor let me leave this unsaid, if Imay by 
any means persuade you (i. e. that I 
may see whether) 1 can, &c. 


337. VocaABULARY 55. 


Am indignant, ἀγανακτέω (dative; but it 
takes the accus. of a neut. 
pron.) 

O Athenians, ὦ ἄνδρες A Onvaior. 

Please, ἀρέσκω * (dat.) 


* Demonstrative pronouns and adverbs are strengthened by what ig 
called the { demonstrativum, which is a long accented ε answering te 
~ce in Lat. Short vowels are thrown away before it. οὑτοσί (this man 
kere), οὑτηΐ, τουτί, &c. So οὑτωσί. 

i The Attics use σκοπῶ, cxotodpat, for present (not σκέπτομαι), but oxé 
Ψ pat, ἐσκειψάμην, and ἔσκεμμαι, from σκέπτομαι, depon. middle. 

ἀρέσκω, ἀρέσω, &c perf. pass. ἤρεσμαι! ἡρέσθῃν. 


CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 


Exercise 62. 


338. It is this very thing, O Athenians, that IT am in- 
dignant at,! that you allow half your country (58) to 
have been rav aged with impunity. Thisitis that lam 
indignant at. Cyrus being indignant, sets out with 
(part.) five horsemen for Sardis. He pleases more men 
than any other single person.** He says that he is of a 
mild disposition (137. a). I asked him whether the 
king was of a mild disposition or not. Do you see how 
many are suffering the same as you (182. a)? Doyou 
know of what kind the laws of the Persians are (323) ? 
You there, what do you say?—What doIsay! Al- 
though, if any man is of a mild disposition, it is he.** 
I wonder that you are not able to go in without being 
observed.”* He says that he is not of a character to do 
any thing whatever for the sake of gain (283). 


ᾧ ὅθ. Condensed Questions. 


339. a. ὃ. c) By attaching the interrogative to a par- 
ticiple, or using it in an oblique case, the Greeks employ 
a single sentence in questions where we must use two. 


Rem. Thus in translating from English into Greek, a relative 
clause attached to an interrogative one will be got rid of. 

340. a) τί ἂν ποιοῦντες ἀναλάβοιεν τὴν ἀρχαίαν ἀρετήν; 
what must they do to recover their an- 
cient virtue? (or, by what conduct can 
they, &c.?) 

b) καταμεμάϑηχας οὖν τοὺς τι ποιοῦντας τὸ 
ὄνομα τοῦτο ἀποκαλοῦσιν ; (have you learnt 
=) do you know, then, what those persons 
do, to whom men apply this name? 


! Iam indignant at this thing itself. 


CONDENSED QUESTIONS. 149 


δ) εἰνας tovcd ὁρῶ ξένους ; who are these 
strangers whom I behold? 


341. VocasBuLary 56. 


With what object in view, τί i βουλόμενος; 
By Jupiter, vi, Δία, or νὴ τὸν ™ Δία. 
No, by Jupiter, μὰ Δία. 
Apollo, ᾿Απόλλων," νος, 6 
Neptune, Ποσειδῶν, ὥνος, ὁ. 
Minerva, ᾿Α'ϑηνᾶ, ἃς, 7. 
Swallow, χελιδών," ὄνος, ἡ 
Nightingale, ἀηδών,» ὄνος (ovs), ἧ. 
Spring, ἔαρ," ἔαρος, TO. 

nce, ἅπαξ. 
Bring, lead, ἄγω. 
To burn out, ἐχκκαίω. 
Peacock, ταύώς, ὦ, 0. 


Exercise 63. 


342. One swaliow does not make a spring. He tolo 
me that one swallow did not make a spring. I asked 
by what conduct I should please the gods. The eagle 
is having its eyes burnt out.‘! He says that the eagle 
has had its eyes burnt out. With whdt view did the 
other party march into the country of the Scythians che 
same spring? ‘The peacock lays only once a year. He 
(p) who commits no injury,’ requires no law. By 
ΝΑ I will be with you, iff am wanted. By Minerva, 
I will free the boy from his disorder. Who is this-phy 
sician that you are bringing (340.c)? Will you not go 
away at once ?—No, by Jupiter, not I (ἔγωγε). Even if 


= The art. is generally used except in μὴ or μὰ Δία. 
® ᾿Απύλλων and Ποσειδῶν have acc. ᾿ Ἀπόλλω, Ποσειδῶ, voc. ”"Anods.v, 

Πόσειδον. 

9 χελιδών. V. χελιδοῖ. 

P ἀηδών, has also G. ἀηδοῦς, ΥΨ. Δηδοῖ. 

4 In prose tap is nom. in use ; but the gen. and dat. are of the con< 
tracted form, ἦρος, ppt. 

* Who injures not at all. 


150 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 


you should be unseen by others, you will at least be con 
scious”* yourself of having acted unjustly. What do those 
sons do with whom all men, so to speak,‘* are angry 
(340.6)? He envies every body.** By Neptune, there 
is nobody he does not plot against (277). Envy nobody. 
The nightingale sings most beautifully. 


§ 57. Various Constructions. 


343. a) 7 μήν is a solemn form of asseveration. 

344. b) The prepos. σύν is omitted before αὐτῷ, αὐτῇ, 
&c. which then =fogether with, with. 

345. c) ἀμφότερον is used adver bially (or elliptically) 
by the poets’ both; as well—as, &c. So ἀμφότερα is 
used in reference to two words, without being made to 
conform to them in case. 

346. ὦ) When καί refers to ἄλλος, it has the force of 
especially, in particular. 

347. 6) ἔρχεσϑαι, ἰέναι, With. part. fut., is to be going 
to, or on the point of. 

348. f. 2) Sometimes ἔχω makes an emphatic circum- 
locution with the past particip.: and with some verbs 
(e.g. the 2nd pers. of ληρεῖν, παίζειν, φλυᾶρεῖν) it is used to 
make a good-humoured observation. 

349. h) φέρων appears redundant in some expressions, 


but denotes a vehemence of purpose not altogether free 
from blame. 


Hence it answers to our fo go and do a (foolish, impetuous) thing ; 

to take a thing and fling it away, &c. 
350. a) 7 μὴν ἔπαϑον τοῦτο, I protest that I suffered 
this. ὄμνυμι" ἦ μὴν δώσεῖν, I swear that I 
will assuredly give (or, solemnly swear 
that I will give) 


δια Cet ceo ee ee 


4 ὄμνυμι, dpodpat, ὁμώμοκα. ὥὦμοσα. Perf. pass. ὁμώμοσμαι, but the othes 
persons and aor. 1. pass. more commonly without the σ. 


VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 151 


b) ἀπώλοντο αἱ νῆες αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν, the ships 
were lost together with their crews. ὁ 

6) διαφέροντες ἢ σοφίᾳ ἢ κάλλει ἢ ἀμφότερα, dis- 
tinguished either for wisdom or beauty, 
or both. FDTD 

d) τά τε ἄλλα εὐδαιμονεῖ καὶ παῖδας ἔχει κατη: 
χκόους αὑτῷ, he is happy both in other re- 
spects and especially in having obedient 
children. 

e) ὅπερ ἦα ' ἐρῶν, what I was going 10 say. 

Ὁ πάλαι ϑαυμάσας ἔχω, 1 have long been 
wondering. oe 

g) παίζεις " ἔχων, you are joking. ; 

h) ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρ ov Θηβαίοις, he went an 
flung himself into the hands of the The- 
bans. 


251. VocaABULARY 5/7. 


a” 
To swear, ὄμνυμι (acc. of the god or 
thing sworn by). 


t σ 
Just as he was ἧπερ ΟΥ̓ ὥσπερ εἶχεν. 


Exercise 64. 


959. The damsel is beautiful in person (137) in other 
respects, and especially has very beautiful eyes.'* He 
swore that he would assuredly give them three talents 
‘fhe had them. I swear that I will assuredly do this. 
1 swear by all the gods that I will assuredly confer a 
creat benefit upon the state. Those with the king, with 
(p) their heads uncovered, charged the ranks of the 
Cireeks. He told me that the ships were lost, together 
with their crews. He told me that, but for®* the gener- 
al the ships would have been lost, together with their 
erews. Are you not trying (me)," whether I am mad 


t Imperf. of εἶμι, tbo. 
" παίζω, παίξομαιγ -odpat, πέπαισμαι. ἔπαισα- Later writers have ἔπαιξα͵ 


κέπαιγμαι. (B.) 
y capteie takes gen., seldom acc. (Thue. i. 71.) 


Sr es ee 


ag τ υνῦς Ἀν, 


Oath = ero 


152 VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 


325. c)? You are not trying (me) whether 

you? Is he distinguished tom's other ss oe ὅταν 
=~ or (his) temperance, or both (350. cy? Are you 
jol ing; or are you mad? Cyris set out just as he was 
with five horsemen, He went and gave (350. h) all his 
possessions to his neighbour. Ihave long been wonde 
ing at the shamelessness of this flatterer (350. J). ; 


Pr . . 
§ 3. Various Constructions continued. 


353. a) With δι ” 
“hia ixaog, ἄξιος, &c., the ver s 
struction is preferred to the impersonal. vee oe 


354. δ) ὅσον is used ellipti 
elliptically with the infiniti 
weve. 
355. c) Some words that imply a ria (6. g. 
φϑάνειν, διαφέρειν, ἐναντίος, διπλάσιος, ἴδιος, 
ἜΝ πρίν) often take the construction 
, i. 
Pg e) The verb ποιεῖν is often admitted after οὐδὲν 
4 357 fh rye τι — ; τί ἄλλο n—; &e. 
: person’s quoted words, when qu 
t .- 
actly as he uttered them, are introduced by ay ae 


Rem. idi 
BE raps ae be — idiom differs from our own: we omit ‘ that! 
8 words are quoted exactly, and insert it when not 


357*, δ) After εἰ οὐ».-.... . (3 : 
pears to be used for the snes τἂν 


Ὑ Does he differ from. . . ?) 


* When the ἄλλο isspelt wi : 
’ t with an apost in thi 
-. pe postrophusin this phras 
py _ po τς thus looks like the abbreviated ἀλλά, με. ᾿ The πε 
aie wh —— im some very similar phrases the ἀλλ᾽ is ἀλλά: 
it is difficult to say whether it stands for ἄλλο or ἀλλά. 


Wherever it certai 
ainly sta » : "2 
364, note a.) y stands for ἄλλο, it should retain its accent. (See 


‘Weiske.) 


VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS. 153 


ἐμὲ τοῦτο πράττειν), it is just (or rig hi) 
that I should do this. 

b) ἔφϑασε τοσοῦτον ὅσον Πάχητα ἀνεγνωχέναι τὸ 
ψήφισμα, it arrived first (indeed), but 
only sufficiently so, for Paches to have 
had time to read out the decree. 

c) φϑάνεις ἕλκων ἢ τὰ πτηνὰ φεύγειν, YOU draw 
(your nets) before the birds fly away. 

οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοι ἀποϑνήσκων," he will cer- 
tainly die (or, be killed). 

6) τί ἄλλο οὗτοι ἢ ἐπεβούλευσαν ; what did these 
people do but plot? 

f) ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι βασιλείαν οὐκ ἂν δεξαίμην, he 
answered, “1 would not receive a king 
dom.” 

g) τί οὐκ ἐποιήσαμεν ; (why have not we don 
it? =) why don’t we do it? Let us du 
it directly ? 

359. VocaBuLaRy 58. 


Give orders, order, ἐπιτάττω. 
Ϊ pr / ve been , ’ ω 
Would probably ha eb ἐχινδύνευσεν ἂν διαφϑαρῆνσ.. 
destroyed, 


Τὸ be the slave of, δουλεύω. 


Exercise 65. 


360. But for Xenoclides, the whole country would 
probably have been ravaged. Buti ts just that every 
man should defend the laws of his country. You do 
nothing but give orders. He answered, I should be a 
fool if (p) I were todo this. He answered, I will give 
you a portion of the food which I have myself. He 
went away before his friend arrived. It is right that 


every body should oblige such a man as you are. He 
answered, I have done more service to the state than 


s That is, he cannot die to soon (for die he must). 
a differcnt explanation. 


Buttmann gives 


7 


ese, | 
πος 


ee ae σὸς τον 


ΤΟΣ, ἐμάς. δον, καρ δα ἀλη δοδ πᾶνε σε ee eee ae 


‘ 
ΠῚ 
é 
Pi 
{ 
5 
ῃ, 
᾿ 
Η 


το τὸν συ π΄ ὁ πα ον αν τ 


ee 
ors 


—— 


2 er τ 


ie oe 


154 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 


any other single person. He answered, [ will 

you if lam wanted. You do nothing but harap 
the citizens. What do you do but hold all men cheap ? 
He answered, I will collect as many men as I possibly 
can. He answered, I will come to you as quickly as 
possible, to (p) combat the faithful slave’s disorder. He 
answered, if any body has done much service to the 
state 1tis you. ‘They arrived first, indeed, by just time 
enough to have destroyed those with the king (358. δ) 
Why don’t you make me also happy ? Why don't you 
answer ? He answered, if Xenoclides had not been 
present, the ships would have perished, together with 
their crews. If(p) yon do this, you will certainly be 
the slave of your temper. If he were not ambitious 
he would not undergo every labour. 


§ 59. List of Particles and short connecting and 
o 
ather Phrases. 


Oss. Those with #» asterisk cannot stand first in a sentence. 


A. 


a ἄγε δή, ‘bus come ;) ‘come now. 
+ ἀεί (Lon. and poet. αἰεί, αἰέν), always. 
ὁ ἄει ἄργων, the archon for the time being : the 
πὸ — nto at any time is archon. . 
- ἄληϑες (accented in this way), ironically. i 2 
ae y), y, indeed : 
364, ἀλλά, but. It is often used to introduce quick, ab- 
rupt retorts, objections, exhortations, &c. ἀλλ ἀδύ- 
LT OP, nay but, it’s impossible’ (or, why, it’s im- 
possible). ἀλλὰ βούλομαι, ‘well, 7 will J? 
ἀλλά is also our ‘but’=‘except? after genera] 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 155 


negatives: some case of ἄλλος generally stands in 
the preceding clause. 

ἀλλ 7,* unless, except ; nisi. 

ἄλλο τι ἤ (or ἄλλοτι) ; used as an interrogative par 
ticle (316). 

ἄλλως τε καί, especially, in particular. 

565. ἅμα, at the same time (as prep. ‘together with, 
dat.) ἅμα followed by καί in the following clause ; 
as soon as (omitting the καί") ‘The two assertions 
are marked out as occurring at the same time ; and 
the particles may be variously translated, according 
to the view with which the coincidence is pointed 
out: no sooner—than ; already—when ; when-- 
at once, &c. 

366. ἀμέλει (properly the imperat. of ἀμελέω, don’t mind 
or be anxious about), as adv. doubtless, certainly. 

367. "ἄν, see 75: for ἐάν, see 77. 

368. ἄνα, up! (for ἀνάστηϑι, rise up !) 

369. ἀνϑ᾽ ὧν, because, for (267). 

370. "ἄρα (ἄρ, ῥά," in Epic poets), therefore, conse- 
quently, then. 

1) It is also used where it seems to be without 
power, but indicates conformity with the na- 
ture of things or with custom; as might 
have been expected ; ex ordine, rite. Hence 
it serves to mark a transition to an expected 


proposition. 


® ἀλλ᾽ ἤ has this meaning after negatives and questions that imply ἃ 
negative. The ἀλλ᾽ might sometimes be supposed ἄλλο, used elliptically ; 
but frequently this is impossible ; and it is better, therefore, to under- 
stand it always to be ἀλλά. (Krager.)\—A case of ἄλλος often stands 
already in the sentence. The construction probably arose from two 
nearly equivalent forms: οὐδὲν ἄλλο---ἀλλά, and οὐδὲν ἄλλο----ἤ. (K.) 

be. g. ἅμα ἀκηκόαμέν τι καὶ τριηράρχους καθίσταμεν. “Ayais also used 
with the part. like μετάξυ: ἅμα ταῦτ' εἰ πὼν ἀνέστη. 

© When prepositions are used alone as adverbs, and thus become 
equivalent to verbs, they throw back the accent. 

4 The old derivation from”APQ (to fit, trans. and intrans.) seems 
far preferable to Hartung’s derivation from a common root with ἁρπάζω, 


rapio, repente. So Kohner. 
* Enclitic. 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 


2) After εἰ, ἐάν, &c. it has the force of indeed 
or perchance.—ei μὴ ἄρα (nisi forte) has often 
, an ironical meaning; unless, forsooth.* 
371. ἅτε (with part.), as being (242. a). 

372. "αὖ (backwards), again ; 2) on the other hand 
3) further ; and then also. 
373. "αὖτε, αὐτάρ (both Epic), and ἀτάρ, have the same 
meaning as ad. So also the poetical "αὖϑις, Jon. 

_, Hung. (αὐτάρ and ἀτάρ begin a sentence or clause.) 
374, αὐτῶς, thus (emphatical): 2) μὲ erat ; of things in 
their original, unchanged state, or that are of com- 
mon every-day occurrence ; 3) it is attached to 
words expressing reproach, contempt, or neglect, 
6. g. childish, useless, vain, &c. Hence 4)itis used 


alone as equivalent to μάτην, idly, vainly, uselessly. 
It is a sister form of ovrag.s , 


ἐν 
375. "γάρ (γε ἄρα), for. 

It often refers to a short sentence to be mentally 
supplied (such as, 7 believe it ; no wonder. 
&c.) In questions " it answers pretty nearly 
to our ‘then, and implies surprise (= why ? 

what ?) 
tt yap; quid enim? or quidni enim 2 = certainly, 

ty be sure. 


πῶς γάρ; (Att.) is an emphatic denial =by no 
means. 


376. "γέ (a strengthening particle), at least,‘ at all events 
certainly. 


f "Apa, the interrog. particle, stands first in its sentence. “ Attic 
poets, however, allow themselves to interchange the quantity, and use 
dpa for consequently, ἄρα as the interrog. particle; but without alterin 
the proper place of each.” (B.) . 

1 + Hermann, on the other hand, says, that it should always be written 
αὔτως in Homer ; and Hartung thinks Buttmann’s astrange mistake, the 
derivation being from αὐτός, he and no other, self (so that atrusanthids 
and in no other way). He considers that the rough breathing is only a 
dialectic peculiarity. αὔτως Jol., αὕτως Att. (Eustath.) ; 

® Especially after ris; πότε; ras; &c. 

! For which γοῦν is more commonly used. 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 157 


It adds strength and emphasis to the word to 
which it is added, answering the same purpose 
that an elevation of the voice does in speak- 
ing, or italics in a printed passage. It is used 
in rejoinders and answers, either to confirm 
or to restrict; also in exhortations to make 
them more impressive. 

ἔγωγε, I for my ρματί---εἰκότως ye, quite naturally 
---πάνυ γε, quite so, certainly. 

ye δὴ," certainly. 

γέ τοι, yet at least ; at least however ; however. 

yé μήν (certe vero; vero), certainly however ; but 
yet ; hence it is also a strengthened δέ. 


A. 


377. διότι (-- διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι), because: but later writers 
often use it for oz, that. 

378. "δέ (see μέν) has three meanings of and, but, for 
[the last in the old writers only]. + 

379. *37,1a strengthening particle, properly now (for 
which ἤδη is used); itis employed in various ways 
to enliven a speech :— 

ἄγε δή, φέρε δή, come now ! 
τί δή; what then? 

It a.so means truly, forsooth. After relatives it 
has the force of our ‘ever.’ «ὅστις δή, whoever it may 
be, &c. Itoften follows superlatives. 

380. "δήπου (confirms a conjecture proposed. M.): it 15 ἃ 
more emphatical ov (see πού), I imagine or sup- 
pose ; doubtless. 

"δήπουϑεν is used to hint, with a little irony, that 
the contrary is impossible. 


k Interest hoc inter yé δή et γέ τοι, quod δή sententiam per γέ restric- 
tam simpliciter confirmat, τοί autem eam sententiam indicat oppositam 
esse precedentibus quodammodo. Hinc γὲ δή est sane quidem, enim- 
vero; γέ τοι autem certe quidem. (Herm.) 

! It is only in Homer and Pindar that δ ἡ stands at the beginning 
of a proposition or clause. (M.) 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 


"δῆϑεν has also the ironical force of δή, forsooth.(M) 


*d7ra, like δή, is used in assuring and confirming 
(surely, certainly). 


E. 


381. εἰ, if; 2) whether; and 3) after some verbs of 
feeling, that. (See 333.) 


εἰ καί, if even, although. 

καὶ ei, even if, even though. 

εἰ γάρ, O that !—a wish; like εἴϑε. 

εἰ μή, unless. 

εἰ μὴ διά, but for. 

εἴτις, εἴτι, properly, af any one ; if any thing :. but 
it is used as equivalent to ὅστις, With more emphasis ; 
whoever, whatever. 


382. εἶτα, 1) afterwards, thereupon ; 2) then. 


ἔπειτα, 

They are used in scolding, reproachful ques- 

tioris (see 315), and often with verbs, to refer 
emphatically toa preceding participle.™ 

383. mda, demonstr., here, there ; butalso, and in prose 


generally, relat. where. ἐνθάδε, demonstr., here ; 
hither. 


ἐνταῦϑα (Ion. ἐνθαῦτα), here. 
” 
ἔνϑεν, hence, thence, whence : ἐνθένδε, hence. 
ἔνϑεν μέγ----ἔνϑεν δέ (hinc—illinc), on the one side 
—on the other. 
ἔνϑεν καὶ ἔνϑεν (hinc illinc ; ab ulraque parte), on 
this side and that ; on both sides. 
évzevdev, hence, thence. 
(All these words relate also to time.) 
384. ἐπεί, a ; 2) since, quoniam. E 
Before interrogatives and the wmperat., it has 
the meaning of for ; Sor else. 


> ΄ ΄ -- " ΄-΄ Γ .} ΄ἰ 
@ ™ οὐ δυνάμενοι εὑρεῖν τὰς ὁδοῦς, εἶτα πλανώμενοι ἀπώλοντο. 


5 But ἔνθα or ἔνθα δή may stand at the beginning of periods for ibi. 
there or then. 


5 9 
PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 15 
eS, 
ἐπειδή has the same meanings, but ee 18 far 
oftener used in the sense of since. 
885. ἔστε (= ἐς oret), until, as long as. 


386. ἔτι, yet, still, further. : 
ὑκέ ' no longer. 
οὐκέτι, UNXETL, no more, Ong 
387. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ,» on condition that: ἐφ ᾧτε, the same but 


generally with the infinitive. 


H. 


88. #, or; in comparisons, than. i 
389. Η truly, certainly: but generally a sas sav rog 
tive particle [—ne, but only in direct ques e δ 
ἦ μήν assuredly, in asseverations, promises, a 
390. ἤδη, now, already. Also, ‘without gong any 


urther.’? Lee : 
99 rt ἤν = ἐάν (see 77). This is the form used by th 


>? ” 
Attic poets for ἐάν : never ἂν. 


Θ. 


Ἴ02, "ϑήν (enclit.), should imagine ; surely ; in ΩΝ, 
ical, sarcastic speeches. ov ϑήν, ἡ ϑῆήν. It is pec 
liar to Ionic and Doric poets. 


1. 


393. ἵνα, where ; 2) in order that.' 


i . An. iv, 
+ This derivation seems disproved by a pity Ἐν gee re me 
5,6: ἔστε ἐπὶ τὸ δάπεδον, usque ad, I believe 1 


connective ré. See ré. 


τς ΩΣ δ θὰ 
° Here ἐφ᾽ ᾧ (properly =éni τούτῳ ὅ----) is equivalent ae 
Ρ It retains this meaning in questions : = hee δι ον yee: ue 
cas; where is he come from? or is it plain t ᾿ 6 
market-place (and so the question unnecessary ) ale 
i πάνυ γάρ μοι δοκεῖ ἤδη πολλοῦ ἂν ἄξιος εἶναι ἐπίτρ 4 
ee ἵνα (=in which case) goes with indic. of ἃ past tense to express 


vhat would have happened, if, &c. ἵν᾽ ἦν τυφλός. ἵν᾽ el you, ὅτο. 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 


K. 


xat, 1) and ; 2) also, even. 
τέ---καί, both—and, or and also; as well—as. 
[But these particles are often used where we 
should only use ‘and.’] 
καὶ εἰ, κἂν εἶ: See UNder εἰ, 
καὶ μάλα, before these words καὶ has a peculiar 
καὶ APY, energy. 
καὶ μήν, ( immo,) well! certainly! 2) (atqui), and 
et. 
: καίπερ, although. 
καὶ ταῦτα (idque), and that too. 
καίτοι, and certainly ; 2) and yet certainly; and 
yet ; 3) although. 
καί (also) often seems to be superfluous in familiar 
conversation: wa x ai εἰδῶ, that Imay know, &c., 
καί 15 used in questions, to imply that nothing 
can be expected, &c. It may be often translated 
by at all, possibly. τί yon προσδοκᾷν ; asks for in- 
formation, but τί χρὴ καὶ προσδοκᾷν ; ‘what can one 
possibly expect ? implies that nothing can possibly 
be expected. 
xai—de. When καί and δέ come together in a pro. 
position, καί is also: but the two are often used 
where we should use ‘ and also.’ 
395. “xe, κέν, an enclitic particle, used by the Epic po- 
ets for ἄν. 


M. 


396. μά, not by-—; a particle of swearing. It hasa 
negative force when alone, but may have either ra 
or ov (yes or no) with it. 

397. μαλιστα μέν---εἰ δὲ μή, &c. =if possible—but if 
not, &c.—mentioning what is best to be done, and 
also what is the second best, if that is not feasible.* 


* With numerals, words of time, &c. μάλιστα (about) signifies the 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 161 


398. μᾶλλον δέ, or rather. | 

399. "μέν,: indeed—answered by δέ (but), or sometimes 
by ἀλλά, μέντοι, ὅζο. 

The answering δέ is sometimes omitted :— 

1) When the opposition is clearly marked 
without it: e.g. by naturally opposite 
words, such as adverbs of place and time, 
with an opposite meaning: here—there; 
in the first place—secondly. 

2) When the opposition is suppressed: 
chiefly when personal and demonstrative 
pronouns are used with μέν at the begin- 
ning of a proposition. Thus, ἐγὼ μέν, 
equidem. 

400. "μέντοι, to be sure; 1) I allow; 2) but indeed, 
however. 

401. μή, not; 2) lest, or that not ; 3) that (after verbs 
of fearing, &c.) In questions itexpects the answer 
‘no, being somewhat stronger than por; (nwm ?) 
After some verbs (e. g. restrain, prevent, forbid, 
deny, &c.) it is used where it seems to be superflu- 
ous, from our using no negative particle. 

μὴ ov: see § 49. 
402. μηδέ, 


μῆτε, 


See οὐδέ. 


403. "μήν, 1) truly, indeed ; 2) but indeed, yet. 
τί μήν ; why not 3 
404. μήτε γε, (nedum) much less. 


Ν. 
405. νή, ‘by,’ in oaths (with acc.) 


the statement made is nearly exact (according to the elief of the 
epeaker), without pretending to be quite so. 

t μέν and δέ are much more frequently used than indeed—but, which 
always express a strong opposition, whereas the Greek particles connect 
any different propositions or notions. ‘Thus a section, chapter, or even 
part of a whole work, often ends with (for instance) καὶ ταῦτα piv οὕτως 
ἐγίνετο: when the next chapter will necessarily begin with something 
like τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ (on the following day). It 1s only when the context 
clearly requires it, that μέν is to be rendered, it is true, indeed. 


16 PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 


406. "νύ, νύν (enclit. ὅ), properly the same as νῦν, fos 
which it sometimes stands; 2) for οὖν, then, now 
407. γῦν δή, now ; 2) with a past tense, just now. 


0. 


408. ὁ μέν---ὁ δέ," the one—the other. 

or μέν----οἱ δέ, some—others. 

ὃ μέν, ὁ δ᾽ ov Often stands alone in reference toa 
preceding proposition. πάντας φιλητέον, ἀλλ᾿ ov τὸν 
μὲν τὸν δ᾽ οὔ, we must love all, and not (love) one 
man indeed, but not another. παρῆσαν οὐχ 6 μὲν ὁ 
δ᾽ ov, ἀλλὰ πάντες. 

409. ὃ δέ (φιιεοα vero est), after which the τοῦτό ἐστι is 
omitted.» 
410. ὀϑούνεκα (= ὅτου ἕνεκα), because, that, in the Tragic 
poets. 
411. οἷος (ποιεῖν), of a kind or character (to do, &c.) 
οἷός τε, able, possible. 

οἷον εἰκός, as is natural ; as one may (or might) 
suppose. 

412. ὁπότε, when, whenever ; 2) since: as quando, 
quandoquidem are used for guoniam. 

413. ὅπου, where (there were); 2) since (siquidem). 

414. ὅπως, as adv., how; 2) conjunct., in order that, 
that. ὅπως ἔσεσϑε, see that you be=a strong im 
perative. 

415. ὅσαι ἡμέραι or ὁσημέραι, daily ; properly, as many 
days as there are. 

ὅσος follows ϑαυμαστός and superlatives of quality, 
πλεῖστα ὅσα OF ὅσα πλεῖστα, quam plurima : ϑαυμασ- 
τὸν ὁσον, Mirum quantum. 

ὅσον οὐ (Or ὁσονού), all but. 

416. ὅτε, when. ὁτὲ μέν---ὁτὲ δέ," sometimes —some- 
times. 


“ For ὃ μέν----ὖ dé we sometimes find ὃς pév—ds δέ. 

Ὗ ὃ dé πάντων δεινότατον (but what is the most terrible thing of all, is 
this). 

Ἢ Whenever the forms τότε, ὅτε are used twice (sometimes only 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 163 


47. ὅτι, that (instead of Lat. acc. with infin.), 2) be- 
cause, for διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, i. 6. διότι. 
ὅτι also strengthens superlatives, and is used toin- 
troduce a quotation in the very words of the speak- 
er, where we use no conjunction (see 358. f.) 
ὅτι μή, after negatives, except. 
418. ov, not: in questions it requires the answer ‘ yes.’ 
(ἡ) ov διάλυσις =the non-destruction. 
ov γὰρ ἀλλά is commonly used in the sense of ‘ for,’ 
with increase of emphasis, g. d. ‘for ἐξ is no other- 
wise, but.’ (M.) 
ov μή : see 287. 
ov μήν, yet not, but not ; 2) as anegative protesta- 
tion. See 7 μήν. 
ov μὴν ἀλλά (or ov μέντοι ἀλλα), properly, ‘yet not / 
—but ;’ it has generally the force of yet, however ; 
sometimes of rather, much more. 
ov πάνυ, by no means. 
ov φημι, 1 say (that) not ; deny, refuse. 
οὐχ ὅτι"---ἀλλὰ καί, not only—but also. 
οὐχ ὅτι---ἀλλ᾿ οὐδέ, not only—but not even. 
οὐχ ὅπως---ἀλλὰ καί, not only not—but also. 
οὐχ ὅσον and οὐχ οἷον are also found for οὐχ ὅτι and 
οὐχ ὅπως respectively. 
420. οὔτε, μήτε, ἡ Both forms are connecting nega- 
οὐδέ, μηδέ, \ tives, answering to neque ; 1) nor, 


and not ; 2) οὔτε, or μήτε repeated are netther—nor. 
The forms οὐδε, μηδέ, have the further meaning of 
1) also not ; 2) not even, which is always their 
meaning in the middle of a proposition, 
οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even so. See ὥς. 
421. "οὖν, therefore, then.” It gives to relatives (ὁστισ- 
ovr, &c.) the force of the Lat. cunque, (ever, soever). 


once) for rori—zoré, sometimes—sometimes, they are accented rori— 
jre—. (B.) 

« When μὴ ὅτι, μὴ ὅτως begin the sentence, ὑποβύλῃ ris may be sup- 
plied ; or they may be understood like the Latin ne dicam, and are thus 
stronger than the preceding expressions, but both in a negative sense. 

Υ οὖν is often used to resume a speech that has been interrupted by 
a parenthesis (=/ say.) 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 


1) οὐκοῦν, properly an interrogative of inference 
as οὐχοῦν εὔηϑες τοῦτο; ‘is not rhis, then, 
foolish? But generally the interrogativ : 
force, and with it the negation vanishes, ari 
οὐχοῦν 5 to betranslated simply by ‘ ¢herefore. 

j Β 
and begins a clause. ey 

2) οὔκουν is a strengthened negative ; not im oa 
least.—In the meaning ‘ therefore not, with 
out a question, it is better written οὐκ ov». 

422. οὔπω, never yet. : 
οὐδέποτε, never, is used of both past and future 


time; οὐδεπώποτε, only of past time. (See πώ.) 


Π. 


; apt ‘ly like γέ, to strength- 
_ *aép(enclit.), quite : used nearly like γέ, u 
wis en ρεχλ ete word. It is frequently appended to 

relatives, and adverbs of time, cause, and condition. 
Thus ὥσπερ properly means ‘exactly as. _ 
It is derived, probably, from πέρι, in the sense ὁ 
‘very. Ree “ 
424. πὴ eae δέ (not πῆ per—ay δὲ, Hermann), part 
1'y—partly. — 
«-" cal as conjunction, or preposition W ith 
; : 
en.: πλὴν εἰ, ἐτοορὶ tf. ὦ 1a 
126° nay often, after εἰ, ἐᾶν, μή, has sometimes the 


“chance 
eaning of ( forte) perhaps,perchance, 
27. "ποτέ Goat.) at any time. With interrogatives 


it expresses surprise : τίς ποτε; who in the — 7 
428. "πού (enclit.), somewhere ; 2) peronenct ΡῈ - pes 

3) I imagine, used in conversation W — τὰ me 

is assumed in a half-questioning way, t "- ἘΝ οὐ 

er may build something on the assent of the p 

to. Sige 

on ϑεῶν, I adjure you by the aie tits is 

generally omittted in this form of adjuration). 


i abet iromam 
® οὐκοῦν, extra interrogaonem, acerbam interdum h 


(Bremi, Dem. p. 238.) 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 165 


430. πρὸ τοῦ" (better προτοῦ), before this or that time 
== πρὸ τούτου OF ἐκείνου τοῦ χρόνου)." 
431. "πώ (enclit.), 2 till now, hitherto: but they are 
"πώποτε, ἡ never joined to affirmative proposi- 
tions in this sense. 

οὕπω, μήπω," never yet, not yet. πώποτε ἰ58 sel 
dom annexep to the simple οὐ, μή, but to οὐδέ, 
μηδέ, ‘The form without πώ (οὐδέποτε, never) 
is commonly employed only generally or 
with respect to the future. Both πώ and πώ- 
more may be separated from the negative par- 
ticle by other words between. 

These particles are also used with relatives, 
interrog atives, and participles used as equiv- 
alentto relative sentences. With these words 
there is no negative expressed, but the notion 
of a negative lies at the bottom of them all. 
τίς πω ;---ὅσα πώποτε ἠλπίσαμεν, &C. 

432. πώμαλα, ἃ properly, how so? how then? hence, by 
no means. 


Z. 


433. τὰ μέν---τὰ δέ, partly—partly (adverbially). 


434. "τ ἄρα or? ἄρ (poetical), ἄρα strengthened by τοί, 
435. “zé(que). See καί. 


In the old language (as we find it in the Epic 
poets) zé seems to impart to many pronouns 


" ἐν γὰρ τῷ πρὸ τοῦ οὐδεμία βοήθειά πω τοῖς Μεγαρεῦσιν οὐδαμόθεν 
ἐπῆλθεν. (Thuc. iv. 120.) 

> It answers exactly to our ‘ before this) ‘ before that. 

“ Quando in serie orationis preteritum tempus memoratur, tunc de 
eo quod ante illud etiam fuerit formula προτοῦ non videtur adhiberi 
posse, nisi simul insit relatio ad presens tempus; hoc est, nisi diserte 
simul significare quis yelit, nunc non amplius ita esse.” (Buttm. ad 
Alcib. I. 14.) 


* Not to be confounded with Homer’s οὔπω, pimw=ottws, μήπως, in 
no way, by no means. 


ὁ For πῶς μάλα; (B.) Others say for πῶ μάλα ;-ττπῶ being a rather 
ancommon Doric form for πόθεν ; 


a πιο, ςς,. 00. ὕ ποσο νι πε. - Ὡπαν σρσα 
τ 


.- 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 


ana particles the connecting power, which 
they afterwards retained in themselves with- 
out the particle. 

Thus we find μέν τε; δέ τε, γάρ τε, é&c., and even 
καί TE. 

Especially the particle is found after all rela- 
tives, because these in the old language were 
merely forms of the pronoun demonstrative, 
which through this τέ obtaied the connect- 
ing power (and this), and thus became the 
relative (which). As soon, however, as these 
forms were exclusively allotted to the rela- 
tive signification, the particle τέ was dropt as 
superfluous. Hence we often find in Homer 
ὅς τε, ὅσον τε, ὅτε. for ὅς, ὅσον, and the like. 
The particles ὥστε, ἅτε, and the expressions 
οἷός τε, ἐφ ᾧ te are remains of the ancient 
usage. 

436. τῇ μέν----τῇ δὲ, in one place and another ; here— 
there ; inone respect—but in another. 

437. τί, in some respect, in any respect, at alle τι 
μήν ; why not ? 

438. τὸ δέ often introduces a statement opposed to what 
has been said before, and may be translated by 
(quum tamen') whereas, but however, or sometimes, 
but rather. (See Heindorf, Theet. 37.) 

τὸ δέ with the superlat. often stand alone, with the 
omission of τοῦτό ἐστιν. τὸ δὲ μέγιστον πάντα ταῦ- 
τα μόνος κατειργάσατο, but the greatest thing ἐ8 
(this), that, &c. (See ὃ dé—.) 

439. "τοί (enclit.), properly an old dat. for τῷ, meaning 
therefore, certainly. But these meanings have dis- 
appeared, and zoihas only a strengthening force :8 it 


ὁ It is often added to πάνυ, σχέδον, οὐδέν. 
Ἢ τὸ 8’ οὐ δεῖ, ὡς, &—quum tamen non oporteat. 
s According to Hartung, τοί has not a strengthening but a reséric- 


ao 


tnve meaning, which, however, often comes to the same thing: ¢. 8. ἔκ- 
sewa rot σ᾽ ἄν, 1 would have killed you, and ne thing else=J would assur- 


edly have killed you. Nagelsbach thinks it the old dat. of the pronoun 
“ὁ (τῇ). 


PARTICLES AND PHRASES. 167 


is frequently used with personal pronouns, and in 
maxims, proverbs, &c. 
ΠῚ , 

a therefore, then, now, so now. It is alse 
used when a person proceeds with an argument; 
ἘΝ further, but now. Besides this it is frequently 
used in objections, either in a continued narrative, 
με more commonly in replies: why or why then. 
[ ery seldom as the first word of a clause. P.| 

τοίγαρ (ergo), therefore. 

re hes and τοιγαροῦν, therefore, even therefore, 
and from no other cause, precisely for that reason. 

τοτὲ μὲν---τοτὲ δέ," at one time—at another. 

τούνεχα (Epic), on that account ; therefore. 

τοῦτο μέν---τοῦτο δέ, on th 

ὕτομ ὕτο δέ, on the one hand—on thz other. 

τῷ, therefore. 


Q. 


444, ὡς (relat. adv.), as (as if, so as); 2) of time, as, 


when ; 3) with numerals, about ; 4) it strengthens 
superlatives, especially of adverbs, and some posi- 
tives. 
ὡς (prepos. = εἰς), fo, with acc.: Ὁ ive 
, to, cc.: butonly o ο 
hee y of living 
v (conjunc.), that ; 2) in order that, with subj., 
che fut. nt off : 3) so that, with infin., more com- 
1 " > . ; 
τ ΣΌΝ: a ) since ; 5) quippe, for. 
ὦ τὰ (= ὡς ἔνεστι, as it is possible) is used with 
superlatives: ὡς ἔνι μάλιστα, as far as it ἢ 
as itis an 
possible. ἀμ; βαρ: 
ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, So lo say. 
ὡς συνελόντι (SC. λόγῳ) εἰπεῖν, to be short ; in a word 


c Ὕ ad , ~ 
{For which συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, and συνελόντι alone 
are found.] 


& See note on ὅτε. 


, des 

- tee ic na “ἣν employed instead οὗ the compounds of εἶναι 
vhen, this verb being omitted, they stanc 
᾿ alone as ad 

the accent is thrown back on the first syllable. See ἄνα. ἫΝ 


PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 


ὥς (with accent) = οὕτως, thus. It 1s common in 
the poets, especially the Ionians; but in prose 18 
Φ 5. δ ἊΨ 
found only in οὐδ᾽ ὡς, καὶ ὡς. 


Table of the less obvious meanings of Prepositions 272 
Composition. 


ἀμφί, on both sides. 

ἀντί, against, marking opposition. 

ἀνά," up ; back again. 

διά (dis) marks separation; taking apart or 
aside. 

ἐν, often into. 

κατά, down; it often implies completion, and 
hence, 2) ruin, destruction (answering in both to 
per). 5 

μετά (trans) marks transposition, change. _ 

παρά sometimes signifies (like preter) missing or 
doing amiss. παραβαΐνειν, to transgress, &. 


* , 7 ᾿ 
k With βαίνειν, &c. ἀνά, up, and κατά, down, mean respective.y tnto 
the interior, and down to the coast. 4 
1 Hence κατά is sometimes equivalent to up in English: καταφαγεῖν, 


tea eat up. 


DIFFERENCES 


OF 


OF IDIOM, ETC. 


ENGLISH. 
1. (§ 1.) He who does. 


2. (Ὁ 2.) Socrates. 


A woman, 


3. (§ 3.) My slave. 
Your slave, &c. 

4. Ihave a pain 

Iam suffer-> in my 

ing from) head. 

5. He rejoiced (or, was 
vexed) when the citi- 
zens were rich (or, 
that the citizens 
were rich). 

6. My friend and my bro- 
ther’s. 

7. (§ 4.) The wisdom of 
the geometer. 


8 


GREEK. 

The (person) doing 
πράττων). 

The Socrates (often). 

A certain woman (γυνή τις). 

[When a particular per- 
son is meant, though not 
named. | 

The my slave. 

The your slave. 


I am pained (as to) the 
head: acc. (ἀλγῶ). 


He rejoiced (or, was vexed 
TB . *,? 
at (ἐπι) rich the citizens 


The my friend and the of 
the brother, 

(Very often) The of the 
geometer wisdom—-or 
the wisdom, the of the 
geomieter. 


170 TABLE OF 


ENGLISH. 
8. The beautiful head. 


9. The son of Philir. 
Into Philip’s country. 


10. The affairs of the state. 
The people in the city. 
Those with the king. 
My property. 

11. (δ 5.) The men of old. 
The men of old times. 
The men of those days. 
The intermediate time. 
The present life. 

The upper jaw. 
12. (δ 6.) The rhinoceros 
has avery hard hide. 
They have strong claws. 


13. The beautiful; beauty 

in the abstract.) 

Beautiful things. 

Whatever things are 
beautiful. 

What is beautiful. 

. Speaking. 
Of speaking. 
By speaking, &c. 


. Virtue. Gold. Eagles. 


. ΤῸ do kind offices. 


—confer benefits on. 
—treat well. 


GREEK. 


As in English; or, ‘the 


head the beautiful.’ 
The of Philip (son, υἱός, 
understood). 


Into the of Philip (coun- 


try, χώραν, understood). 
The (neut. pl.) of the state, 
The (oi) in the city. 
The (oi) with the king. 
τὰ ἐμά. 
The long-ago (τη6Π)---οι 
πάλαι. 
The then (men). 
The between time. 
The now life. 

The up jaw (ἡ ἄνω γνάϑος). 
The rhinoceros has the 
(=its) hide very hard. 
They have the (=their) 

claws strong. 


κ , 
τὸ καλον. 


‘ 
\ χὰ καλα. 


The to-speak. 

Of the to-speak 

By the to-speak, &c. 
τὸ λαλεῖν : τοῦ λαλεῖ», &C. 

The virtue. The gold. 
The eagles (when the 
class is meant ; or eagles 
generally). 


εὖ ποιεῖν With ace. of person. 


.(§10.) J 


DIFFERENCES OF ΙΡΙ͂ΟΜ, &c. 


ENGLISH. 


To prosecute on @ 
charge of murder. 
To betried for murder. 


. (δ 7.) Some—others. 


But (or and) he (or it). 


Andhe... 


(§ 8.) The other party. 


he rest of thecountry. 


. Thewhole city ; all the 


city. 
Every city. 


. (§ 9.) With two others. 


. To perform this service. 


To perform many ser- 
vices. 


One’s own 


. His own ‘ things. 


hat comes 
from the gods. 


The greater part of... 
Half of... 


. (§ 11.) In my time. In 


my father’s time. 
In my power. 


. (§ 12.) 'To be so. 


Τὸ be found, 
brought in, δ of..d&c. 
guilty 


. (δ 13.) Not only—but 


also. 
To confer a great bene- 
fit on. 


GREEK. 


To pursue of murder. 


To fly of murder. 
The indeed—but the. 

οἱ μέν---οἶ δε. 

ὁ δέ... αἱ the head of ἃ 
clause. 

καὶ ὅς... 

οἱ ἕτεροι. 

The other country. 


~ ε ’ 
πᾶσα ἡ πολις. 


πᾶσα πόλις. 

Himself the third (pron. 
last). 

ὑπηρετεῖν τοῦτο (pers. for 
whom in dat.) 


πολλὰ ὑπηρετεῖν. 
The things of himself (τὰ 
ἑαυτοῦ.) 
The (neut. pl.) of the gods 
agreement 
with the noun 
governed by ‘of’ 
ἐπὶ ἐμοῦ. ἐπὶ τοῦ πατρός. 
ἐπὶ ἐμοί, 
To have (themselves) so 
(οὕτως ἔχει»). 
To be taken or caught 
(ἁλῶναι with gen.) 


οὐχ ὅτι---ἀλλὰ καί. See note 
on 82. 

ΤῸ benefit greatly (μέγα 
ὠφελεῖν). 


= ——— — 


Ἷ 
i} 
᾿ 
: 
i 
i 
, 
| 
: 


TABLE OF 


ENGLISH. 
T’o doa great injury to. 


29. (Ὁ 14.) I should ike to 
behold. 
I should like extremely 
to behold. 
I would rather behold 
A than B. 
. It is not possible. 
. On the plea that I could 
then conquer 


Though I should have, 
&c. 
. (δ 15.) When you have 
done, you will, &c. 
. (δ 16.) What I please. 


. (§ 17.) And you as 

much asany body. 

And you among the 
first. 

5. Am slow to doit (112). 
. ConDITIONAL  PRo- 
POSITIONS (79). 

(1) IfLhaveany thing, 
I will give i. 


GREEK. 
To hurt greatly (μέγα βλάπ. 
τειΨ). 

Ops. τὰ μέγιστα to be 
used, if it is ‘great- 
est, not ‘great.’ 

I would gladly behold 


(ἡδέως ἂν ϑεασαίμην .") 


σ “Ὁ 
ἥδιστ ἂν ϑεασαίμην. 


ἥδτον ἂν ϑεασαίμην A ἢ Β. 


It is not (eb ἔστιν). 

As so being-likely-to-con- 
quer (ὡς οὕτως περιγενό- 
μενος ἄν). 

ἔχων ἄν. 

When you shall have done 
(ἄν with subj. 90*). 


ἃ δοκεῖ (μοι). (If necessary, 
ἃ δόξειεν, or, ἃ ἂν δόξῃ). 


| Having begun from you 


(100). 


Do it by leisure (σχολῇ). 


(1) If the consequent verb 
is in the future, the con- 
ditional verb is (gene- 
rally) in the swbj. with 
ἐάν." 


™ θεᾶσθαι is “ἴο behold’ something that may be considered ἃ specta- 
gle. ἰδεῖν (ὁρᾷν, ὄψεσθαι) is simply videre, to see. Hence ἴδοιμι shou'd 
be used in the phrase ‘ I shouid like to see, when the notion of a spee- 


tacle is quite out of place. 


® Both verbs may be in the future indicative (the conditional verb 


y 
i> 


\\ ~*~ 
\ 


DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, Wc. 178 


ENGLISH. GREEK. 


If it has thundered, it If the consequent verb .s 
has also lightened. in any tense of the ind 
but the future, or in the 
imperative, put the con 
ditional verb in the indice 

with εἰ. 
2) If you should do so, | 2) When both verbs have 
I should laugh. ‘should, ‘would,’ or the 
If you were todo so, | ~ first ‘were to, the second 
I should laugh. ‘should or ‘would, both 
If you would do so,| are to be in the optative ; 
you would oblige | . the consequent verb with 

me. ) a. 

3) If I had any thing,I 3) When the consequent 
would give it. verb has‘ would,’ but the 
If 1 had had any conditional verb not, 
thing I would have both verbs are in a past 
given it. tense of the indicative ; 
the conditional verb with 
ei, the consequent verb 

with ἄν. 


37 (That) they would 
fetch. | sigs ἄν. δ 14 
(That he, &c.) would { δυνηϑῆναι ἄν. 
be able. 


ἜΝ would have | Ane: With tao 


I should have died. pluperf. if necessary). 


38. (Ὁ. 20.) We should (or The workis to-be-set-about 
ought to) set about (verbal in zéo¢). 
the work. 


with εἰ. The condition is then expressed in a more positive way, as a 
contemplated event: a construction which is often adopted when the 
condition expresses an event hoped for or feared (R.) ; 88, εἴ re πεί- 
σονται Μῆδοι eis Πέρσας τὸ δεινὸν ἥ ξει. 

ὁ As in the consequence of the fourth form of conditional proposi+ 


«ὦ... 


TABLE OF 


ENGLISH. GREEK. 
The work should be 


set-about. 


We must set-about g 1S to-be-set-about (neut. 


of verbal in τέος) the 


the work. 
work,? 


The work must be 
set about. 

. (§ 21.) I should have I shoula have died, if not 

died but for the dog. through the dog (εἰ μὴ 
διά, with acc.) 

.The all but present The as-much-as not (ὅσον 

war. ov) present war. 

. (Ὁ 22.) Having had his Having been taken away 

government taken his government. 
away. 

Having been entrusted Having been entrusted the 
with the arbitration. arbitration. 

Having had his eyes Having been knocked out 
knocked out. his eyes. 

_ To conquer himin the To conquer him the battle 

battle of Marathon. at (¢v) Marathon. 

To flow witha full (or Τὸ flow much (πολύς adj.) 

strong stream). 
To flow with milk. To flow milk. 

. (8. 24.) Till late in the Till far-on (πόῤῥω) of the 

day. day. 

. Willingly at teast. 

Willingly. 
. So to say. As to say a word (ὡς ἔπος 
To speak generally. εἰπεῖν). 

. Sensible persons. The sensible of persons (οι 
φρόνιμοι τῶν ἀνϑρώπων, 
sometimes ; but very 
often of φρένιμοι only). 

To drink some wine. ΤῸ drink of wine. 

(Not)todrinkany wine. (Not) to drink of wine. 


To be willing (ἑκὼν εἶναι). 


P The ‘work’ is to be in the case governed by the verb from which 
‘he verbal is derived 


DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &c. 175 


ENGLISH. GREEK. 
49, My property, wretched My (property) of (me) the 


man that Tam! wretched ! 
[τὰ ἐμὰ τοῦ κακοδαίμονος. 
50. What misery! The misery (in the gen.) 
61. (§ 25.) Who in the Who ever ? (zig ποτὲ ;) 
world ..? 
2, To benearly relatedto. ‘To be near to a person (in 
respect) of family. 
. (§ 26.) You shall not You shall not do it rejoic- 
do it with impunity. ing (χαίρων). 
ΟἽ would not have done I would not have done it 
it at all (132). the beginning (ἀρχὴν OT 
ἣ τὴν ἀρχή»). 
. ($ 28.) Itis thepartof. Itis of a wise man. 
a wise man. were 
.Itis not a thing that It is not every man’s {παν- 
everybody cando. τός). 
It is not every one that ) It is not every man’s to do 
can do this. ἡ 466: φ 
, To be one’s own πηδϑς ἡ ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι. 
ter. 
. (δ. 29.) More powerful\ More powerful himself* 
than ever. \ “\ than himself (αὐτὸς 
| ¢. \adeon). 
, Afflictions too greatfor Afilictions greater than in- 
tears. \.)  proportion-to (ἢ κατὰ) 
tears. 
Of superhuman size. Greater than according-to 
man (ἢ κατ ἄνϑρωπον). 
More than could have More than in-proportion- 
been expected from tothe dead (ἢ κατὰ τοὺς 
the small number of γεκρούς). 
the killed. 
60. Too young to know, Younger than so as to 
ἄς. know (ἢ ὥστε). 


a OF course ‘themselves chan themselves,’ when more than one are 
spoxen “ἢ. 


nail 


TABLE OF 


ENGLISH. 


61. (§30.) With more haste | 


than prudence. 
Hastily rather than pru- 
dently. 
More hastily than pru- 
dently. 

62 Thegreatest ?possi- 

As great as ble. 
(ὦ as he could, 

As many as he possi- 
bly could. 

03. If any other man can 
do it, you can. 

If any man is temper- 
ate, ἐξ is you. 

64. [have injured you more 
than any other indi- 
vidual has. 

65. (§31.) Tocharge a man 
with a crime 

66. (§ 35.) If it is agreea- 
ble to you. 

If you are willing. 

67. And that too... 

68. For the present at 
least. 

As far as they are con- 
cerned. 

69. (§ 36.) 1 offer myself zo 
be interrogated. 

"0. (§37.) It wasdone that 
robbers might not 
commit depreda- 
tions, &c. 

"1. Nothing was done be- 
cause he was not 
here, 


> 


GREEK. 


More-hastily than more 
prudently. 


ὡς or ὅτι With superlat. 


As many as he could most 
(ὅσους ἠδύνατο πλείστους). 

You, if any other man (εἶ 
τις καὶ ἄλλος), can do it. 

You, if any other man, 
are temperate. 

I one man have injured 
you the most (πλεῖστα εἷς 
ἀνήρ σε ἔβλαψαν). 

To charge (ἐγκαλεῖν) a 
crime to a man. 


If it is to you wishing it 
(εἴ σοι βουλομένῳ éori). 


4 ~_ 
καὶ THVTA. 


τό γε νῦν εἶναι. 


‘2. ’ 

τὸ ἐπὶ τούτοις εἶναι. 

I offer myself to interro- 
gate. 


It was done τοῦ μὴ λῃστὰς 
κακουργεῖν, SC. 


Nothingi@fas done διὰ τὸ 


ἐχεῖνον μὴ παρεῖναι. 


DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &c. 177 


ENGLISH. 


72. He said that he was in 
a hurry. 
73. (δ 40.) He is evidently 
hurt. 
I am conscious of 
thinking so. 
I am conscious that I 
think so. 

. Lknow 
—remember 
—rejoice 
—am aware 


) that I 
> have 
} done it. 


lam ashamed 


having 
I repent Ἢ 


\ done it. 


Know that you will be 
punished. 

I perceived that he 
thought, &c. 

He will not cease to do 
if. 

. He knew that the son 
he had begotten was 
mortal. 

(§ 41.) I did it wncon- 
sciously. 

I did it ears y ¥ to 
myself. “Ae 

I did it without being 
seen, or discovered ; 
secretly. 


arrived first(or before 
them). 


You cannot do it too 


soon. 
9* 


GREEK. 


He said to be in a hurry 
(pron. omitted). 

He is evident (δῆλος) being 
hurt. 


I am conscious (σύνοιδα) to 
myself thinking so(nom. 
or dat.) 


I know ) 
—remember | havingdone 
—rejoice it (part.) 


—am aware 


( Iam ashamed having done 


it. 

It repenteth to-me having 
done it. 

Know about-to give pun- 
ishment. 

I perceived him thinking, 
&c. 


He will not cease doing it 
(part.) 


He knew having begotten 
a mortal son. 


I was concéaled-from (ἔλα- 
ov) myself, doing it 
(mom.) 


I was concealed (ἔλαϑον) 
doing it. 

(or) I did it being unob- 
served (λαϑύν). 

I having arrived antici- 
pated them (ἔφϑην, Οἱ 
ἔφϑην αὐτούς). 

Doing it you will not anti 
cipate (οὐκ ἂν φϑάνοις). 


΄ 
fe j Ἢ : 
ty’: 
# 


TABLE OF 


ENGLISH. 


Will you not do it di- 
rectly ? 

78. He held his tongue, as 
supposing that all 
knew. 

79. (Ὁ 43.) You act strange- 
ly in giving us, &c. 

80. They pronounced her 
happy, &c. in hav- 
ing such children. 

They have arms/éo de- 
fend themselves 


with. 
81. First of all (259). 


82. (δ 44.) From some of 
the cities. 


Somewhere. 
Sometimes. 
83. I feel thankful to you 
for coming. 
85. They destroyed every 
thing of value. 


55. (Ὁ 45.) Such a man as 

you. 

(Of) such a man as 
you are. 

For men like us... 

To make astonishing 
progress. 

Surprisingly misera- 


ble. 


GREEK. 
> Δ , ~ 
οὐκ av φϑανοις ποιῶν ; 


He held his tongue, (ὡς: 
all men knowing it (acc. 
or gen.) 

You do a strange thing, 
who give us, &c. 

They pronounced her hap- 
py, &c. what children 
she had. (258. ὃ). 

They have arms with 
which they will defend 
themselves. 

First among the (ἐν τοῖς 
πρῶτος---πρώτη, πρῶτοι, 
&c.) 

From the cities there is 
which. 

[* which’ in same case as 
‘cities.’ | 

There is where. 

There is when. 

I know you gratitude, for 
what (av? ὧν) you came. 

They destroyed if there 
was anything of value 


” 
(εἴ τι, &C.) 
ς i oe 
ὁ οἷος σὺ ἀνήρ. 
~ > , on 
οἵου cov ἀνδρός, Ke. 


τοῖς οἵοις (Or οἵοις περ) ἡμῖν. 
To advance ϑαυμαστοῦ 
ὕσον. 


ω ” 
ϑαυμασίως ὡς ἄϑλιος. 


DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, Wc. 179 


ENGLISH. 


. (δ 46.) There was 


nobody whom he 
did not answer. 


He answered every 
body. 


. Especially. 


As fast as they could. 


. (§ 47.) Lam able. 


It is possible. 

Are adapted for cut- 
ting. 

Am of a character 
to... 


. Eighteen. 


. Far from it. 


Am 
. to be. 


. (§ 48.) Be sure tobe... 


Take care to do it. 


, (§ 49.) I fear that I shall. 


I fear that I shall not. 
What prevents us 
from...? 
To prevent them from 
coming. 


. (ὃ 50.) Lhad a narrow 


escape from death. 
I hada narrow 6508} ". 


(§ 51.) Immediately on 
his arrival. 


GREEK. 
Nobody whom he did not 
answer. 

[‘nobody’ under the 
government of ‘ an- 
swered : ὅστις, who.| 

3oth otherwise and also 
(ἄλλως τε xa). 

As they had speed. 

οἷός τέ εἰμι. 

OLOY τὸ E0TE. 


Are such as to cut. 


Am such as to... 


ἘΝ wanting two (282. 

). 

πολλοῦ δεῖν. 

γενέσϑαι (ΜΏΘη ‘am 
to be’=‘am in- 
tended to be.’ 

That (ὅπως) you shall be 
[‘see’ understood. } 

Take care how (ὅπως) you 
shall do it. 

I fear wy... (subj. or fut. 

indic.) 

μὴ οὐ... 

τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ..; With 
infin. 


μέλλω 
μέλλει 


“cc 


To prevent them μὴ ἐλϑεῖν. 


I came παρὰ μικρόν to die. 


I escaped by a little (wag 
ὀλίγον). 

Immediately having ar- 
rived (εὐθὺς ἥκων). 


TABLE OF DIFFERENCES OF IDIOM, &c. 


ENGLISH. GREEK. 


—— yoockg imei Immediately being born 
From our very birth. (εὐϑὺς γενόμενοι). 
96. (§ 52.) What posses- Having suffered what, do 
ses you to do this? you do this? (τί παϑών ;) 
What induces youto Having learnt what, do 
do this? you do this? (τί μαϑύν ;) 
97. (319.) To be wholly ον ἢ" | 
wrapt up in this? πρὺς τούτῳ ὅλος εἶναι. 
98, To be consistent 
3 with. 
4% @ τὰν, 
“ « character- 
istic of. 
(2) Tobeonaman’s 
side. > εἶναι προς τινος. 
[ΤῸ make for a 
man. 
3 “ be fora man’s 
(3) 4 interest. 
“good for a 
man. 


\ 
99. By what conduct. Doing what. 
With what view. Wishing what. 
109 (Ὁ 57.) He went and 
gave (when used 
contemptuously or 


indignantly). 


He φέρων gave. 


QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 


Oss. Words in sMALL CAPITALs are to be translated into Greek. 


§ 1.—1. What is the difference between the imperf. and the 
eor.? [The Aorist is used of momentary and single actions: the 
imperfect of continued and repeated ones.] 2. What English tense 
does the aor. most nearly answer to? [Our perfect indefinite 
(the perf. formed by inflevion).] 3. Is the aor. ever used for the 
perf.? [Yes,* when the connection of the past with the present 
is obvious from the context.] 4. Where is a governed gen. often 
placed? [Between an article and its noun.}] 5. How do you 
render οἱ πράττοντες ἢ [Those who do.] 6. To what is the 
artic. with a participle equivalent? [To a personal or demon- 
strative pronoun with a relative sentence. ] 

ᾧ 2.—7. Do proper names ever take the artic? [Yes.] 
8. When? [When they are the names of persons well known. } 
9. When is a proper name generally without the art.? [When 
it is followed by a description which has the article.] 10. Is 
there an indef. art. in Greek? [No.] 11. By what pron. may 

a’? sometimes be translated? [By zig.] 12. When? [When 
we might substitute ‘a certain’ for ‘a.’] 13. Which generally 
has the art., the subject or the predicate (i.e. the nom. before or 
the nom. after the verb)? [The subject.] 

ᾧ 3.—14. Your stave. [ὁ σὸς δοῦλος. 15. Is the art. ever 
equivalent to a possessive pron.? [Yes, when it is quite obvious 
whose the thing in question is.] 16. When must the pronouns 
be used 2 [Whenever there is any opposition (as, when mine is 
apposed to yours or any other person’s)]. 17. When an adj. 
without the article stands before the art. of the substantive, from 
what does it distinguish that substantive? [From itself under 
other circumstances.] 18. My raTHER AND MY FRIEND’s. [0 
ἐμὸς πατὴρ, καὶ ὁ τοῦ φίλου. 


* And even for the pluperfect. 


182 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 


ᾧ 4.—19. Tue son or Pau. [ὁ Φιλίππου : υἱός, son, un- 
derstood.] 20. Inro Pxiir’s couNTRY. [εἰς τὴν Φιλίππου: 
yooar, country, understood.) 21. How does it happen that the 
article often stands alone? [In consequence of the omission of 
a noun or participle.) 

§ 5.—22. What is often equivalent to an adjective? [An 
adverb with the article.) 23. Tae men cr oLp. [οἱ πάλαι, the 
long ago men. ] 

§ 6.—24. How did the Greeks express ‘she hasa very beau- 
tiful head?’ [She has the head very beautiful.] 25. Distin- 
guish between τὸ καλόν and τὰ καλά. [τὸ xadov, is: ‘the 
beautiful, ‘the honorable, in the abstract ; beauty. τὰ καλά, 
are: beautiful (or honorable) things ; whatever things are beau- 
tiful ; what is beautiful ; or simply, beautiful things.) 26. How 
js the first pers. pl. of the subj. often used? [In exhortations. } 
ΟἽ. What is ‘not’ in an exhortation of this kind? [j7.] 28. How 
may the infin. become (virtually) a declinable substantive? [By 
being used with the article.} 29. Do abstract nouns and names 
of materials generally take the art.? [Yes.] 30. When does a 
noun (whether sing. or plur.) always take the art.? [Whena 
whole class, or any individual of that class, is meant. | 

$7.31. ὁ μέν-ττὸ δέ: οἱ μέν----οἱ δέ, [(this—that ; the 
one—-the other) (these—those ; some—others.)] 32. How does 
ὁ δέ stand once in a narrative? [For but or and he or tt: the 
article being here a pronoun.) 33. How καὶ oc? [For ‘and 
he: but only when the reference is to a person.] -34. When is 
αὐτός self? [αὐτός is ‘self? when it stands in the nom. without 
a substantive, or in any case with one.| 35. When is it him, her, 
it, &c.? [αὐτός is him, her, it, &c. in an oblique case without a 
substantive.] 36. When is αὐτός same? [ὃ αὐτός is ‘the 
same.| 37. Does αὐτός standing alone in an oblique case, ever 
mean self? [Yes, when it is the first word of the sentence. | 

ᾧ 8.—38. Does a noun with οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος, take the art. 
or not? [Yes.] 39. Where does the pron. stand? [Hither de- 
fore the article, or after the noun.] 40. What does πᾶς in the 
sing. mean without the art.? [‘ each,’ ‘ every.”}—what with the 
urt.? [‘the whole: ‘all?] 

ᾧ 9.—41. In the reflexive pronouns (ἐμαυτοῦ, &c.) is the αὖ. 
“ὅς emphatic? [No.] 42. How must thyself (in acc.) be trans 


QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 183 


ated when it is emphatic? [αὐτός must precede the pronoun, 
αὐτὸν σέ, &c.] 43. How do you translate ‘own’ when it is em- 
phatic? [By the genitive of the reflexive pronouns ἐμαντοῦ, 
σεαυτοῦ, éavtov.}]—how his, theirs, &c.? [By the gen. of av- 
τὸς. 44. Does ἑαυτοῦ ever stand in a dependent sentence for 
the nom. of the principal one? [Yes.] 45. What pronouns are 
often used instead of a case of ἑαυτοῦ, to express, in a dependent 
clause, the subject of the principal sentence? [The simple av- 
τόν, or ἕ, (οὗ, οἷ,---σφεῖς, σφᾶς, &c.)] 46. Is ov ever simply 
reflexive in Attic prose? [No.*] 47. To what Attic prose- 
writer are the forms, ov, @ confined? [To Plato.] 

ᾧ 10.—48. How is the neut. plur. of an adjective, standing 
without a noun, generally translated into English? [By the 
singular.| 49. How is the newt. art. with a gen. case, used 7 |To 
denote any thing that relates to, or proceeds from, the thing in 
question.] 50. How are neut. adjectives often used? [ Adverb- 
ially.| 51. When is the neut. singular generally used adverb- 
tally? [When the adj. is of the comparative degree.] 52. When 
the neut. plur.? [When the adjective is of the superlative de- 
gree.] 53. Does a predicative adjective ever not agree in gen- 
der with the substantive it refers to? [Yes; when the assertion 
is made of aclass or general notion; not of a particular thing. ] 
54. In what gender do πολύς (πλέων, πλεῖστος) and ἥμισυς 
stand, when followed by ἃ gen.? [Iu the gender of the gen. that 
follows them. | - 

§ 11.—55. In what number does the verb generally stand, 
when the nom. is a neut. plur.? [In the singular.) 56. What 
exception is there? [When persons or living creatures are spok- 
en of.] 57. Mention some predicates with which the copula is 
very ofien omitted ? 

(ἄξιος and χαλεπόν, ϑέμις, ὥρα, φροῦδος, ἀνάγκη, 

ὁάδιον, and δυγατός (with its opposite word), and ἑτοῖμος.) 

§ 12.—58. Do the moods of the aor. refer to past time? [No.] 
59. How do the moods of the aor. differ from the moods of the 
present? [The moods of the aorist express momentary actions ; 


® That is, οὖ, %, &c. is not used by prose-writers in a principal sen- 

tence, to express the subject of such sentence : its place is im a de- 

i or accessory clause, to express the subject of the principa’ 
ause. 


ee ΣΣ Pe Lea ST 


ESR ee. canbe 


τ ραν, DRA ei tal Ne a = 


184 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 


those of the present, continued ones.] 60. Does the part. of the 
aor. refer to pasttime? [Yes.] 61. Are the moods of the aor. 
rendered by the pres. in English? [Yes.] 62. When μή for- 
bids, what moods does it take? [μή when it forbids, takes the 
imperative of the present, the subjunctive of the aorist.] 63. 
What is the difference between μή with imperat. pres. and μή 
with the subj. aor.? [With the subj. aor. a definite single act 1s 
forbidden; with imper. pres. a course of action. The imperat., 
therefore, often forbids a man to do what he has already begun.) 
64. Of what tense is the optative the regular attendant? [The 
optative is the regular attendant of the historical tenses." 65. 
What mood is the subj. after a pres. or fut. turned into, when in- 
stead of the pres. or fut. an historical tense is used? [The opta- 
tive.] 66. When do the particles and pronouns, which go with 
the indicative in direct narration, take the optative? [The parti- 
cles and pronouns which go with the indicative in direct, take 
the optative in oblique narration.}] 

ᾧ 13.—67. Howis an assertion modified by the use of ἄν, or 
in Epic poetry κέ, κέν. [ὧν gives an expression of contingency 
and mere possibility to the assertion.] 68. What is the principal 
use of dy? [The principal use of ἄν is in the conclusion of a 
hypothetical sentence.) 69. When ἄν stands in a sentence 
which is not hypothetical, to what does it often refer? [To an 
implied condition.) 70. What particles are formed by the addi- 
tion of ὧν to ei, ὅτε, ἐπειδή 1 [ἐάν, ἥν, ἄν,---ὅταν, ἐπειδάν.) 71. 
How is ἄν -εἰ ἄν distinguished from the simple av? [ἄν-ε ἐάν, 
εἰ ἄν, regularly begins the sentence.] 72. What are the two 
meanings of ef? [εἰ is ‘if? but like our ‘if? it is often used for 
‘ whether.’] 


Hy POTHETICAL PROPOSITIONS. 


73. 1) How is possibility without any expression of uncertain: 
tainly, expressed ? [ei with indic. in both clauses.}] 


* Or: ‘Historicum sequitur tempus modus optativus.’ 

+ This is the general rule: but the indicative is frequently used is 
ebirque narration. 

t The consequent clause may have the /mperative. 


--.--...........-...--..-...--.- ὕ...., 


QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 188 


74. 2) How is uncertainty with the prospect of .evisicn ex- 
pressed? [By ἐών with subjunctive in the conditional, and the 
endic. (generally the future) in the consequent clause.*] 

75. 3) How is uncertaint, expressed, when there is no such 
accessory notion (as the prospect of decision)? [By e with the 
optative in the conditional clause, and ὧν with the optative in the 
consequent clause. | 

76. 4) How is impossibility, or belief that the thing is not so, 
expressed? [εἰ with imperfect or aorist indic. in the conditional 
clause; ἄν with imperf. or aorist indic. in the consequent clause. } 
77. When is the imperfect used in this form of proposition? [For 
present time, or when the time is quite indefinite.] 78. Can the 
condition refer to past time, the consequence to present? [Yes.] 
79. Which clause has ἄν, the conditional or the consequent clause 7 
[The consequent clause. ] 

ᾧ 14.—80. Τὸ what is the optat. with ἄν equivalent? [The 
optative with ἄν is equivalent to our may, might, would, should, 
&c.] 81. By what may the optat. with ἄν often be translated ? 
[The optative with ἄν is often translated by the future.] 82. 
What force does ἄν give to the infin. and participle? [The 
same force that it gives to the optative.| 83. To what then isan 
infinitive with ὧν nearly equivalent? [To an infinitive future. ] 
84. After what verbs is the future frequently so expressed? 
[ After verbs of hoping, thinking, trusting, praying, knowing, con- 
fessing, &c., when a condition is expressed or implied. ] 

§ 15.—85. What mood do the compounds of ἄν, and rela- 
tives with ἄν regularly take? [The subjunctive.] 86. What 
changes take place, if any, when these compounds or relatives 
with ἄν come into connection with past time, or stand in oblique 
narration? [They either remain unchanged, or the simple 
words—a, ὅτε, ἐπειδή : ὅς, ὅστις, ὅσος, &c.—take their place 
with the optative.] 87. Τὸ what Latin tense does the aor. sub- 
junct. answer, when it stands with the compounds of ἄν, or with 
relatives and av? [To the Latin future perfect, fulurum ez- 
actum. | 

§ 16.—88. How is what often happened, in pasv time, expres- 


* The consequent clause may have the Imperative. 
t That is, ἐάν, ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, &c. 


πων» ETT ΨΚ. τυ APN LT iA ARDENT TUE TERMI Sth CAE AMELIA ATSB 
~ = 4 ᾿ 
- ὍΣΣ rs ——— — a  ςς - «τ; — .-- - - pester comers anata πο πὶ 


=a 
ae 
Δ 


180 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 187 


rE a eI SSRIS TS 
me 
Fare a «αἰ 


sed?* [By the optative.] 89. What mood and particles would 
be used to express this sort of indefinite frequency for pres. or fut 
time? [The relatives with ὧν and compounds of ἄν. 90. What 
force does ἄν thus give to ὅς and other relatives? [The force of 


Bt το 


dat., omitted ? [To the participle in dus used in the same way.] 
106. When may they be used in agreement with the olyect? 
[When formed from transitive verbs.] 107. Express “you 
SHOULD CULTIVATE VIRTUE,” in two ways, with ἀσκητέος and age- 


Se Ieee ἐς 
zs ne — 
eee τὰν 


νι aE 


eas 


our —ever, —soever. | 

§ 17.—91. What mood is used in doubting questions ? [The 
subjunctive.] 92. After what verbs is it sometimes thus used ? 
[After βούλει; ϑέλεις ; οὐκ ἔχω or οἶδα, ἀπορῶ, ἐρωτῶ, ζητῶ. 

ᾧ 18.—93. When conditionai propositions depend on another 
verb, in what mood will the consequent clause stanc? [In the 
infinitive.| 94. What will stand in a dependent consequent clause 
for ποιήσω 1 [aoujcew.]—for ποιοῖμ ἄν, ἐποίουν ἄν 1 [ποιεῖν 
ἄν.1---ἴον ποιήσαιμ ἄν, ἐποίησα av? [ποιῆσαι ay. |—for πεποι- 
ἤχοιμὶ ἄν, ἐπεποιήκειν ἄν 1 [πεποιηκέναι ἄν.] 

§ 19.—95. Does οὐ or μή deny independently and directly 7 
[od.] 96. When should not be translated by un? [My is used 
in prohibitions ; with conditional particles ; and particles expres- 
sing intention or purpose.| 97. When do ote, ὁπότε, take py? 
[When ‘when’ implies a condition.] 98. Is ov or μή used after 
ὅτι, ὡς, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή 1 [ov.] 99. Is ov or un used (generally) to 
express the opinions of another person in oblique narration? [ov.] 
100. How should you determine whether οὐδείς, οὐδέ, &c. are to 
be used, or μηδείς, μηδέ 1 [Wherever ‘not’ would be translated 
by μή, we must use not οὐδείς, οὐδέ, &e., but μηδείς, μηδέ, &c. ] 
101. How must the positive adverbs and pronouns generally be 
translated into Greek in negative propositions? [By the corres- 
ponding negative forms.t] 

*, 20.—102. Are the verbals in τέος act. or pass.? [ Passive. | 
103. What case of the agent do they govern? [The dative. | 
104. What case of the object? [The same case as the verbs from 
which they come.] 105. To what are these verbals in. τέος 
equivalent, when they stand in the newt. with the agent, in the 


® Hermann properly observes, that the optat. does not itself express 
the repetition of the act, but only carries with it the notion of indefinite- 
ness, the repetition being marked by the other verb, e. g. either a fre- 
quentative verb, or the imperf. or pluperf. tense (which both express 
duration), or by an aorist with πολλάκις, &e. 

+ Thus for either—or ; anywhere, at any time, any thing, we must 
use neither—nor ; nowhere; never; nothing, ἄς. Rule 110, as a gen 
eral assertion, is absurd. 


τή. [ἀσκητέον ἐστί σοι τὴν ἀρετήν, or ἀσκητέα ἐστί σοι ἡ ἀρετή. 
108. What peculiarities are there in Attic Greek with respect to 
the use of these verbals? [The neut. plur. is used as well as the 
neut. sing. The agent is sometimes put in the accus. as well as 
the object.] 109. Render πειστέον ἐστὶν αὐτῷ, and πειστέον 
ἐστὶν αὐτόν. [πειστέον ἐστὶν αὐτόν, we must persuade him. 
πειστέον ἐστὶν αὐτῷ, we must obey him.] 

§ 21.—110. What verbs govern two accusatives ? [Verbs of 
taking away from, teaching, concealing, asking, putting on or off, 
take two accusatives. | 

ᾧ 22.—111. What case does the acc. after the active verb 
become, when the act. verb is turned into the passive? [The nom. ] 
112. When the act. verb governs two accusatives, may either of 
them (and if so, which?) remain after the pass. verb ? [The acc. of 
the person becomes the nom. ; that of the thing continues to be 
the object of the passive verb, as in Latin.] 113. May the dat. 
of the act. become the nom. of the passive? [Yes; sometimes. ] 
114. Will the acc, after the act. then remain as the acc. after the 
passive? [Yes.] 115. Render (ἐγὼ) πεπίστευμαι τοῦτο. [I am 
entrusted with this: or,I have had this entrusted to me.] 116. 
Do intrans. verbs ever take an acc.? and, if so, when? [Intransi- 
tive verbs take an acc. of a noun of kindred meaning ; and some- 
times of one that restricts the general notion of the verb to a par- 
ticular instance. ] 

§ 23.—117. Does the ace. ever follow an adj.? [Yes.] | 118 
What prepos. might be supposed omitted? [κατά, asto.] 119 
What acc. is sometimes found with verbs that do not properly 
govern the acc.? [The accus. of the neut. pronoun.] 120. How 
is the duration of time expressed? [By the accusative.] 121. 
How is the distance of one place from another expressed ? [By 
the accusative. | 

§ 24.—122. What case do partitives, δυο. govert ? [Partitives, 
numerals, superlatives, &c. govern the genitive.] 123. What 
case do adverbs of time and place govern? [The genitive.] 124. 
What case expresses the material out of which a thing is made, 


Din AO τᾶς πὸ λάδι τῳ, CHE ETT Uae, 


a ee τ 


ee 


a Te he 


88 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 


and such other properties, corcumstances, &c. as we shouid ex 
press by ‘of’? [The genitive.] 125. Can ‘once a day’ be trans 
lated literally ? [No: it mustbe, ‘once the day.’] 126. How does 
the gen. stand after possessive pronouns? [In a kind of apposition 
to the personal pronoun implied.] 127. How does the gen. stand 
alone, or after interjections? [The gen. is used alone, or after in- 
erjections, as an exclamation. | 

§ 25.—128. What case do verbal adjectives, in ἐκος, &c., with 
a trans. meaning govern? [The genitive.] 129. What case do 
verbs relating to plenty, want, value, &c., govern? [The genitive. ] 
130. What case do verbs relating to the senses govern? [The 
genitive.] 131. What exception is there? [Verbs that denote 
sight, which take the acc.] 132. By what prepos., understood, 
might the gen. sometimes be supposed governed? [By ἕνεκα, On 
account of.| 133. After what verbs does the gen. frequently 
stand in this way ? [After words compounded witha privative. | 

§ 26.—134. Mention two large classes of verbs that govern 
the gen. [Most verbs that express such notions as freeing from, 
keeping off from, ceasing from, deviating or departing from, &c. 
govern the gen. Most verbs that express remembering or for- 
getting ; caring for or despising ; sparing ; aiming at or desir 
ing ; ruling over or excelling ; accusing of or condemning, διὸ 
govern the genitive ; but not without many exceptions. ] 

§ 27.—135. What case does καταγιγνώσκω (condemn) take 
of the charge or punishment? and what case of the person? 
[καταγιγνώσκω has accus. of the charge or punishment ; gen. of 
verson.| 136. May we say, τοῦτο κατηγορεῖται αὐτοῦ, this is 
laid to his charge? [Yes.] 

§ 28.—137. In what case does the price or value stand ? [The 
price or value is put in the genitive.] 138. In what case is the 
thing for which we exchange another, put? [The thing for 
which we exchange another is put in the genitive.] 139. What 
case of a noun of time answers to when? and what to since or 
within what time? [The gen.] 140. In what case is the part by 
which a person is led, got hold of, &c., put? [The gen. expresses 
the part by which a person leads, takes, or gets hold of any thing. ] 

§ 29.—141. In what case is the thing with which another is 
compared, put when 7, than, is omitted? [In the genitive,] 142. 
Uow is ‘greater than ever’ expressed ? [By using αὐτός before 


QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 189 


the gen. of the reflexive pronoun.] 143. How .s ‘too great’ ex- 
pressed ? [70 great, &c. is expressed by the comparative with ἢ 
κατά before a substantive ; ἢ ὥστε before a verb in the infinitive. ] 
144, STILL GRZATER: MUCH GREATER? [éze μείζων: πολλῷ 
μείζων. 

§ 30.—145. How are two comparatives, joined together by 
jj, to be translated ? [By more than, or rather than, with the pos- 
itive.] 146. By what words are superlatives strengthened? [By 
ὡς, ὅτι, ὅπως, Ts ἄς. 147. What force have εἴ σις καὶ ἄλλος, 
si quis alius, and εἷς ἀνήρ, unus omnium maxime? [The force of 
superlatives.] 148. What case do περιττός, and adjectives in 
-πλάσιος, govern? [The genitive. ] 

§ 31.—149. What does the dat. express? [The person 0 or 
for whom a thing isdone.}] 150. What words does it follow? 
[Words that express union or coming together, and those that 
express likeness or identity.] 151. In what case is the instru- 
ment, &c. put? [The instrument, the manner, and the cause, are 
put in the dative.] 152. In what case is the definite time-when 
put? [In the dative.] 153. Does the dat. ever express the agent? 
[Yes.] 154. After what words is this most common? [After 
the perfect pass. and verbals in τέος, tog.) 155. What case do 
verbs of reproaching take, besides a dat. of the person? [Verbs 
of reproaching, &c. take acc. of the thing, as well as dat. of per- 
son, especially when it is a neut. pronoun. | 

§ 32.—156. What does the middle voice denote? [That the 
ayent does the action upon himself; or for his own advantage ; 
or that he gets it done for his own advantage.| 157. What are 
the tenses that have the middle meaning when the verb has itat 
all? ({Pres., imperf., perf., and pluperf. of the passive form ; 
and the futures and aorists mid.] 158. Has the aor. 1. of the 
pass. form ever a mid. meaning? [Yes.] 

ᾧ 33.—159. What verbs of the middle form must be con- 
sidered simply as deponents? [Middle forms, of which there is 
uo active.} 160. Mention some aor. 1. pass. with mid. meaning. 
(κατεκλίϑην (i). ἀπηλλάγην, ἐπεραιώϑην, ἐφοβήϑην, ἐκοιμή- 
ony, ἠσκήϑην.} 161. Mention some fut. 1. mid. with pass. mean- 
ing. [ὠφελήσομαι, ὁμολογήσομαι, φυλάξομαι, ϑρέψομαι.] 162. 
How is ‘ by,’ to express the agent afier the pass. verb, translated 4 
[By ὑπό with gen.; also by maga and πρός with gen.] 


ee ee 


AS RE a σΟΧ π΄, τ΄ 


190 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 


§ 34.—163. What signification does the perf. 2. (commonly 
called perf. mid.) prefer? [The tntrans. signif.} 164. Has itever 
the pure reflexive meaning of the middle ? [No. ] 

ᾧ 35.—165. What does the fut. 3. express? [A future action 
continuing in its effects.) 166. What notions does it express be- 
sides that of a future action continuing in its effects? [The 
speedy completion of an action, or the certainty of its completion. | 
167. What verbs have the fut. 3. for their regular future? [Those 
perfects that are equivalent to a present with a new meaning: 
6. 5. μέμνημαι, κέχτημαι.)] 168. What answers to the fut. 3. in 
the active voice? [ἔσομαι with perf. participle.] 169. What is 
generally preferred to the opt. and subj. of the perf. ; [The perf. 
part. with sinv or ὦ. 170. In what verbs is the imperat. pert. 
principally used? [In those verbs whose perfects have the mean- 
ing of a present: μέμνησο, &c.] 171. What does the 3 pers. 
imperat. of the perf. pass. express? [It is a strong expression 
for let it be done, &c.] 172. How is a wish expressed in Greek ? 
[εἴϑε with the optative—the optative alone—or wqedor,” ἐς, &, 
alone, or with εἴϑε, εἰ γάρ or ὡς, and followed by the infinitive. ] 
173. What mood and tense are used with εἴϑε, if the wish has not 
been, and now cannot be, realized ? {The andic. of aorist or im- 
perf. according as the time to which the wish refers is past or 
present. | 

ᾧ 36.—174. Mention a use of the infinitive that the Greek and 
English have, but the Latin has not. [[ is used to express the 
purpose.| 175. What does the particle ooze express ? [A con- 
sequence. | 176. How is so—as to expressed ? [ So—as to; ὥστε 
with infinitive] 177. How is so—that expressed? So—that ; 
ὥστε with infinitive or indicative. ] 

§ 37.--178. What does the infin. with the article in the gen. 
express ? [The infinitive with the article in the gen. sometimes 
denotes a motive or purpose. | 179. When the infin. has a subject 
of its own, in what case does it regularly stand ? [In the accusa- 
tive.] 180. What prepos. with the infin. is equivalent to a sen 
tence introduced by because? [διά.}] 181. When is the subject 
of the infinitive generally not expressed ? [When the subject of 
the infinitive belongs to, and is expressed with, the former verb. ] 


® Debuit. 


QJESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 19] 


182. When the subject of the w/fin. is omitted, because expressea 
with the former verb, in what case is the noun after the infin. 
generally put? [In the same case that the subject of the infini- 
tive stands in in the other clause.| 183. What is this construction 
called? [ Attraction. ] 

ᾧ 38.—184. May attraction take piace when the infin. is in- 
troduced by the art. or ὥστε) [Yes.] 

§ 39.—185. What kind of sentences may be translated into 
Greek by a participle? [Relative sentences, and sentences in- 
troduced by when, after, if, since, because, although, &c.] .860. 
How may the English participial substantive, under the govern- 
ment of a preposition, often be translated? [By a participle in 
agreement.] 187. How may the first of two verbs connected by 
and, often be translated into Greek? [By a participle] 

§ 40.—188. What participle often expresses a purpose? 
[The participle of the future often expresses a purpose.| 189. 
Mention some verbs that take the participle where we should use 
the infin., a participial substantive, or ‘that. [Many verbs that 
signify emotions, perception by the senses, knowledge, recollection, 
cessation or continuance, &c., take the participle, where we should 
use the infinitive mood, the participial substantive, or ‘ that.’ 

ᾧ 41.—190. By what are φϑάνω, come, or get before, and 
λανϑάνω, am concealed, generally rendered? [By adverbs.] 
191. Mention the.adverbs and phrases by which λανϑάνω may 
be rendered. [Without knowing it ; unconsciously, unknown to 
myself ; without being observed ; secretly ; without being seen or 
discovered.| 192. How may λαϑών be rendered? [By secretly, 
without being observed, seen, &c.] 193. How φϑάσας or ἀνύσας ? 
[ Quickly ; ai once, immediately.] 194. When φϑάνω and λανϑάνω 
are translated by adverbs, how must the participles with which 
they are connected, be translated? [By verbs. | 


(Genitive Absolute, §c.) 


ὁ 42.--195. Which case is put absolutely in Greek? [The 
genitive.] 196. What does the participle, put absolutely, express ? 
[The time, or generally any such relation to the principal sen- 
tence, as we should express by when, after, since, as, because, 
though. if, &c.] 197. In what case do the particip.es of imper- 


eo 


a a TL 


192 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 


sonal verbs stand absolutely? [In the nominative; of course 
without a noun, and in the neuter gender.] 198. When the time 
relates to a person, what construction is used instead of the gen. 
absolute? [ἐπί is then generally expressed.] 199. How is a 
motive, which is attributed to another person, generally expres- 
sed? [By the particle ὡς with the gen. or acc. absolute. ] 


(The Relative.) 


ᾧ 43.--200. What does the relative often introduce? [A 
cause, ground, motive, or design of what is stated.] 201. What 
use of the relative is less common in Greek than Latin? [That 
of merely connecting a sentence with the one before it.] 202. In 
which clause is the antecedent often expressed? [In the relative 
clause.] 203. Where does the relat. clause often stand, when 
this is the case? [Before the principal clause.] 204. With what 
does the relative often agree in case? [With the antecedent in 
the principal clause.] 265. What is this called? [Attraction of 
the Relative.| 206. When the relative is attracted, where is the 
antecedent often placed? [In the relative clause, but in the case 
in which it would stand in the principal clause. ] 

ᾧ 44.--207. In such a sentence as “ the fear, which we call 
bash fulness,” should which agree with fear or with bash fulness ? 
[With bashfulness.] 208. Explain ἔστιν οἵ. [It is equivalent to 
ἔγιοι, some, and may be declined throughout.] 209. Whatis the 
Greek for sometimes? [ἔστιν ore.]--somewhere? [ἔστιν onov.] 
210. What is the English of ἐφ᾽ @ or ἐφ᾿ @ze? [On condition 
that.|—of dv ov? [ Because, for.]--of εἴ τις 7) [ Whosoever ; 
εἴ τι, whatsoever.] 211. By what parts of the verb is ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or 
ᾧτε followed? [By the fudure indic. or the infin.] 


§ 45.--212. Give the English of τοῦ οἵου σοῦ ἀνδρός. [Of 
such aman as you.] 213. How may this construction be ex- 
plained? [ἀνδρὸς τοιούτου, οἷος σὺ εἶ.) 214. What words does 
ὅσος follow, when it has the meaning of very? [Such words ag 
ϑαυμαστός, πλεῖστος, ἄφϑονος, Kc. | te 

ᾧ 46.—215. What is the construction of οὐδεὶς ὅστις ov? 


QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 193 


{ The declinable words are pui under the immediate government 
ς΄ the verb. | 

§ 47.--216. What tenses follow μέλλω in the infin, ? [The 
future, present, or aorist.] 217. Which infin. is the most common 
after μέλλω, and which the least? [The future infin. is the most, 
the aorist the least common. ] 

§ 48.—218. What mood or tense follows ὅπως, when it re- 
lates to the future? [The subj. or the future indic.] 219. May it 
reiain them in connection with past time? [Yes.] 220. Is the 
verb on which ὅπως &c. depends, ever omitted? [Yes: the con- 
struction is equivalent to an energetic imperative :----ὅρα or ὁρᾶτε 
may be supplied.] 221. With what mood or tense is ov μή used? 
[With the fut. indic. or aor. subj.] 222. In what sense ? [As an 
emphatic prohibition or denial.] 223. According to Dawes, 
what aorists were not used in the subj. with ὕπως and ov μή 1 
[The subjunctive of the aor. 1. act. and mid.] 224. Is this rule 
correct? [No.] 225. What is Buttmann’s opinion? [That the 
subj. of the aor. 2. was employed with a kind of predilection, and 
that, when the verb had no such tense, the fut. indic. was used 
in preference to the subj. of the aor. 1.] 

§ 49.—226. How is μή used after expressions of fear, &c.3 
With the subjunctive or indic.] 227. When is the indic. with 
uy used in expressions of fear? [When the speaker wishes to 
ntimate his conviction that the thing feared, &c. has or will really 
come to pass.] 228. How does it happen that μὴ οὐ sometimes 
stands with a verb in the subjunctive, but without a preceding 
verb? [The notion of fear is often omitted before μὴ ov, the verb - 
being then generally in the subj.] 229. After what kind of ex: 
pressions is μὴ ov used with the infin.? [After many negative 
expressions. |* 229. Is it ever used with the participle or infin. ? 
and, if so, when? [μὴ ov is sometimes used with the participle 

and with ὥστε and énfin., after negative expressions. ] 

ᾧ 50.—231. When is μή used with relative sentences, purti- 
ciples, adjectives, &c.? [Whenever the negative does not di 
rectly and simply deny an assertion with respect to some particu 
lar mentioned person or thing.] 232. Does the infin. generally 
take μή or ov? [μή.] 233. When does it take ov? [When 
»pirions or assertions of another person are stated in sermone ob- 


* See πιο (2) (8). 


-- > - 


ἌΝ ΠΟ 


pet one ete τὸν 


eS ene awe 


Sage τος are age SE mae 


s (Sane eS 
—= <= = 


=r 


x 
i 
τ ) 
a 
a 
Ἢ 
ΤῊ} 
ἐν 
ΝΗ; 
ΠῚ ἡ 
1 : Ι 
ἢ 
a 
4 
iid 
ry 
En: 
ot 
th 
Te π| 
{ 
Pa iit 
1} 
WA 
\ Sia 
ἬΝ} 
q aS 
i 
ν ἢ 
iy 
᾿ 
Mer fat! 
ΠῚ: 
mt) 
ἡ Nye 
ὃ 
{De 
f +s 
τι 
ὶ ti 
ΤῊ 
mah 
ΜΗ 
ie 
he 
ἡ ἢ 
μὴ ΠΌΤ 
he it 
© ᾿ 
[2] : 
& Ἶ 
᾿ 
νι ye 
Pe iit 
Σ ΜΠ ἢ] 
1 aa 
HE 
mers i 
"ἀὶ 
ἜΗΝ 
Sk ae 
4 
ἷς ; 
¢ 
Al | 
ih 
© i tess 
F if 
Meaty ἢ 
Sie 
X 
et 
rf han 
144 
ΜΝ 
an > 
oti 
ad 
su 
᾿ 
i 
ni 
Hit} 
mn 
it, 
ty 
1 
t 
j 
’ 


194 QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 


liquo.) 234. When should μή follow more? and when ov? 
[With ὥστε, the infinitive takes μή, the indicative οὐ. 

ᾧ 51.—235. What case do some adverbs govern? [The 
same case as the adjectives from which they are derived.] 
236. How is ὡς sometimes used? [As a preposition== πρός. 
237. When only can ὡς be used as a prepos.? [It is only joined 
to persons.] 238. What mood do ἄρχι, μέχρι, ἕως, ἔστε take ? 
| The subj. or opt. when there is any uncertainty ; the indic. when 
not.] 239. Does πρὶν ἂν ἔλϑω relate to the past or the future? 
[To the future.] 240. How is ‘before I came’ expressed ? [πρὶν 
ἢ ἐλϑεῖν ἐμέ: πρὶν ἐλϑεῖν ἐμέ: or πρὶν ἦλθον ἐγώ. 241. Is 7 
ever omitted before the infin. after πρίν ἢ [Υ88; in Attic Greek 
nearly always. | 

ᾧ 52.—-242, In what kind of questions is ἄρα generally 
used ? [In questions that imply something of uncertainty, doubt, 
or surprise.| 243. What interrog. particles expect the answer 
*Yes?? [The answor ‘Yes’ is expected by --ἀρ᾿ ov; ἦ γάρ; 
οὗ; οὔκουν; ἄλλο τι ἧ ;}] 244. What expect the answer ‘No’? 

. [The answer ‘ No’ is expected by,—aga μή; ἦ mov; num forte? 


ϑ)ιή or μῶν ;] 245. What particles give an ironical force to ov? 


δή, δή που. 246. Does ov expect ‘yes’ or ‘no’ for answer? 

[ov expects yes; μή, no.] 247. In what kind of questions are 
εἶτα, ἔπειτα used? [Such as express astonishment and dis- 
pleasure.) 248. What words are used as a simple interrog. par- 
ticle? [ἄλλο τι 7.] 249. Render τί παϑών ;---τί μαϑών ; 
[τί παϑών ; what possesses you to... &c.2?—zi μαϑών ; what 
induces you to... &c.? 

ᾧ 53.—250. What are the proper forms of pronouns and 
adverbs for indirect questions? [Those which are formed from 
the direct interrogatives by the prefixed relative syllable 6—.] 
251. Are the simple interrogatives ever used in indirect ques- 
tions? [Yes.] 252. Are the relatives ever so used? [Yes; 
but very seldom.] 253. When the person addressed repeats the 
question, what forms does he use? [The forms beginning with 
o—.] 254. When the pron. or noun is the acc. after one verb, 
and the nom. before the next, which case is generally omitted 7 
[The nominative. ] 

ᾧ 54.—255. By what particles are direct double questions 
asked ? [By πότερον, or πότερα,---ἥ, less commonly by dga—t.] 


QUESTIONS ON THE SYNTAX. 195 


256. By what particles are indirect double questions asked? 
Γ[εἴτε---εἴτε, εἰ---ἥ, πότερον---ἦ.} 

§ 55.—257. After what verbs is et used for Ott, that? [Af- 
ter ϑαυμάζω, and some other verbs expressive of feelings. | 
258. After what verbs has δὲ the force of whether? [After verbs 
of seeing, knowing, considering, asking, saying, trying, ἄς. 
259. When is ἐάν used in this way? [When the question re- 
lates to an expected case that remains to be proved.] 

ᾧ 56.—260. How can an interrogative sentence be con- 
densed in Greek? [By attaching the interrogative to a partici- 
ple, or using it in an oblique case.) 261. What clause may thus 
be got rid of? [A relative clause attached to an interrogative 
one. 

r 57.262. What is 7 μήν 1 [A solemn form of assevera- 
tion.] 263. When is the propos. σύν omitted? [Before αὐτῷ, 
αὐτῇ, &c. which then= together with, with.| 264. How is ἀμφό- 
τερον used? [ἀμφότερον is used adverbially, or elliptically, by 
the poets, for both ; as well—as, &c.] 265. How ἀμφότερα 
[In reference to two words, without being made to conform to 
them in case.] 266. What force has καί, when it refers to ἄλ- 
log? [The force of especially, in particular.| 267. Explain the 
use of the part. fut. with ἔρχεσϑαι, &e. [ἔρχεσϑαι, ἱέναι, with 
part. fut., is, to be going to, or on the point of.| 268. How is 
ἔχω sometimes used with a past partic.? [As an emphatic cir- 
cumlocution.] 269. How is it used with ληρεῖν, &c. ? [ἔχω with 
the second pers. of ληρεῖν, παίζειν, φλυᾶρεῖν, δυο. is used to make 
a good-humoured observation.] 270. How is φέρων used in 
some expressions? [φέρων appears redundant in some expres- 
sions, but denotes a vehemence of purpose, not allogether free 
from blame.] ΠΥ͂Ρ ᾿ 

§ 58.—271. To what is δίκαιός εἰμι equivalent ? [To d&- 
καιόν ἐστιν, ἐμέ, &c.] 272. How is ὅσον used ? [ὁσον is used 
elliptically with the infin.] 273, What words are followed by 77 
[Words that imply a comparison: e. g. φϑάνειν, διαφέρειν, evay- 
τίος, διπλάσιος, ἴδιος, ὕπερϑεν, πρίν.] 274. After what phrases 
‘sa tense of ποιεῖν omitted? [After οὐδὲν ἄλλο 7—, ἄλλο τι 
ἥ--; τι ἄλλο ἤ--- ; &c.] 275. By what area person’s quoted 
words introduced? [By ὅτι.) 276. How is the aor. used with 
εἰ ov? [For the present.] 


INDEX I. 


gyOss. Look under ‘ am’ for adjectives, phrases, &c. with to be. 
F. M.=future middle. 
(1) implies, that the pupil is to ask himself how the word is cone 
jugated or declined. 


A.A Jeet 

A, = a certain, τίς, 12 

About (of time), ὑπό (acc.), 
326. 

- (after to fear, to be 
at ease, &c.), περί (dat.), 
283". 

——- (after talk, fear, con- 
tend), περί (dat.), some- 
times ἀμφέ (dat.), 283". 

-- (after to be employ- 
ed), περί, or ἀμφί, with 
acc., 283* 

Abrocomas, 229, note q. 
᾿Αβροκόμας, G. a. 

Abstain from, 
(gen.), 138. 


ἀπέχομαι 


: wemust—, 
ἀφεκτέον ἐστι, With gen. 
According to reason, κατὰ 

λόγον, 274. 
Accuse, xazyyooeivt (proper- 


ly, speak against) τινός, 
or τινός τι, 156.—éyxadeiy 
(properly, czte a person; 
call him into court) τινί 
and τινί zt,183. Both are 
judicial words, but used 
with the same latitude as 
our ‘accuse.’ Of the two, 
ἐγκαλεῖν Should probably 
be preferred, if the charge 
relates to private matters. 
(V.) 

Accustom, ἐθίζω, 52. 
(Am accustomed, εἴϑισ 

μαι or εἴωϑα, 52.) 

Acquire, xraéouou, 87. 

Act, ποιέω, 60. 

—- insolently towards, ὑβρέ 
ζειν εἴς τινα, 128. 

-—- strangely, ϑαυμαστὸι 
ποιεῖν, 259. 


—- unjustly (= injure), ads- 


t The constructions of κατηγορεῖν are very numerous: κατηγορῶ σοῦ 
τινός and τι; OF σέ τινος and τι ; OF σοῦ (and σε) περί τινος ; and κα-ῃηγορῶ 


κατὰ cov. 


Ῥ 


198 INDEX I. 


κεῖν twa and τι (also εἰς, 
πρός, περί tiva), 138. 
Admire, ϑαυμάζω, F. M. 
generally, 8. 
Adopt a resolution, βουλεύεσ- 
Oat, 190. 
Adorn, κοσμέω, 206. 
Advance, προχωρέω, 274. 
Affair, πρᾶγμα, τό, 8. 
Affliction, πάϑος, τό, 150. 
Afford, παρέχω, 214. 
After, μετά (acc.), 293", 
a long time, διὰ πολ- 
Lov χρόνου, 270, 
some time, διαλιπὼν 
χρόνον, 235. 


διά χρόνου, 
270. = 
- our former tears, ἐκ 
τῶν πρόσϑεν δακρύων, 231. 
the manner of ἃ dog, 
κυνὸς δίκην, 250. 
Again, αὖϑις, 100. 
Against (after to march), 
ἐπί, acc. 24. εἰς, 259. 

(in violation of), 
παρά, 299, 

(after commit an 
injury), εἰς OF περί, With 
acc., 138. 

moog (acc.), 319. 

-- (after verbs of speak- 
ing, &c.), xara genit., 
274. 

Age (a person’s), ἡλικία, ἧ, 
144, 
Agreeable, ἡδύς, 214. 


Agreeable: if it is—, εἰ σοι 
βουλομένῳ ἐστί, 206. 

Agricultural population, oi 
ἀμφὶ γῆν ἔχοντες, 278. 

Aid, ἐπικουρέω, dat., also acc. 
of the thing, 239. 

Aim at, στοχάζομαι, fen, 
τ χάζομαι, gen, 

Alas, φεῦ,----οἴμοι, 144. 

Alexander, ᾿λέξανδρος, 24. 

All, ὁ πᾶς, or πᾶς 6—. 
πάντες. See note on 44, 
46. 

— but (as-much-as-not), 
ὅσον ov, 125. 

— day, ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέ. 
ραν, 259. 

Alliance. See Form. 

Allow to taste, γεύω, 150. 

to be done with im- 

punity, περιορᾷν (-ιδεῖν, 
-όψεσϑαι), with inf. of 
thing to be prevented ; 
the partic. ofa wrong to 
be revenged, 331. See 
note °, 

Almost, ὀλίγου δεῖν, ΟΥ ὀλιγον 
only, 283. 

Already, ἤδη, 65. 

Also, xai, 92. 

Although, καίπερ, 175, 


(a.) 


Am able, δύναμαι (possum) 
87..--- οἷός τέ εἰμι (queo), 
283. See Can. 


INDEX I. 


Am (an) actual murderer, 
αὐτόχειρ εἰμί, 299. 


(.) 


—- adapted for, οἷός εἰμι,) Am dishonoured by, ἀτιμά. 


283. 


ζομαι πρός τινος, 319. 


— angry with, ὀργίζομαι,  ---- distant from, ἀπέχω, 138 


dat. 183. δὶ ὀργῆς ἔχειν, 
270. 
—- ashamed, αἰσχύνομαι, 
239. 
—- at a loss, ἀπορέω, 100. 
[See 98, 99.] 
—- at dinner, δειπνέω, 288. 
—- at enmity with, δὲ ἔχ- 
ϑρας γίγνεσϑαί τινι, 270. 
—-at leisure, σχολάζω, 112. 
—-atliberty. See 249. ὃ. 
-- awake, ἐγρήγορα, 193. 
._—- aware, μαγνϑάνω (?), 239 


(b.) 
Am banished, φεύγειν, 270. 
—- broken, xazéaya, 193. 
—- by nature, πέφῦκα, ἔφυν, 


214. 
(c.) 


Am come, ἥκω, with mean- 
9 4 
ing of perf. 206. 


52. 
—- confident, πέποιϑα, 193. 


—- congealed, πέπηγα; 193. 
—- conscious, σύνοιδα ἐμαν- 
τῷ, 239. 


—- doing well, εὖ πράττω, 8. 
ill, κακῶς πράττω, 


8. 


(e.) 
Amevidently, &c. See 239. 


(f) 

Am far from, πολλοῦ δέω, 
283". 

--- fixed, πέπηγα, 193 

—- fond of, ἀγαπάω, 52. 

—- fortunate, εὐτυχέω, 92. 


(8-) 

Am general, στρατηγέω, 52. 
—- glad, ἥδομαι, dat., 20. 
—- going (to), μέλλω (aug- 
ment?), 283*. 

—- gone, oiyouo(?), perfect 
meaning, 206. - 
-- grateful for, χάριν οἶδα 
(gen. of thing, dat. of 
pers.), 222. [for οἶδα, see 
73. 


(h.) 


Am here, πάρειμι, 52. 


— contemporary with, xa- (i.) 


U 
τὰ τὸν αὐτὸν YOOVOY γενεσ- 


Gat, 183. 


Am 1...? (in douwbifu. 


questions) 137, note e. 


grit ith, ἀγαπάω : , 
contented with, ay "| __ ill (of a disease), κάμνω 


with ave. or dat., 52. 


t Or οἷόστε (oiécr’). 


200 INDEX 1. 


(laboro) ; καμοῦμαι, κέκ- 
μηκα, ἔκαμον, 183 

-— in my right mind, σω- 
φρονέω, 125. 

— in a passion or rage, ya- 
λεπαίνω, dat., 183. 

—-in safety, ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ 
εἶμι, 299. 

—- in the habit of perform- 
Ing, πρακτικός (εἰμι), With 
gen. See 149. 

—- indignant, ἀγανακτέω, 
337. 

-— informed of, αἰσϑάνο- 
pos (?), 190 


(1.) 
Am likely, μέλλω (7), 283", 
—- lost, στεροῦμαι, 168". r. 


(m.) 


Am mad, μαίνομαι (1), 125. 
—— my own master, ἐμαυ- 
τοῦ εἶμι, 162". 4. 


(n.) 
Am named after, ὄνομα ἔχω 
ἐπί τινος, 288. 
—— hear, ὀλίγου δέω, OF odi- 
you only, 283%. 
——next to, goua, gen. 
149.4. ΝῊ 
-——not a man to, 283. ὃ. 
afraid of, ϑαῤῥέω 
(acc.), 138. 


(0.) 


Am of opinion, νομέζω, 52. 


Am of service to, ὠφελέω 

(acc.), 82. 
a character (to), εἰμι 

οἷος, 283. ὃ. (to), ote 

— off, οἴχομαι (?), perf. 
meaning, 206. 

—— on my guard, φυλάττεσ- 
Gat, acc. 190. 

—on his side, εἰμὶ πρός 
(gen.), 319. 

—on an equal footing 
With, ὅμοιός εἰμι, 227. ὃ. 


(P-) 
Am pained at ἀλγέω, 20. 
—— persuaded, πέποιϑα, 193. 
—pleased with, ἥδομαι, 
dat. 20. 
—— present, πάρειμι, 52. 
— produced. See 214. 
—— prosperous, εὐτυχέω, 92. 
—— punished, δίκην διδόναι, 
or δοῦναι: gen. of thing ; 


dat. of person by whom, 
228. 


(s.) 
Am safe, ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ εἰμι. 
— slow to, &c., σχολῇ (by 
leisure), with a verb, 112, 
— suffering (from a dis- 
ease). See ‘am ill of.’ 
—— surprised at, ϑαυμάζα 
(F. M.), 8. 


(t.) 
Am thankful for, χάριν olde, 
gen. of thing, 222. Fo 
οἶδα see 73, note q. 


Am the slave of, δουλεύω, 


— there, πάρειμι, 92. 
— to, μέλλω (2), 283" 


Am undone, ὅλωλα, ἀπόλω- 


--- unseen by, λα»ϑάνω (7), 


Am vexed, ἄχϑομαι (?) (dat. 


INDEX 


dat. 359. 


(u.) 
λα, 193. 


ace. 154. 


I. 201 


Apart, χωρίς, 309. 
Apollo, *Amoiiow (3), 341. 
Appear (with part.), φαίνο- 


μαι, 239. 


Apt to do, or perform, zgax: 


τικός (gren.), 150. 
govern, ἀρχικός (9 6.) 
160. 


Arbitration, δίαιτα, 132. 
Are there any whom. .3 


269. d. 


(v.) Arise, ἐγείρομαι (pass.), 193. 


Arms, ὅπλα, 168". 


but ἐπί inconstruction ex- | Army, στράτευμα, τό, 24. 


plained in 19”. c), 20. 


Arouse, ἐγείρω (perf. with 


Attic redupl.), 193. 


(w.) Arrange, τάσσω (later Attic 


Am wholly wrapt in, πρὸς 
τούτῳ ohog εἰμί, 319. 
— wise (=prudent), σω- 
φρονέω, 125. 
— with you, πάρειμι, 92. 
— within a little, ὀλίγου 
δέω, 233%. 
— without fear of, ϑαῤῥέω, 
acc. 138. 
Ambassador, πρέσβυς, 259. 
Ambitious, φιλότεμος, 214. 
Among the first, translated 
by ἀρξάμενος (having be- 
gun). See 100. 
And that too, καὶ ταῦτα, 206. 
—_— yet, εἶτα, ἔπειτα, 315. 


—— nevertheless, εἶτα, ἔπει- | - 


ταί dL5. 
Ancestor, πρόγονος, 156. 
Animal, ζῶον, 65. 
Annoy, λῦύπέω, 41. 


τάττω), 90.---κοσμέω, δια- 
κοσμέω (tO arrange, with 
a view toa pleasing ap- 
pearanceofelegance,sym- 
metry apt arrangement, 
&c.), 206. 
Arrive, ἀφικνέομαι (3), 144. 
first, φϑῆναι (3) ἀφ- 
ικόμενος, 242. ὦ 
-- , but only, &c., 
358. b. 
Art, τέχνη, 214. 
As he was, 351. 
— his custom was. See 
Custom. 
-— many as, ὅσοι, 175. 
possible, ὅσοι 
πλεῖστοι, 174. 6. 
-— silently as possible, σιγῇ 
ὡς ἀνυστόν, 174. ὃ. 
— farastheyareconcerned, 


Answer, ἀποχρίνομαι (?),278. 
0» 


τὸ ἐπὶ τούτοις εἶναι, 206. 


202 


INDEX I. 


As far at leastas .hisis con-| At. Not at all (οὐδέν τι). 


cerned, τούτου ye ἕγεκα, 
250. 
As far as depends on this, 
τούτου γε ἕνεκα, 250. 
— as much as any body. 
See 100. 
— the saying is, τὸ λεγόμε- 
vor, 137, d. ae a 
— possible ( after superla- 
tives), ὡς, ὅτι, 171. 
— he possibly could, 174. c. 
— fast as they could, ὡς τά- 
χους εἶχον, 278. 
-— soon as he was born, εὐ- 
ϑὺς γενόμενος, 309. 
— long as, ἔστε, 306. 
— to, ὥστε, with inf., 211. 
— (before partic.), ἅτε, ἅτε 
δή, 242. a. 
Ask, ἠρόμην, aor. 2: ἐρωτάω 
used for the other tenses, 
73. 
— for aizém (two accusa- 
tives), 87. 
Assist in the defence of, Bor- 
Ow, dat. 121. 
Assistance. SeeF ly orRun. 
Associate with, ὁμτλέω, dat. 
183. 
Assuredly (in protestations), 
ἦ μήν, 343. 


270. 


λοῦ, 270. 
— any time, ποτέ. 
— ease about, ϑαῤῥεῖν περί 
Osge 9 VaCe Qt, 
— first, ἀρχόμενος, 235. 
— home, ἔνδον, 125. 
— last, τὸ τελευταῖον, 34*; 
τελευτῶν, 235. 
— least, γέ, 73. 
— once, ἤδη, 65—How to 
translate it by the partic. 
φϑάσας, or by οὐκ ἂν φϑα- 
vows; see 242, 6. ἢ. 
— the beginning, ἀρχόμενος, 


235. 
— the suggestion of others, 


an ἀνδρῶν ἑτέρων, 243. 
Athens, ’Adjvat, 15. 

(O) Athenians, ὦ ἄγδρες 
᾿ϑηναῖοι, 337. 

Attach great importance to, 
πρὸ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι, 243. 
-- περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι οἵ 
ἡγεῖσϑαι, 283", 

Attempt, πειράομαι, 121.— 
(= dare) τολμάω, 239. 
Attend to, τὸν vovr προσέχειν, 


331. 


(will not), od μή, 
5875. ) μη 
Astonished (to be), ϑαυμάζω 


ἃ master, εἰς δι- 
δασκάλου φοιτᾷν, 259. 


(F. M.) Avoid = fly from, φεύγειν, 8. 


At, 319. 


ra 
B 4 th jt 


—all, ἀρχήν οἱ τὴν ἀρχήν, Bad, κακός, 20. | 


92, 132. 


Banished (tobe), φεύγειν, 270 


— alittle distance, δὲ ὀλίγου. 


— a great distance, διὰ πολ- 


IN. #X I. 908 


Banishment, φυγή, 156. 


Barbarian, βάρβαρος, 132. 


Bare, ψιλός, 235. 
Bathe, λούομαι, 188 (1). 
Battle, μάχῃ, 73. 

Base, αἰσχρός, 35. 


Bear, φέρειν (7), 60.—aveyo- 


Bethink myself, φροντίζω, 
288. 

Between, μεταξύ, 28. 
Beyond, παρά (acc.) 299. 
Bid, κελεύω, 112. 

Bird, ὄρνις. See 15, note g 
——: young—, γεοσσός,2 14 


μαι (-Ξ endure) refers to 
our power of enduring 
(labours, insults, &c.), 
214.--τολμάω (=susti- 
nere), to bear to do what 
requires courage, 239, 
note y. 
Beautifal, καλός, φν 
Beauty, κάλλος το, Ὁ. 
Because [δὰ #6, &¢.), 221. 
b. av? ὧν, 267. 
Become, γίγνομαι (?), 15. 
Before,t πρίν or πριν 7, 307. 
(= in preference to), 
noo (gen.), 243; ἀντί, Fen. 
213. e. 
Beget, γεννάω, 239. 
Begin, ἄρχομαι, 100. 
Beginning, ἀρχή; 132, 
Behave ill to, κακῶς mover, 
acc. 35. 
Behold, ϑεάομαι, 87. 
Belong to, gen. with εἶναι. 
Belly, γαστήρ, 7 (7), 235. 
Benefit, ὠφελέω (acc.), 82. 
Beseech, δέομαι, 150, (gen. 
149. δ.) δεήσομαι, ἐδεήϑην. 


Besides, ἐπί(ἀαί.), 288. παρά 


(acc.), 299. 


Birth, γένος, τό, 150. 
Black, μέλας, 87. ae 
Blame, péupopas, dat., ἐγκα 


λέω, dat. 183. 


Body, σῶμα, 138. 


Boldly, ϑαῤῥῶν, part. 331. 
Both, ἄμφω, ἀμφότερος. See 
28 


Both—and, καί----καί, OF τὲ 
—xai, 112. 
Both in other respects—and 
also, ἄλλως τὸ καὶ; 278. 
Boy, παῖς,1ὅ. 
Brave, ἀνδρεῖος, 175. ; ; 
-- δ danger, κινδυνεύειν κιν- 
δύνον, 131. d. 
Bread, ἄρτος, 299. : 
Break, ἄγνυμι, κατάγνυμι (7), 
193. Fata 
——(alaw), παραβαίνω, 228. 
Breast, στέρνον, 193. 
Bring, ἄγω, 341. 
assistance to, ἐπικουρέῶ, 
dat. also acc. of the thing, 
239. 
forth, τίκτω, (7), 15. 
up, τρέφω, 190.---παι- 
δεύω, 214. ; 
τρέφω relates to physt- 
cal, παιδεύω to moral 


Best, see Good, 35. 
Better, 


" . , 
education: 1. Θ. τρέφω 


+ How to translate ‘ before’ by φθάνω͵ see 242, d. | 


\ 
nN 


a “τὸν... ὕ.-.----ς---. .. 


ee Φῳ"-.- κω ρας, 


ne ne 
--- ws = 


a aad mi a ee RA Nag = Silage” Daly ea 
+ Se o i = - 


“ pfs. 
Be οι, 
= se - 


Calumniously : to speak — 


INDEX If. 


to the body, παιδεύω 


to the mind. 


—— bad news, VEOTEQOY τι 


ἀγγέλλειν, 318, £. 
rother, ἀδελφός, 20. 
Burn out, ἐκκαίω, 341, καύσω, 
0.---Ο-Ἡὐἰχαύϑην. 
But, δέ--(ἃ μέν should be in 
the former Clause), 38, 
note h. 


— for, εἰ μὴ διά, with ace. 
125. 
Buy, ἀγοράζω, 163. 
‘tae, with gen, of 
B agent, 326. 
y πρός, after to be prais- 
ed or blamed by. 
-~ (=close by), πρός, 319. 
— (=cause), ὑπό, gen. and 
after passive verb, 326. 
— Jupiter, &c. my Mia, νὴ 
tov Aia, 341. 
τ the hands of, ὑπό, Zen. 
326. 
—the father’s side, πρὸς 
πατρός, 319. 

— fives, &c., ἀνὰ πέντε, 259, 
— what conduct? κί ἃν 
ποιοῦντες ; 340. a. 

— compulsion, iz’ avayune, 

326. 


Cat berreen 
Calculate, λογίζεσϑαι πρὸς 
ὁᾳυτόν, 319, 


of, λοιδορέομαι, dat. 183. 


The former relates te 
power, the latter to con. 
dition or qualification. 
Aug. of δύναμαι 

Can; that can be ) 
taught, Bidaxed 

Capable of being sisi 
taught, 

Care for, κήδομαι (gen.), 156, 

Carefully provide for, ἔχεσ- 
Bai, gen. 149. d, 
ales, φροντίδες, 150. 

Carry a man Over, περαιοῦν, 
188 (1). 

Catch (in commission of a 
crime), ἁλίσκομαι { 73, 
note 5. 

Cause, αἴτιον, 100. 

to be set before me, 


παρατίϑεμαι, 188, 
Cavalry, ἱππεῖς (pl. of iz. 
neve), 96. 

Cease, παύομαι οἵ what may 
be only a temporary, 
λήγω of a final cessation, 
at least for the time, λήγω 
terminates the action ; 
παύομαι breaks its con. 
tinuity, but may, or may 
not, terminate it, They 
govern gen.,154., 188 (1), 
παύομαι With partic. 239. 
Certain (a), τίς, 12, d. 
Character: of a—to, εἶναι 
οἷος (infin.), 283. 

Charge (enemy), ἐλαύνειν ets, 


sometimes ἐπί, 96, 


Can, δύναμαι (possum), 87. 


a ‘ 


τ οἱος τὸ εἶμι (queo), 283. 


with, ἐγκαλέω, dat. 


of pers., ace. of thing, 183 


INDEX I. 203 


Charge,xarnyogéw,tgen.156. 
: prosecute on a—, 
διώκειν, gen. of crime, 35. 
: am tried on a—, 
φεύγειν, Zen. of crime, 35. 
Chase, ϑήρα, 154. 
Chastise, κολάζω, F. ΜΙ, 121. 
Chatter, λαλέω, 288. 
Child, παιδίον, 150. 
Childless, ἄπαις, 150. 
Choose, αἱρέομαι (2), 190. a. 
: what I choose to 
do, ἃ δοκεῖ (μοι), 96. See 
Diff. 33. 
Citizen, πολίτης (ἡ. 8. 
City, πόλις, ἡ. 8.--- ἄστυ, τό. 
24. “Aorv refers to the site 
or buildings: πόλις tothe 
citizens. Hence ἄστυ 
never means ‘state,’ as 
πόλις 50 often does. The 
ἄστυ Was often an old or 
sacred part of a πόλις. 
Clever, σοφός, 20. δεινός, 214. 
Cleverness, σοφία, 24. 
Cling to, tec dau, gen. 149.d. 
Close by, ἐπί, dat. 288. πρός, 
919, 
Collect, ἀϑροίζω, 175. 
Combat, a disorder, ἐπικου- 
ρεῖν voc, 239. 
Come, ἔρχομαι (2), 112, note 
b. 
:am,— ἥχω, perf. 
meaning, 206. 
——-— (= be present to as- 
sist), παρεῖναι, 92. 


Come for this (to effect it) 
ἐλϑεῖν ἐπὶ τουτῳ. 


(to feteh it), 

ἐλϑεῖν ἐπὶ τοῦτο. 

- off, ἀπαλλάττω (ἐκ or 

amo), 154. 

Come on or up, πρόσειμι, 175. 

- next to, éyeoPat, gen. 

-: said that he would--, 
ἔφη ἥξειν, 91. b, or εἶπεν ὅτι 
ἥ ξοι, 205. 6. 

Command (an army), στρα- 
τηγέω, 52. 

Commence a war, ἄρασϑαι 
πόλεμον πρός, acc. 188. 
Commit, ἐπιτρέπω, dat. 132. 
——— a sin, ἁμαρτάνω (1) 
(εἰς Or περί, with acc.), 154, 

an injury, ἀδικεῖν 
ἀδικίαν, 138, 

Company, ὁμιλία, 112. 

—: keep—, ὁμξλέω, 
dat. 

Complaint (4), ἀσϑένεια (=a 
weakness, x» infirmity), 
319. 

Concerned, as ) 
far as this is, 

-- as far 
at least as 
this is. J 

Condemn, καταγιγνώσκω (1) 
156, obs. 5 

Condition: on—, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ οἱ 
ᾧτε, 267. 

Confer benefits on, εὖ ποκεῖν͵ 
acc. 35, 


τούτου Ye 


ἕνεκα, 250 


t See note on Accuse. 


᾿ 
* 
E 

f 
ἐν 
a 
ἐν 
δ᾿ 
i 
44 

7 i = 
ἢ 
ἢ 
P, 
μὴ 

ν᾽ 

ἢ 
δ 
ἀν 
ΕΝ : 
‘> 
τ κἂν 
Ἔ 
= ἢ 
τῇ 
" 2 
" 


206 INDEX I.’ 


Confess, ὁμολογέω, 190. 

Confide to, ἐπιτρέπω, 132. 

Conquer, vixda (vincere ; 
gain a victory over ene- 
mies ;) περιγίγνεσϑαι (3), 
overcome (gen.) ΣΤ΄ In’ 
omitted after conquer 
when it stands before 
‘battle.’ 

Consider, σκοπέω (of care- 
fully eramining and re- 
flecting on a point, 100.— 
φροντίζω (of anrious con- 
sideration), 288. — with 
oneself, παρ᾽ ἑαυτὸν (σκοπ- 
εἴν ΟΥ̓σκέπτεσϑαι), 319. 

Considerable, συχνός, 163. 

Consideration, ἀξίωμα, 144. 

Constitution, πολιτεία, 206. 

Consult, βουλεύειν, 190. 

together, βουλεύεσ- 
ϑαι, 190. 

Consume, ἀναλίσκω (?), 235. 

Contemporary with, to be. 
See 183. 182. a. 

Contend with, ἐρίζω, dat. 
183. 

Contention, ἔρις, os, 183. 

Continuous, συχνός, 163. 

Contrary to, παρά (acc.) 299. 

Contrivance, τέχνη, 214. 

Corn, σῖτος, 259. 

Corpse, νεκρός, 150. 

Country, χώρα (a country), 
24.—zartpis (native coun- 
try or Lative city), 228. 

Crocodile, κροκόδειλος, 28. 

Cross (a river), περαιοῦσϑαι, 
with aor. pass. 188 (1). 


Crowded, δασύς, 150. 
Crown, στέφανος, 144. 

Cry, xAaiw(?), 150. δακρύω 
283". 

Cultivate, ἀσκέω, 121. Aor. 
mid.? 190. d. 


Custom: ac- 
cording to—, ἰ κατὰ τὸ 
sashis ( εἰωϑός, 52. 

was, 

Cut, zéuv (7), 46. 

—- out, éxxdarm, 132. 

—-to pieces, κατακόπτω, 
132. 

Cyrus, Κῦρος, 24. 


Do 

Damage: to inflict the most, 
πλεῖστα κακουργεῖν (accu 
sative.) 

Damsel, κόρη, 15. 

Dance, χορεύω, 108". 

Danger, κίνδῦνος, 132. 

——— (to brave, incur, ex- 
pose oneself to a), xi»duvev- 
ew κίνδῦνον. 

Dare, τολμάω, 239. 

Daughter, ϑυγάτηρ (7), 20. 

Dead, νεκρός, 150. 

Death, ϑάνατος, 41. 

Deceive, ἀπατάω, ἐξαπατάω͵ 
41. 

Decide, xgive (2), 92. 

Defend, ἀμύνειν with dat 
only, 222. 

Deliberate, βουλεύεσϑαι περι. 
gen. 190. 

Delight, τέρπω, 41. 


Deny, ἀρνέομαι, 293, 


INDEX I. 207 


Depends on you, ἐν σοὶ ἔστι, 
259. 

Deprive of, ἀποστερέω, 125. 
στερέω, 168". 

Desire, ἐπιϑῦμέω, Zen. ἐπι- 
ϑυμία, 156. 

Desist from, λήγω, gen. 154. 

Despicable, φαῦλος, 144. 

Despise, ὀλιγωρέω, gen. 
καταφρονέω, gen. 156. 

Destroy, διαφϑείρω (7), 92. 
ἀπόλλῦμι (7), 193. 

Determined (when or 
though we have, &c.), 
δόξαν ἡμῖν, 249. c. 

Die, ϑνήσκω, ἀποϑνήσκω (7), 
125. 

Differ, διαφέρω (7), gen. 154. 

Difficult, χαλεπός, 65, 214. 

Dine, δειπνέω, 288. 

Dining-room, ἀνώγεων, τό, 
96. 

Directly, εὐθύς, 309. 

-, by φϑάνω, 240. 
—_—- to, eb9v(gen.), 309. 
Disappear: to make to—, 

ἀφανίζω, 306. 
Disappeared, φροῦδος, 65. 
Disbelieve, amozéw,dat.132. 
Disease, νόσος, 7, 154. 
Disgraceful, αἰσχρός, 35. 
Dishonour, ἀτιμάζω, 319. 
Disobey, ἀπιστέω, dat. 132. 
Disposition, ὖἦϑος, τό, 138. 

τρύπος, 150. 

Dispute with, ἐρίζω, dat. 

183. 

Do, 8 πράττειν (=agere 
and gerere) denotes gen- 


eralhy the exertion of 
power upon an object: 
todo ; to employ oneself 
about something already 
existing ; hence, to man- 
age or administer any 
thing; to conduct a busi- 
ness. Hence used with 
general notions, as οὐδέν, 
μηδέν, and with adverbs, . 
ev, &c.—anoviv (facere), 
to make, to prepare, &c.: 
also ‘do’ generally, when 
the object is a neuter pro- 
noun, as in‘ what must I 
αο 3" ---πράττειν denotes 
activity generally ; ποιεῖν, 
productive activity. 

Do the greatest injury, τὰ 
μέγιστα βλάπτειν (acc.) 

—-: to be doing well or ill, 
εὖ OF κακῶς πράττειν. 

—- any thing whatever for 
the sake of gain, ἀπὸ παν- 
τὸς κερδαίνειν, 283. 

—- evil towards, κακουργέω, 
222. 

—-~ good to, εὖ ποιεῖν, acc. 35. 

—- harm to, κακουργέω, 222 

—- injustice to, ἀδικέω, 138. 

—- kind offices to, εὖ ποιεῖν, 
acc. 35. 


—- nothing but, οὐδὲν ἄλλο 


ἤ (ποιεῖν often omitied) 
356. e. 
—- service to, ὠφελέω, 82. 
—- with (a thing), χράομαι, 
dat. (contraction ?) 138. 
Dog, κύων (?), 41. 


208 INDEX I. 


Doors: in—, ἔνδον, 125. 
Down, κάτω, 28. 
from, κατά (gen.), 
274. 
Downwards, κάτω, 28. 
Drachma, δραχμή, 163. 
Draw up (of an army), τάσ- 
ow, 96. 
: ) = arrange, xoo- 
μέω, 206. 
Drawn up four deep, ἐπὶ 
τεττάρων τετάχϑαι, 288. 
Drink, πίνω (7), 144. 
During the disease, κατὰ τὴν 
vooor, 274. 
Dwell, οἰκέω, 274. 


E.9 
Each, πᾶς, 46, 


Eagle, ἀετὸς, 36. 

Ear, οὖς, ὠτός, τό, 20. 

Karly in the morning, πρωΐ, 
193. 

Easy, ῥάδιος. See 65. 

Kat, ἐσθίω (7), 144. 

Educate, παιδεύω, 214. 

Egg, wor, 15. 

Elect = choose, αἱρεῖσϑαι (1), 
(avzi), 190. a. 

Elephant, ἐλέφας, vtog, ¢, 35. 

Empty, μάταιος, 206. 

Enact laws: when @eirac 
vonovg? when oda? 
See 188. 

Endeavour, πειράομαι, 121, 
206. 

condure, ἀνέχομαι (7), 214. 

Enem-', (the), οἱ πολέμιοι, 
46. 


Engage in a war, ὥἄρασϑαι 
πόλεμον πρός, acc. 188. 

Enjoy, ἀπολαύω (genitive), 
259. 

Enough: to be —, ἀρκεῖν, 
175. 

: more thanenough, 
περιιτὰ τῶν ἀρχκούντων, 
174. f. 

γτὰ ἀρκοῦντα, (i. 6. 
things that suffice). 

Entrust, ἐπιτρέπω, πιστεύω, 
132. 
------ to, ἐπιτρέπω, (lays 
more stress on the entire 
giving up of the thing in 
question, so thatit is now 
quite in the other person’s 
hands). — πιστεύω (gives 
more prominence to the 
fact that I put sufficient 
confidence in the other 
person to entrust the thing 
' in question to him), 132. 
Envy, φϑόνος: (v.) φϑονέω, 
| dat. 183. 
Equestrian exercises, τὰ ἱπ- 
πικά, 163. 
Equivalent to, ἀντί, adv. 
Err, ἁμαρτάνω (?), 154. 
Escape from, φεύγω, acc. 87. 
Especially, ἄλλως τὸ καὶ, 
278. 


: and—, καί, re- 
ferring to ἄλλος, 346. 

Even, xai, 82. 

Ever, ποτέ, 87. ἀρχήν or τὴν 
ἀρχήν, 132. 

Every, πᾶς, 46. 


INDEX I. 208 


Every body, πᾶς τις, 52. (ov- 
δεὶς ὅστις οὐ, 277.) 
day, ava πᾶσαν, ἡμέ- 
ραν, 259. 
——— five years, διὰ πέντε 
ἐτῶν, 269. 
Evidently. See 239. 
Evil-doer, κακοῦργος, 222. 
Evils (= bad things), κακά, 
20. 
Exact (payment), πράττεσ- 
ϑαι, 163. 
Examine (a question, &c.), 
σκοπέω, 100. 
Except, πλήν (gen.) 
if, πλὴν εἰ, 309. 
Excessive, ὁ ayav (adv. with 
art.), 228. 
Excessively, ἄγᾶν, 228. 
Exclude from, εἴργω, 154. 
Exercise, ἀσχέω, 121. 
Existing things, τὰ ὄντα, 65. 
Expediency, τὸ συμφέρον, 
228. 
Expedient, 228. Vide If zs. 
Expedition (to go on an), 
στρατεύω, 65. 

Expose myself to a danger, 
κινδυνεύειν κίνδυνον, 132. 
External (things), τὰ ἔξω, 

125. 
Extremely (like). See 87, 
Eye, ὀφϑαλμός, 132. 


Faith, πίστις, ἡ; 132. 


Fall, πίπτω, (7), 293. 

—- in with, ἐντυγχάνω, (3) 

dat. 183. 

Fall into a person’s power 
γίγνεσϑαι ἐπί τινι, 293. 

Family, γένος, τό, 150. 

Far, far on, πόῤῥω: = much, 

πολύ, 144, 

— from it, πολλοῦ δεῖν, 283". 

Fast, ταχύς, 35. 

Father, σατήρ, (7), 20. 

Fault: to find— with, ézez- 
nao, dat. 183. 

Fear, φοβέομαι, (fut, mid. 
and pass.: aor. pass.), 41. 
---δείδω (of a lasting ap- 
prehensionordread),293"*. 

—— (subst.) φόβος. 

δέος, τό, 326. 

Feasible, ἀνυστὸς, 175. 

Feel grateful or thankful, 
χάριν εἰδέναι, gen. of 
thing, 222. 

— pain, ἀλγέω, 20. 

— sure, πέποιϑα (nite), 
120. 

Fetch (of thing sold), svgroxe 
(2), 87. 

Fight, μάχομαι (7), 73. 
against, πρός twa, 319 
on horseback, aq’ iz- 

nov, 243. 
with, poyoucs} dat, 
183. 

Find, εὑρίσκω, 87; to be 

found guilty, ἁλῶναι, with 


gen. 73. 


Faithful, πιστός, 87. 


----- - - 


4 For conjug. οἵ εἰδέναι, see p. 36, note *. 


t For conjug. see 73. 


210 INDEX 1. 


Find a man at home, ἔνδον 
καταλαβεῖν, 125. 
——fault with, ἐπιτιμάω, 
dat. 183. 
out, εὑρίσκειν (7). 
Fire, πῦρ τό, 41. 
First (the—of all), ἐν τοῖς 
πρῶτος. Sec 259, 
Fit to govern, ἀρχικός, gen. 
Five-and-five, ἀνὰ πέντε. 
Fix, πήγνυμι, 193. 
—: am fixed, πέπηγα, 
perf. 2. 
Flatter, κολακεύω, 87. 
F'latterer, κόλαξ, 87. 


Flesh, κρέας, TO, (6. aos, ὡς,) 
144, 


Fly from, φεύγω, 35. 

— for refuge, καταφεύγω, 
Al. 

-—— to the assistance of, 

᾿ βοηϑέω, dat. 121. 

Follow, ἕπομαι, dat. 153, 

Folly, μωρία, 156. 

Fond of honour, φιλότιμος, 
214, 

—-———. gain, 
319. Ἢ 

Food (for man), σῖτος, 259. 

Foot, πούς, ποδός, 6, 20. 

For (=in behalf of), πρό, 
243. 

For, γάρ, 41; for one’s inte- 
rest, 319. 


φιλοκερδής, 


least, oi ye ἐμοί, 979, 
note ft. 

For the sake of, ἕνεκα gen. 
214. χάριν gen. 250. 

For my sake, χάριν ἐμήν, 250, 

—— praise, ἐπ ἐπαίνῳ, 288, 

—— the present at least, τό 
ye νῦν εἶναι, 206. 

—— this cause or reason, 
ἐκ ταύτης τῆς αἰτίας, ἐκ τού- 
του, 224, 

—— your years, πρὸς τὰ ἔτη, 
178. 

——a long time, gen. χρόνου 
συχνοῦ, πολλῶν ἡμερῶν, 
1602", 6. 

Force, κράτος, τό, 41. 

Forefather, πρόγονος, 156. 

Foresee, προγιγνώσκειν. See 

235. 

Forget, ἐπιλανϑάνομαι, (1) 

gen. 156. 

Form an alliance, σύμμαχον 

ποιεῖσϑαί τινα, 188 (2). 

Former, ὁ πρίν, 156 (27). 

Formerly, πάλαι, 28. 

Forth from, ἐκ, ἐξ, gen. 

Fortify, τειχίζω, 222, 

Fortune, τύχη, 92. 

Forwardness, τὸ πρόϑῦμον͵ 

ad}. 60. 

Fountain, πηγή, 132. 

Fourth, τέταρτος, 52. 

Fowl. See 15, note g. 

Free, ἐλεύϑερος, 150. 

from, ἀπαλλάττω, gen. 
154. 
Freedom, ἐλευϑερία, 150, 


—- such a man as me at 


Frequently, πολλάκις, 8. 


INDEX I. 21} 


Friend, φίλος, 20. 

Fiom (after receive, learn, 
bring, come), maga, 299. 
ὑπό (gen.), 326. : 

(after hear,) 03 
(gen.), 319. oe 

—— our very birth, εὐϑυς 

γενόμενοι, 309. 
fear, ὑπὸ δέους, 326. 
(of cause), sign of dat. 

Front, ὁ πρόσϑεν, 283". 

Full of, μεστός, 150. 

Full speed (at), ava κράτος, 

Al. 
Future (the), τὸ μέλλον, 235. 


G. . 

Gain, κερδαίνω, κέρδος, τό, 

2859". 
Gate, πύλη, 193. 
General, στρατηγός, 52. 
Gentle, πρᾶος (7) 138. 
Geometer, γεωμέτρης, ov, 24. 
Get, κτάομαι (of what will 

be retained as a posses- 

sion), 87.---τυγχάνειν with 


; 


en. (of what is obtained 


Get th.e better of, περιγίγνομαι 


(gen.), 87. περίειμι (gen), 
156. 
Gift, δῶρον, 175. 
Give, δίδωμι, 41. 

one trouble; “or or 
πράγματα παρέχειν, 214. 

ν ων. βλνμδε 959. 

a share of, μεταδίδωμι, 
175. 

some of, μεταδίδωμι, 
175. 

a taste of, γεύειν, ace. of 
pers., gen. of thing. 
—— to taste, yevw (gen. of 
thing), 150. 
Given τὰ be—, δοτέος, 144. 
Gladly, ἡδέως. 
Go, ἔρχομαι (7), 112. 
—away, ἄπειμι (=will go 
away. See 65, note g). 
---ἀπέρχομαι, 112. , 
—in to, εἰσέρχομαι παρᾶ 
111. d. 
— into, εἰσέρχομαι, 112. 
—on an expedition, στρα’ 
revo, 65. 


accidentally, by good|— and do a thing, 350 (h), 
luck, &c.) 183, note b.— = "¢? ΐ 

ὑρίσκεσϑαι (to get posses-|God, Θεὸς. 
ana an ἀπο sought | Gold, χρῦσός, ὁ, as a sum of 


for). 


gold money, χρῦσίον, 35. 


— rvyyavo, gen. 183, note | Golden, χρύσεος, ove, 144. 


Ὁ. εὑρίσκομαι, 188. 
— hold of, κρατέω, 163. 


Good, ἀγαϑός---ἀμείνων, ἄρισ 
τος, 30 


, » 
—- off, ἀπαλλάττω ἐκ or ἀπό, | Govern, ἄρχω (gen.), 150. 


154. 
Get (teeth, &c.) φύω, 214. 


Government, ἀρχή, 132. 
Gratify, χαρίζομαι, 273. 


— taught, διδάσκομαι, 188. | Great, μέγας (3). 


212 IND 


Greater, greatest, μείζων, 
μέγιστος, 

Greatly (with injure, bene- 
fit, &c.), μέγα. 

—= far, πολύ, 156. 
Greece, Ἑλλάς, adog, 7, 144. 
Greek, Ἕλλην, nvog, 144. 
Grudge, φϑονέω, gen. of ob- 

ject, dat. of pers. 183. 
Guard, φυλάττω, 190. 6. 
against, φυλάττεσϑαι, 
ace. 190. 
Guard, 
Guardian, φύλαξ (x). 


Η.. 2 

Habit: in the—of perform- 

ing, πραχτικός, £en.149. a. 

Hair, ϑρίξ, τριχός, ἡ, 175. 

Half, ἥμισυς. See 59, 

Hand, χείρ, ἡ, (2) 20. 

Hang oneself, ἀπάγχομαι, 
188, (1). 

Happen, τυγχάνω, 242. b. 

Happened : what had—, τὸ 
γεγονός. 

Happy, εὐδαίμων, ονος, 90. 
arass, πόνου Or πράγματα 
παρέχειν, 214. 

Hard, χαλεπός, 65, 214. 

Hare, λαγώς. See 15. 


EX I. 


| Have an opportunity: wher. 
or though you have, &c. 
παρόν, 250. 

—— ἃ narrow escape, παρὰ 
μικρὸν ἐλϑεῖν, 299. 

mag ὀλίγον 


διαφεύγειν, 299, 
—-—any regard for, κήδο 
μαι, gen. 156. 
confidence in, πέποιϑα 
193. 
—— done supper, ἀπὸ δείπ 
vou γενέσϑαι, 243. 
: in one’s hand, διὰ χει 
ρος ἔχειν, 269. 
—— lost, στερέω, 1085. 
—— nofear of, ϑαῤῥέω, ace. 
138. 
—— slain a man with one’s 
own hand, αὐτόχειρ εἶναι, 
299 
— — the tooth ache (= suf. 
fer pain in my teeth), 
ἀλγῶ τοὺς ὀδόντας. See 
19". ὃ. 
Head, κεφαλή, 20. 
Hear, ἀκούω, F. M. 92.—on 
its government, see 148, 
Hearing: there is nothing 
like—, οὐδὲν οἷον ἀκοῦσαι 


278. 


Harm: come to some—, 


παϑεῖντι (suffer some- 
thing). 


Haste, σπουδή, 183. 
Have, ἔχω. See 15, note i. 
a child taught, dddo- 


Heavy, βαρύς, 183. 
Heavy-armed soldier, ὁπλί. 
της, 154. 

Hen, ὄρνις. See 15, note g. 
Henceforth, τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε, 


34." 


κόμαι, 125, t. 


Hercules, Ἡρακλῆς, 183. 


t For conjug. ο" τυνχάνω, see 183. 


INDEX I. 218 


Here, ἐνθάδε, 28. 

Hide, δορά, 35. 

—— κρύπτω, 
125. 

Hill, λόφος, 288. 

Hinder, κωλύω, ἀποκωλύω, 
293. 

Hire, μισϑοῦμαι, 188. 

Hit (a mark), τυγχάνω, 183, 
note b. 

Hold a magistracy or office, 
ἄρχειν ἀρχήν, 132. 

—— cheap, ὀλιγωρέω (gen.) 
156. 

——my tongue about, 
σιωπάω, EF. M. 87. 

(without acc.), 
σιγάω, FE. M. 270. 

Home : at—, ἔνδον, 125. 

to find a man at—, 

ἔνδον καταλαβεῖν, 125. 

Honey, μέλι, ιτος, τό, 132. 

Honorable, καλός, 32. 

Honour, τιμή, 150. 

Hope, ἐλπίζω, 87. 

Hoplite, ὁπλίτης, 154. 

Horn, κέρας, τό, (1) 35. 

Horse, ἵππος, 15. 

——- soldier, ἱππεύς, 96. 

House, οἶκος, 41. 

How much, πόσον, 87. 

Hunting, ϑήρα, 154. 

Hurt, βλάπτω, 82. 


ΒΕ ἐξ 
I atleast, ἔγωγε, 156. 
I for my part, ἔγωγε, 156. 
Idle, ἀργός, 299. 


ἀποχρύπτω, 


ΤΠ any body has. .. itis you, 

εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος (ἔχεις, &C.) 

174. d. 

— it is agreeable to you, 8 

σοι βουλομένῳ ἐστί, 206. 

— itshould appear thatI... 

ἐὰν φαίνωμαι, &c. with 

partic. 239, note c. 

— you are willing, εἴ σοι 
βουλομένῳ ἐστί, 206. 

ΠῚ, κακῶς, 8. 

—adj.= weak), ἀσϑενής,319. 

Imitate, μιμέομαι. 

Immediately, εὐϑύς, 309.— 
how to translate it by 
φϑάσας, &c., see 242. ἢ. 

on his arrival, 
εὐθὺς ἥκων, 309. 

Immortal, ἀϑάνατος, 125. 

Impiety, ἀσέβεια, 156. 

Impious, ἀνόσιος, 299. ace- 
βής, 156. 

Impossible, ἀδύνατος, 65. 

Impudence, ἀναίδεια, 87. 

Impunity: with—, χαίρω» 
(rejoicing’). 

In addition to, éai (dat.) 288. 
πρὸς τούτοις, 319. 

-- (in answer to where 3) ἐν, 
dat. 259. 
— (aman’s) power, éai with 
dat. of the person, 65. _ 
— (after to conquer), omit- 
ted, 131. e. 

—all respects, πάντα, 194, 
κατὰ πάντα, 274. 

—an uncommon degree, 
διαφερόντως, 235. 


1 For conjzg of τυγχάνω, see 183. 


—— Δ ἝΝ 
eT a2 aye ) Nin - 4». “ 


214 INDEX I. 


In behalf of, πρό, 243. 

— comparison of, πρός, 31.9. 

— (=in doors), ἔνδον, 125. 

— preference to, ἀντί, 214. 

-— proportion to, κατά (acc.), 
274. 

— reality, τῷ ὄντι, 65. 

—reference to, εἰς, 259. 
πρός, acc. 319. 

— (space of time), ava, 259. 

ἫΝ" time of, ἐπί with gen. 

5. 

- habit of doing, πρακ- 
τικός, 150. 

——- world, who? τίς ποτε, 
150. 

Incur a danger, xwdvuvrevew 
κίνδυνον, 132. 

—— danger, xwdvreve,131. 

Indeed, μέν, 38, note f. 

Infinitely many, μυρίοι, 228. 

Infirmity, ἀσϑένεια, 319. 

Inflict damage on, xaxove- 
γέω, 222. 

Injure = hurt, βλάπτω, 82. 
ἀδικέω, 138. 

Injury : do an—to, βλάπτω. 

Injury: to commit an—, 
ἀδικεῖν ἀδικίαν, 138. 


Intermediate, μεταξύ, 26. 

Into, εἰς, acc. 

Intoxication, μέϑη, 326. 

Is δ. good | 
thing for, 

— advantage- 
on ἔστι πρός 

— character- ‘ 
istic of, (τινος), 319, 

— consistent 
with, 

— like, J 

— enough, or sufficient for, 
ἀρκεῖ, 175. 

—to be, μέλλει ἔσεσϑαι, 
283. h. 

—ofa character to, ἐστὶν 
οἷος, 283. b. 

It being disgraceful, αἰσχρὸν 
ov, 250. 

— being evident, δῆλον ὅν, 
250. 

— being fit, προσῆκον, 250. 

— being impossible, ἀδύνα- 
tov ov, 250. 

— being incumbent, προσῆ- 
xov, 250. 

— being plain, δῆλον ov; 250. 

— being possible, δυνατὸν 


Injustice, ἀδικέα, 82. to.d ὄν, 230, 
to, ἀδικέω, 138. Wis nds on you, ἐν σοὶ 
Insolence, ὕβρις, ἡ, 138. 7 259. 


Insolent person, ὑβριστής. 

Instead of, ἀνεί, 214. 

Insult, ὑβρίζω, acc. ὕβρις, ἡ, 
138. 

Interest for a man’s—“o be 
translated by πρός, with 
the gen. of person, 319. 


— is allowed (licet), ἔξεστι, 
112. 

— is expedient, συμφέρει, 
dat. 228. 

—is necessary, avayxy 
(omitting the verb), 65. 


— is nota thing that every 


σ 
Just as he was, ἧπερ or wo- 


INDEX I. 215 


body can do, ov παντός 
ἐστι, 158. 

It is not every body that 
can, 163, 283. 

— is possible, οἷοντέ go71,283. 

— is profitable, συμφέρει, 
dat., 228. 

— is right, ὀρϑῶς ἔχει, 222. 

— is right that, δίκαιόν ἐστι, 
358. a. 

— 1s the nature of, πέφῦκα, 
ἔφυν, 214. 

— is the part of, ἔστι (gen.), 
162*. h. 


J.¢?- 

Jaw, γνάϑος, ἡ, 20. 

Journey (v.), πορεύομαι, 24. 
στέλλομαι (3), 188 (1). 

Judge, κριτής (general term), 
8.—dmacryg (only of a 
judge in the strict sense), 
239, x: (verb) κρίνω, 92. 

Jupiter, Ζεύς, Διός, &c. voc. 
Zev, 193. 

Just, δίκαιος, 87. 


περ εἶχεν, 951]. 


K. 
Keep company with; ὁμι- 
λέω, dat. 183. png 
(for one’s self), aigeo- 
Gat, 188. 
Kill, ἀποκτείνω (1), 82. 
King, βασιλεύς, 24. 
Knee, γόνυ, γόνατ, τό, 20. 
Knock out, ἐκκόπτω (aor. 2 


Know, οἶδα (of positive 
knowledge), 73.—ytyv00- 
xo (seek to become ac- 
quainted with), aor. éy- 
γῶν, know (from ac- 
quaintance with it): 
(with partic., 229.) 

-- [γχνώσκω), 235. 
—-- how, ἐπίσταμαι (7), 
293. 

: Idon’t—, οὐκ ἔχω, or 
οὐκ οἶδα, 67. 


L. Z2177 Hd 
Labour, πόνος, (Vv. πονέἕω,) 
154. 
Laid myself down, xazexii- 
Snr, 190. 
Lamb, ἀμνός, 41. 
Large, μέγας. 
(At) last, τὸ τελευταῖον, 34° 


Laugh, γελάω, ἄσομαι, ἢ 
222. ὶ KF. 
M 


at, καταγελάω, 


278. 
Laughter, γέλως, τος, 278. 
Law, νόμος, 132. 
Lawful, duc, (=fas), 65. 
ὅσιος, δίκαιος, 293 
Lay down, κατατίϑημι, 163. 
—— eggs, τίκτω (2), 15. 
—--- to the charge of, xazy 
γορέω, 156. 
—--- waste, τέμνω (7), 46. 
Lazy, ἀργός, 299. 
Lead, ἄγω, 341. 
Lead (of a road), φέρω, 73 


pass.), 132, 


Leaf, φύλλον, 214. 


ee Ρ 
=) 


patil: 
eh €r¥ 
τ 
“π 
τἢ 
Ι 
ἐν 
a 
Ἶ 
+ 
ἢ 
3 
[3 
᾿ 


Lt ea 
= + 


= — 
"os  " ee Δ 


- τα μαμῷνν-- τοῦ ψόμονανμναινοαμνω κατ en eepetes recess x 


218 INDEX 1. 


Leap, ἄλλομαι, 273. 
Learn, (with partic.) μαν- 
Save (?), 239. 
Leather bottle, ἀσκός, 15. 
Leave off, λήγω, gen., 154. 
παύομαι, 188 (1). 
Leisure, σχολή, 112. 
Let for hire, μισϑόω, 188. 
Liberty, ἐλευϑερία, 150. 
Lie down, xazaxhivoucs (xa- 
τεχλίϑην), 190. 
Life, βίος, 28. by infin., τὸ 
ζῇν, 150. 
Lift up, αἴρειν, 188 (2). 
Like a dog, κυνὸς δίκην, 
250. 
ὅμοιος, (dat.), 183. 
ἀγαπάω, 52, 
to doit=do it gladly 
(ἡδέως). 
——, should like to... ἡδέ. 
ως av, 87. 
, Should extremely like 
: " = ἥδιστ᾽ ἄν, 87. 
alkely, εἰκός (neut. part. 
4 (newt. part.), 
Lily, κρίνον (?), 144. 
Little (a little), ὀλίγῳ, 168*. 
Live, faa, 131. d. note b. 
(=spend one’s life), 
διατελέω, 60. 
about the same time, 
κατὰ TOV αὐτὸν χρόνον γε- 
veodou, 183. 
Long (of time), συχνός, 163. 
μακρός, 214 


a to be at a—, ἀρεσρέαι, 

Love, φιλέω (of love arising 
from regard, and the per- 
ception of good and ami- 
able qualities), 20.—éya- 
πάω (stronger: implying 
affection arising from the 
heart, &c.), 52.— ἐράω 
(of the passion of love), 
274, 

Lover of self, φίλαυτος, 222. 


Lower, ὁ κάτω (art. with 
adv.) 


Μ. δ έωει 

Madness, μανία, 24. 
Magistracy, ἀρχή, 132. 
Maiden, κόρη, 15. 
Maintain, τρέφω (7), 190. 
Make to cease, παύω, gen. 
of that from which, 154. 

to disappear, ἀφανίζω 
206. ppear, ἀφανις 

a great point of, περὶ 
πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι or ἡγεῖσ᾽ 


ϑαι, 283. 
- progress, προγωρέω 
om? Θ 0 χ θεώ, 
immense (or aston- 
ishing) progress, ϑαυμασ. 
τὸν ὅσον προχωρεῖν, 273. c. 
self-interest the object 
of one’s life, πρὸς τὸ συμ- 
φέρον ζῇν, 228. 
for one’s interest, εἶνα: 


ago, πάλαι, 28. 


πρός (gen.), 319. 


* Aorist generally of sensual love, but ἔρασθαι τυραννίδος common. 


( Pape.) 


INDE 


Male, ἄῤῥην, 150. 
Man, 46. (Obs.) 
: am not a man, 283, 
note a. 
Manage, πράττω, 8. 
Many, πολύς, 46. the many, 
οἱ πολλοί, 46. 
times as many or 
much, πολλαπλάσιοι(αι, «), 
175. 
- --- - numerous, πολ- 
λαπλάσιοι, 175. 
March, ἐλαύνω (2), πορεύο- 
μαι, 24. 
of a single soldier, 
εἶμι (7), 96. 
Mare, ἵππος, ἡ, 15. 
Mark, σκοπός, 183, Ὁ, 
Market-place, ἀγορά, 154. 
Master, δεσπότης, 222. 
———— διδάσκαλος (= teach- 
er), 168. 


. (v.) χρατέω, (gen.), 
156. 


May (one—), ἔξεστι, 222. 

-—— (though or when I 
may), παρόν, 250. 

Meet, ἐνευγχάνω, dat. 183. 

Might (one—), ἐξῆν, 222. 

(when or though I, 

&c. might,) παρόν, 250. 

Mild, πρᾶος (7), 138. 

Milk, γάλα, γάλακτ, τό, 132. 

Mina, μνᾶ, 82. 

Mind (as the seat of the 
passions), ϑῦμός, 121. 

Mine, ἐμός, 20. 

Minerva, ‘A dnvra, 341. 


7 


= 
ae 217 


Miserable, ἀϑλιος, 273. 
Misfortune, δυσπρᾶγία, 125. 
Miss, ἁμαρτάνω, (gen.), 154. 
Moderate (in desires, &c.) 
σώφρων, 125, u. 
Moderation, καὶ σωφροσύνη, 
Modesty, 125, u. 
Molest, πόνον or πράγματα 
παρέχειν, 214. 
Money, χρήματα, 125. 
Month, μήν, ὁ, 138. 
More than (= beycnd), πα- 
oa (acc.), 299. 


than, μᾶλλον----, 
Al. 


—— than any other single 
person, 174. e. 

enough, περιττὰ 

τῶν ἀρκούντων, 174, f. 

could have been 
expected, &c., 168, ὦ. 

More (after a numeral,) ἔτι, 
193. 

Morning: early in the—, 
πρωΐ, 193. 

Morrow (the), ἡ αὔριον, 26. 

Mortal, ϑνητός, 125. 

Most, πλεῖστοι, 175. 

——— ofall, μάλιστα πάντων, 


309. 


his time, τὰ πολλά, 


137. 
Most men, or people, οὗ πολ- 
hoi, 46. 
Mostly, τὰ πολλά, 137, 282. 
Mother, μήτηρ (7), 20. 
Move, xivéo, 28. 
Mourn for, ziddecPas (acc.) 


Misdeed, κακούργημα, 70,222. 
10 


188 (1). 


218 INDEX 1. 


Much, πολύς, 46. 
— (with compar.), πολ- 

λῷ, 168". 

Multitude (the), of πολλοί, 
46. 

Murder (to be tried for), 
φεύγειν φόνου, 35. 

Murderer (ihe actual—), 
αὐτόχειρ, 299. 

Must (= ought), δεῖ, 60. 

——, how translated by 
verbals in τέος, 114. 

My, ἐμός, 20. 


N.aate> 
Name (by name), éroue, τό, 
138. 137. a. 
Named: to be—after, ὄνομα 
ἔχειν ἐπί τινος, 288. 
Nation, ἔϑνος, τό, 65. 
Natural. See 331. 
Nature: it is the—of, &c., 
213. a. 
Near, πέλας, 28. πλησίον, 
309. ἐγγύς, gen. 150. 
Nearly, ὀλίγου δεῖν or ὀλίγου 
alone, 80". 
related to, ἐγγύτατα 
εἶναι γένους, 149, 6. 
Necessary : it is—, ἀγαγκῆ, 
65. 
- it would be—to, 
eon atie Saree 114. 
Necessity, ἀνάγκη, 65. 


Ir, ὁ πλησίον, 28. 
—nor, οὔτε --- οὔτε, 


Neither—nor yet, οὔτε----οὖ 
δέ, μήτε---μηδέ, 112. 

Neptune, Ποσειδῶν, ὥνος (7), 
941. 

Nevertheless, ὅμως, 288. 

Next, ὁ ἐχόμενος, gen. 149. 
d. 


day, ἡ αὔριον, 26. on 

the—, τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, 183. 

Nightfall, about, ὑπὸ γύχτα, 
326. 

Nightingale, ἀηδὼν (1), 341. 

No, by Jupiter, &c., μὰ Δία, 
341. 

—- longer, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, 
112. 

Nobody, οὐδείς, μηδείς, 112. 

Nose, (ig, dives, ἡ, 35. 

Nosiril, 35. 

| Not, 107-111. 

'Not a single person, οὐδὲ 
εἷς, μηδὲ εἷς, 112. 

—- at all, οὐδέν (τι), μηδέν 
(τι), 150. 

-- even, οὐδέ, 82. μηδέ, 112. 

—- only—but also, οὐχ ὅτι 
--- ἀλλὰ καί, 82. 

—- yet, οὕπω, 214. 

Nourish, τρέφω, 190. 

Now, νῦν, 28. (=already) 
ἤδη, 65. 


O. 
O Athenians, ὦ ἄνδρες “A Oy- 
γαῖοι. 
Obey, πείϑεσϑαι, dat. 120. 
Obtain, τυγχάνω, gen., 185, 
note b. 
Occasion: if or when there 


INDEX I. 213 


is any —, ἐάν τι δέῃ, Or εἴ 
τι δέοι, 92. 

Of (themselves, myself, 
&c.), ag ἑαυτῶν, 243. 

Of old, (as adj.) καὶ ὁ πάλαι, 

——-- times, 26. 

Of those days, ὁ τότε, 26. 

Offer, παρέχω, 214. 

——- for sale, πωλέω, 86*. c. 

Offices: do kind—to. See 
Do. 

Often, πολλάκις, 8. 

Ointment, μύρον, 150. 

Old, οἱ πάλαι, 26. 

On account of, διά (acc.), 
269. ἕνεκα, (gen.), 214. 
-- an understanding that, 

ἐπὶ τῷ, 298. 
- — condition that, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, 267. 
ᾧτε, 238. 
— condition of being... 
ἐπὶ τῷ εἶναι, &C. 
-— horseback, ἐφ᾽ ἵππου or 
ἵππῳ, 288. 
— (space or time), ἀνά, 259. 
— the contrary, 137. d. 
— the father’s side, πρὸς 
πατρὸς, 319. 
the next day, τῇ ὕστε- 
ραίᾳ, 183. 
— the plea that, ὡς οὕτως, 
805". 6. 
— your account, διὰ σέ, 
269. 
Once ἅπαξ, 341. 
One. εἷς (μία, ἕν), 87. 
One =a person, τίς. 
—-- may, ἔξεστι, 222, 


) 


One more, ἔτε εἷς, 193. 

—- who has never tasted, 
&c., ἄγευστος, 150. 

— who has slain another 
with his own hand, αὐτό- 
yep, 29. 

One’s neighbour, ὁ πλησίον, 
28. 

-own things, τὰ ἑαυτοῦ 

Only, μόνον. 

Open, ἀνοίγω, ἀνέφχα, Perf. 1. 

| -: stand—, ἀνέῳγα, 

| Perf. 2. 

Openly, ἀπὸ mw προφανοῦς, 

| 243. 

Or, (in double questions), 7, 
after πότερον, 328. 

Or both, ἢ ἀμφότερα, 345. 

Order, κελεύω, (the weakest 
word = bid, tell,) 112.— 
ἐπιτάττω. 

-——— τάσσω, 90. ἐπιτάττω 
909, τάξις, 90. 

——— (in good), εὐτάκτως 
96. 

Other (the—party), οἱ ἕτεροι. 
46. 

Others (the), oi ἄλλοι, 46. 


Ought, δεῖ, χρή (7), 60, 92 
117. 


: what we--, τὰ dé 
orza, ἃ χρή, 206. 
Ours, ἡμέτερος, 24. 
Out of, ἐκ, ἐξ, gen. 224. ἔξω, 
309. ὑπό, 326. 
the way, ἐμποδών, 
293. 
Outside, ἔξω 125 


— might, ej», 222. 


INDEX f. 


Outside: the people outside, 
οἱ ἔξω. 

Outward (things), τὰ ἔξω, 
125. 

Overcome, 
(gen.), 156. 

Overlook, ἐπισκοπέω, 206. 

Own, to be translated by 
ZEN. ἑαυτοῦ͵ αὑτοῦ.(ἑαυτῶν, 


Wc.) 


περιγίγνομαι, 


᾿᾿. 

Pain (v.), λύπέω, 41. 

Pained, to be—, ἀλγέω, 20. 

Parent, yovevs, 121. 

Part (the greater), 59. 6, and 
58. 

—-(it is the), ἔστι, with 
gen. 163. 

Passion (anger), ϑῦμός, 121. 

Passions (the), πάϑεα,η,100. 

Pay, (n.), μισϑός, 87. 

—— attention to, τὸν vovr 
πορσέχειν, ΟΥ προσέχειν, dat. 
331. : 

— close attention to, προς 
τοῖς πράγμασι γίγνεσϑαι, 
919. 

Peace, εἰρήνη, 214. 

Peacock, ταώς, 341. 

Peloponnesus, Πελοπόννη- 
cog, 7, 60. 

People, 24; =persons (oi 
—), see 29, Z. 

Perceive, αἰσθάνομαι, (2), 
190, 239. 
Perform a service, vzgyeten, 

52. 
Perfume, μύρον, 150. 


Perish, ἀπ-ὀλλὕμαι, 193, s. 

Permit, ἐάω (augm.?), 121. 

Persian, Πέρσης, ov, 24. 

Person, σῶμα, 138. 

Persuade, πσείϑω (acc.), 120. 

Philip, Φίλιππος, 24. 

Philosopher, φιλόσοφος, 15. 

Physician, ἑατρός, 154. 

Piety, εὐσέβεια, 156. 

Pious, εὐσεβής, 156. 

Pitcher, χύτρα, 193. 

Pity (v.), 150; (phrase) 269, 
οἰκτείρω, δὲ οἴκτου ἔχειν. 

Place guards, καταστήσασ- 
ϑαι φύλακας, 188 (2). 

Place on, ἐπιτίϑημι, dat. 144. 

Plea. See 86". Examp. 6. 

Pleasant, ἡδύς, 214. 

Please, ἀρέσκω, dat. 331. 

——: what I—, @ μοι do- 
κεῖ, 96. 

Pleasure, to take, ἥδομαι. 

Plot against, ἐπιβουλεύω, dat. 
183. 

Pluck, τίλλειν, 188 (1). 

Plunder, διαρπάζω, fut. mid. 
(sometimes άσω, B.), (gen- 
eral term plunder, rob,) 
144..--ληΐζομαι (make 
booty ), 235. 

Poet, ποιητής, 24. 

Possess, κέκτημαι, 87. Fut.? 
See 199. : 

Possession, κεῆμα, τό, 87. 

Possible, δυνατός, 65. 

it is, οἷόν τέ ἐστι, 


283. a. 


(it is net), οὐκ ἄστιν, 


84. 283. a. 


- a at RE eT URED eG 


INDEX I. 92) 


Pot. χυτρα, 193. 

Power: in the--of, ἐπί, with 
dat of person, 65. 

Powerful, δυνατός, 168*. 

Practise, ἀσκέω, (general 
term) 121.—wedera, (re- 
fers to the carefulness 
with which the thing is 
practised,) 163. 

Praise, ἐπαινέω, F. M., 60. 

Praiseworthy, ἐπαινετός, 60. 

Pray don’t do this, ov py 
with fut. 287". e. 

Preference: in—of, ἀντί 
(gen.), 214. 

Present, παρών, partic. 

Present circumstances, con- 
dition, &c., τὰ παρόντα, 
52. See 293*. 

———,, as ad}. ὁ νῦν, 26. 

Prevent, ἐμποδὼν εἶναι μή, or 
μὴ ov, (with infin.) κωλύω, 
ἀποκωλύω. See 293". 

Procure, εὑρίσκομαι, 188 (2). 

Produce (laughter), ποιέω. 

Production, ἔργον, 121 

Pronounce happy, εὐδαιμονί- 
ζω, 150. 

Property :—generally omit- 
ted, the aré. being put in 
neut. pl. See Diff. 10. 

Prosecute, διώκειν, 35. 

Prosecuted (to be), φεύγειν, 
35. 

Prosper, εὐτυχέω, 92. 

Protect myself, ἀμύνομαι, 
222 


Provide, παρασκευάζω, 188 
(2). 

———— for one’s safety, é- 
εσϑαι σωτηρίας, 150. 

Prudent, σώφρων (one whose 
thoughtfulness and sound 
sense has becomea habit), 
125, u.— poormmoc(one who 
pays attention to hiscon- 
duct and character), 144.t 

Punish, κολάζω, EF’. M., 121. 

Punished (to be), δίκην διδό- 
vat, or δοῦναι, gen. of 
thing, dat. of person. by 
whom, 228. 

Pupil, μαϑητής, 168". 

Purchase, ἀγοράζω, 163. 

Pursue, διώκω (fut. mid. 
best), 35. 

Put forth (naturally), φύω, 
214. 

— off, ἐκδύω, 125. 

—— on, ἐνδύω, 125. 

—— to death, ἀποχτείνω (7), 
82. 

—: to—a man over ariv- 
er, περαιοῦν (τινα), 188. 


Q. 
Quick, ταχύς, 35. 
Quickly, ταχύ, 35. 
——— (partic.), 242. f. 


R. 
Race, yévo3, τό, 100. 
Rail at, λοιδορέομαι, dative 
183. 


+ φρόνιμον δεῖ γενέσθαι τὸν μέλλοντα σώφρονα ἔσεσθαι, (Cyrop. Li. 1, 10). 


ζω 


22 INDEX 1. 


Raisea war, ἐγείρειν πόλεμον, 
193. 

Rank, τάξις, 7, 96. 

Rascal, xaxoveyos, 222. 

Rather than, μᾶλλον 7, 191. 
p. 

Ravage, τέμνω (?), 46. 

Ready, ἑτοῖμος, 65. 

Reality (in), τῷ ὄντι, 65. 

Really, τῷ ὄντι, 65. 

Rebuke, ἐπιτιμάω, dat. 183. 

Receive, τυγχάνω, 183, b. λα- 
Beiv, 190.1). δέχομαι, 190. 3). 

Reconcile, διαλύειν, 190. 

Reconciled : to be—to each 
other, διαλύεσϑαι πρός 
(acc.), 190. 

Rejoice, ἥδομαι, (refers to the 
feeling of delight; to its 
sensual gratification), 20. 
—yaiow, (general term), 
239. 

Relations, προσήκοντες, 283. 

Remain, with, παραμένω, 
222. 

Remarkably, διαφερόντως, 
235. 

Remember, μέμνημαι, gen. 
156, 239. 

Repel, ἀμύνομαι (acc.), 222. 

Repent, μεταμέλει μοι, 239. 

Reputation, ἀξίωμα, τό, 144. 

Require, see Want. 

Requite, éuvvouat(acc.),222. 

Rest (of the), ὁ ἄλλος, 46. 

Restore an exile, κατάγω, 
331. 


Restrain by punishment, 
κολάζω, EF. M., 120. 

Return from banishment, 
κατέρχομαι, κάτειμι, 269". 

Return like for like, τοῖς 
ὁμοίοις ἀμύνεσϑαι, 222. 

thanks for, χάριν 

εἰδέναι (gen. of thing), 222. 
See 73, note q. 

Revenge myself, ἀμύνομαι, 
acc., 222. 

Reverence, αἰδέομαι, acc, 
138. 

Rhinoceros, gwdxegag, wrog 
35. 

Rich, πλούσιος. 

Ride, ἐλαύνειν (1), 41. 

- on horseback, ἐφ᾽ ἵππω 
ὀχεῖσϑαι, ἐφ᾽ ἵππω πορεύεσ- 
Ga, 288. 

Right, ὅσιος, δίκαιος, 293. 

—-——,it is, ὀρθῶς ἔχει, 
222. 

River, ποταμός, 132. 

Road, ὁδός, ἡ, 73. 

——-home, ἡ οἴκαδε ὁδός, 
331. 

Rock, πέτρα, 235. 

Roman, ἹΡωμαῖος, 293. 

Rule over, ἄρχω, (gen.) 

Run, τρέχω (dea), 65. 

——to the assistance of, 
Bon dé (dat.), 121. 

——away ‘from, ἀποδιδ. 
ράσκω, acc. 138. 

Running, the act of, δρόμος͵ 
183. 


t For fut. see 199 


' INDEX I. 


S. 

Safe, ἀσφαλής, 299. 

Safety, ἀσφάλεια, 193. 

--- (from danger), ao- 
gare, 299. 

Said, εἶπον, 60. 

Sailaway, ἀποπλέω (3), 188. 

Sale. See Offer. 

Same, ὁ αὐτός, Al. 

Say, &c. λέγω (= speak, of 
a connected speech ; also 
tell).—einsiv (60, c), φημί 
(= 58γ).---λαλεῖν (= chat- 
ter, talk: especially of 
children who are begin- 
ning to speak).—gaoxw 
(= give out; intimating 
that the thing is not so), 
222. 

Science, ἐπιστήμη, 293. 

Scold, λοιδορέομαι, dat. 183. 

Scourge, pacttyow, 235. 

Scythian, Sxvdys, ov, 24. 

Sea, ϑάλασσα, 154. 

Secretly, 242. ¢ (2); part. 
λαϑών, 241. 

Security, ἀσφάλεια, 299. 

See (= behold), ϑεάώομαι, 87. 

—-(with part.), ὁράω (3), 
73, 239. 

Seek, ζητέω, 100. 

Seems (good, videtur), doxei, 


Self, αὐτός, 39 (1). 
love, φιλαυτία, 228. 
—— loving, φίλαυτος, 228. 
—— restraint, σωφροσύνη, 
125. 
Selfish, φίλαυτος, 228. 


Selfishness, gilavria, 228 
Sell, πωλέω, 87. 
Send, στέλλειν, 188, (1). 
(a boy) to a master, 
εἰς διδασκάλου πέμπειν, 259, 
for, μεταπέμπομαι, 259 
Senseless, ἀνόητος, 214. 
Sensible, φρόνιμος, 140. 
Sensual pleasures, ai κατὰ 
τὸ σῶμα ἡδοναί, 274. 
Serve, ὑπηρετέω, dat. 52. 
Service: do a—to, ὠφελέω, 
acc. 
Set about, ἐπιχειρέω dat. 121 
—- out, πορεύομαι, 24. 
Severe, βαρύς, 183. 
Shameless, ἀναιδής, 87. 
Shamelessness, ἀναίδεια, 87. 
Shed tears, δακρύω, 282. 
Sheep, ois,41. ᾿ 
Ship, ναῦς (ἢ), 125. 
Should, δεῖ (7), 60. 
Shown, having, ἐπιδεδειγμέ- 
vos, 188, 3. 
Shun = fly from, φεύγω, 35. 
Silence, σιωπή, 96. 
Silently, σιγῆ, 175. 
Sin, ἁμαρτάνω, εἰς Or περί 
(with accus.),against,154, 
Sing, ἄδω, F. M. 168". 
better, χάλλιον ἄδειν͵ 
1608". 
Single (not a single person), 
οὐδὲ sig: μηδὲ εἷς, 112, 
Slave, δοῦλος, 20. 
Sleep (to), κοιμάομαι, sub. 
ὕπνος, 132. 
Slow, βραδύς, 175. 
——.am slow to do it= 


; 
-f | 


“Ὑ- 
INDEX I. » 


will doit by leisure, σχολῇ, 
112. Diff. 35. 

Slowly, σχολῇ (literally by 
leisure: see 112.)---βρα- 
δέως, 175. 

Smell of, ὄζω (7), 150 

So—as to, ὥστε with infin., 
212. 

— great, τηλικοῦτος, 228. 

—maly, τόσος, τοσόσδε, 
τοσοῦτος, 65 

— powerful, τηλικοῦτος, 228. 

— that, doze with infin. or 
indic., 212. 

—, to be, οὕτως ἔχειν. 

-— to say, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, 144. 

Socrates, Σωκράτης. See 15, 
note f. 

Soldier, στρατιώτης, ov, 228. 

Solon, Σόλων, wvog, 183. 

Some, ἔστιν οἵ, ἔνιοι, 264. 

others, οἱ μέν --- οἱ 


δέ, 41. 
Sometimes, ἔστιν ὅτε, 264. 
Somewhere, ἔστιν ὅπου, 264. 
Son, παῖς (general term, 
15).—vids, (with respect 
to his parents).—often 
omitted, 23. b. 
Sophroniscus, Σωφρονίσκος, 
24. 
Soul, ψυχή. 
Spare, φείδομαι (genitive), 
156. 
Speak, λέγω, 35. 
calumniously of, λοι- 
δορέομαι, dat. 183. 
ill of, κακῶς λέγειν, 
acc. 35. 


"ὦ well of, εὖ λέγειν, ace 
the truth, ἀληϑεύω, 82. 
Spear, δόρυ, τό, (?) 193. 
Spend, ἀναλίσκω (?), 235. 
ee ἔαρ, τό, Zen. ἦρος 


Stadium, στάδιος, or στάδιον, 


136. 

Staff, ῥάβδος, 7, 138. 

nr παν, 35. 
tand open, avemya, Perf. 2 
193. pen, avepy 

——by and see, &c., 
περιοράω, 331, note o. 

State, πόλις (sw), 7, 8. 

» (in a town), διατρίβω, 

6. 

Steal, κλέπτω, Εἰ. M., (xéxdo- 
φα,) 73. 

Stick, ῥάβδος, 7, 183. 

Still, ἔτι, 168", 

Stomach, γαστήρ, ἕρος (9), ἥ, 
235. 

Stone, λύϑος, πέτρος, 235. 

Stop, (¢rans.) παύω, (in- 
trans.) παύομαι, 188 (1); 
with partic. 239. 

Stove, xautvog, 282. 

Straight to, εὐθύ (gen.) 30¢ 

Strange, ϑαυμαστος, 259. 

Strangle, ἀπάγχειν, 188 (1). 

Stream: flows with a full 
or strong—, πολὺς ῥεῖ. 

Strength, κράτος, 41. σϑένοι 
τό, 519. 

Strife, ἔρις, og, 7, 183. 

Strike, πλήσσω (used by the 
Attics in the perf. act¢. 


INDEX I. 225 


and in the pass. πατάσσειν 
being used for the other 
tenses),—rvmto. 

Vémel says τύπτω the 
general term for strik- 
ing on any thing: 
παίω to strike a per- 
son: to give blows 
for correction: con- 
nected with παῖς (!).— 
πλήττω is τύπτω and 
παίω strengthened. 

Strip, ἐχδύω, 125. 

Strong, ἰσχῦρός, 35. 

Succour, ἐπικουρέω, dat. also 
acc. of the thing, 239. 

Such a man as you, ὁ οἷος 
ov ἀνήρ, 271. 

Suffer (= allow), ἐάω, 121. 
-- πάσχω (of suffering 
painful things), 168". 

——a thing to be done, 
περιοράω, 391. 

—— froma disease, κάμνω, 
183. 

—-— pain, ἀλγέω, 20. 

-—— punishment, δίκην διδό- 
ναι, gen. of thing, dat. of 
person by whom, 228 

Suffering, πάϑος, 150. 

Sufficient: to be—, agzeir, 
175. 

Sufficient: more than—, 
περιττὰ τῶν ἀρκούντων, 
174, f. 

Suggestion, 243. 


Superhuman (of-—size), μεί- 


Cov 4 xat ἄνϑρωπον, 165 
d. 

Superintend, ἐπισκοπέω, 206 

Supply to, παρέχω, 214. 

Surpass, aegieyu(geen.), 156 

Surprised (am), ϑαυμάζα, 
F. M., 8. 

Surprising, ϑαυμαστός, 259 

Surprisingly, ϑαυμασίως ὡς 
273. d. 

Suspect, ὑποπτεύω, acc. of 
pers., 293". 

Swallow, χελιδών, ὄνος (7), 
341. 

Swear by, ὄμνυμι, ace. (ἢ). 
351. 

Sweet, ἡδύς, 214. 


τ. 
Table, τράπεζα, 188. 
Take, λαμβάνω (9), 92. a 
ρεῖν, 190. 
away from, ἀφαιρέω, 
125. 
——- place. See Happen. 
—_—~- care, φροντίζω, 288. 
—_— hold of, λαβέσϑαι, 163. 
-- - in hand, ἐπιχειρέω, 
dat. 121. 
-- - myself off, ἀπαλλάτ- 
τομαι, 154. Aor. 190. 4. 
-- off, ἐχδύω, 125. 
—_—-pleasure in, ἥδομαι 
dat. 20. 
- up, αἴρειν, 188 (2). 
Talent, τάλαντον, 82. 


Talk, λαλέω, 35. 


+ καμοῦμαι, κέκμηκα. 


10° 


INDEX I. 


Task, ἔργον, 121. 

Taste: give to—, allow 
to—, γεύω (acc. of person, 
gen. of thing). 

Tasted, one who has never, 
ἄγευστος, With gen. 150. 
———,to have never,=/o 
be ἄγευστος (with gen.) 
Taught, that can be—, 

διδακτός, 293". 

Teach, διδάσκω (?), 125. 

Teacher, διδάσκαλος, 168". 

Tear, δάκρυον, 168". 

—— shed, —, δακρύω, 282. 

Temper, ϑυμός, 121. 

Temperance, σωφροσυνφῆ, 
125, u. 

Temperate, σώφρων, 125, u. 

Temple, ναός (νέως, Att.), 
41. 

Ten thousand, μύριοι, 228. 

Terrible, δεινός, 214. 

Thales, Θαλῆς (7), 183. 

Than any other single per- 
son, εἷς ἀνήρ, 174. 6. εἷς γε 
ἀνὴρ ὦν, 172. 

—— ever, αὐτός with gen. 
of reciprocal pronoun, 
167. 

[Thankful to be or feel, 
χάριν εἰδέναι, gen. of thing, 
222. 

Thanks, to return, χάριν 
εἰδέναι, genitive of thing, 
222. 

That, ἐκεῖνος, 40. 


——, in order that, iva, 73. 


That (after verbs of tel 
ling’), ὅτι, 73. 

The—the, (with compar.), 
ὅσῳ---τοσούτῳ, 168". 

The one—the other, ὁ μέν 
—0o δέ, 38. 

‘The morrow (the next day), 
ἡ αὔριον, 26. 

Thebans, Θηβαῖοι, 125. 

Theft, κλοπή, 73. 

Then (time), τότε, 92. 

- (of inference), ovr, 
100. 

——- in questions, εἶτα, 
318. ἡ. ἔπειτα, 318. ὁ, 
(See 315.) 

There, ἐκεῖ, 28. 

-- (am), πάρειμι, $2. 

——-- being an opportuni- 
ty, παρόν, 250. 

——--, to be, πάρειμι. See 
91. ὃ. 

Therefore, ἐκ ταύτης τῆς ai: 
τίας, ἐκ τούτου, 222. 

Thick, δασύς, 150. 

Thickly planted with trees, 
δασὺς δένδρων, 150. 

Thine, σός, 20. 

Thing, πρᾶγμα, 8. 

Things that are; existing 
things, τὰ ὄντα, 65. 

Think, γομίζω, 52. οἴομαι 
(2 sing. oie), 87. 

happy, εὐδαιμονίζω, 
150. 
Third, τρίτος, 52. 
This, οὗτος, ὅδε, 46. 


t For εἰδέναι, see 73, note q. 


i a 


This being determined, δό- 
fav ταῦτα, 249. c. Nee 
note Ο. 

being the case, ἐκ τού- 
του, 224. 
Three, τρεῖς, τρία, 15. 
Through (of space, time, 


and means), διὰ (zov),| 


269.— (cause), διὰ (τόν), 
326. ὑπό, gen. 

- -- (the whole coun- 
try), ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, 
259. 

Throw, ῥίπτω, 235. 

Thy, oog, 20. 

Till late in the day, μέχρι 
πόῤῥω τῆς ἡμέρας, 144. 

Time, yoovos, 28. 

—-, it is, ὥρα, 65. 

—, in my, &e., ἐπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, 
65. 

Το, 288, 319. 

ΤῸ Sardis, Chios, &c., ἐπὶ 
Σάρδεων, ἐπὶ τῆς Χίου, 288. 


ΤῸ speak generally, ὡς ἔπος 
rw) J? 


εἰπεῖν, 144. 


27 


Tooth, ὀδοῦς, G. ὀδύντος, ὁ, 
20. 

Touch, ἅπτομαι, 150. 

Towards, after ‘to act in- 
solently, εἰς, 319. 

7100S; 319. εἰς, 


259. 


home, ἐπ᾿ oixor, 
288. 
Town, ἄστυ, 76, 96 
| Transact, πράττω, 8. 
Transgress, παραβαίνω, 
228. 
Treat ill, κακῶς ποιεῖν, acc. 
35. 
——— well, εὖ ποιεῖν, ace. 35. 
Treaty, σπονδαί, pl. 228. 
Tree, δένδρον (7), 144. 
Trick, τέχνη, 214. 
Troubie, πόνος, 154. 
| True, ἀληϑής, 274. 
| - happiness, 7 ὡς ay 
| ϑῶς εὐδαιμονία, 274. 
Trust (1) (=am confident) 
| génor0a, 119, note i; 193. 
— (have confidence in), 


Together with, σύν (omit-| πιστεύω, with dat. only, 


ted before αὐτῷ, αὐτῇ, &C.), 


345. 
Toil, πόνος, 154. 
T'o-morrow, αὔριον, 28. 


Too (and that—), καὶ ταῦτα, 


206. 


—-- great for, &c., compar- 
ative with ἢ κατά before a 
subst., ἢ ὥστε before in- 


fin., 168. 


—- soon (after cannot), 


2A2. e. 


| 139. 

Truth (the), zo ἀληϑές, 274. 
- - ἀλήϑεια, 214. 

Try (for murder), διώκειν 
φόνου, 35 ; (am tried,) φεύ- 
yew, gen. 

—, πειράομαι (governs 
gen.), 121. 

Tunic, χιτών, 125. 

Turn, τρέπω, 73. 

| Turned (am—into), γίγνομαι 

(2), 15. 


Re πα ΞΘ ΘᾺ 


INDEX I. 


Twice as many, διπλάσιοι, 
175. 
Two by two, κατὰ δύο, 274. 


U. 

Uncommon degree (in an), 
διαφερόντως, 235. 

Unconsciously, 242. c. 
(1), | 

Uncovered, ψτλός, 235. 

Under, ὑπό, 326. 

Undergo, ὑπομένω, 214. 

Understanding, on an, ἐπὶ 
τῷ εἶναι, &C. 227, 0. 

Undertake an expedition, 
πορεύομαι, 24. 

Unexpected, ἀπροσδόκητος, 
224. 

Unexpectedly, ἐξ ἀπροσδοκ- 
ἥτου, 224. 

Unfortunate, καχοδαίμων, 
144. 

Unjust, ἄδικος, 138. 

Unknown to myself, 
242. c. 

Unless, εἰ μή, 112. 

Until, ἄχρι, μέχρι; ἕως, ἔστε, 
306. 

Up (adv.), avo, 28. ave 
(prep.), acc. 259. 

Upper, ὁ ἄνω, 28. 

Upper-chamber, ὑπερῷον, 
96. 

Upwaras, ἄνω, 28. 

Ure. χράομαι, dat. (contr. 7) 
138. 

Used to, imperf., 95, t. 

Useless, μάταιος, 206. 

Utility, τὸ συμφέρον, 228, 


Υ. 

Vain, μάταιος, 206. 

Value, τιμάομαι, 163. 

Value very highly, πρὸ πολ 
Lov ποιεῖσϑαι, 243. περι 
πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι οἵ ἡγεῖσ" 
Pat, 282. 

Vanished, φροῦδος, 65. 

(A) vast number, μυρίοι, 228. 

Very, πάνυ, 214. περ, 78. 

| —— highly, πλείστου, 
102", ὃ. 

many, μυρίοι, 228. 
- well, ἄριστα. 

Vexed, am—at, ἄχϑομαι (7), 
dat. 20. 

Victory, νίκη, 132. 

Villages, in—, κατὰ κώμας, 
214, 

Villain, κακοῦργος, 222. 

| Villainy, κακουργία, 222. 

Violet, ἴον, 144. 

Virtue, ἀρετή, 8. 

Voluntarily, ἐϑθελοντής, οὔ; 
299, 

Volunteer (as a), ἐϑελοντής, 
299. 


W. 
Wall, v. τειχίζω, (subst.) τεῖ- 
χος, τό, 222 
Want, δέομαι, 150. 
Wanted, if I am, &c., ἐάν 
τι δέῃ, or εἴ τι δέοι,91. a. ὃ. 
War, πόλεμος. 
Ward off, ἀμύνειν τί τινις 
222. 
- from myself, ἀμν' 
νομαι, acc 222. 


INDEX 1. 229 


Was near (= almost), ὀλίγου | 
δεῖν, 283. 6. 
Wash, λούειν, 188 (1). 
Watch over, ἐγρηγορέναι περί, 
gen. 193. 
Waier, ὕδωρ, τό, 15. 
Way, ὁδός, ἡ, 154. 
Weak, ἀσϑενής, 319. 
Weakness, ἀσϑένεια, 319. 
Wealthy, πλούσιος, 20. 
Weep for, κατακλαίειν (?), 168 
(2), 278. 
Weigh anchor, αἴρειν (an- 
chor, subaud.), 188. 
Well, εὖ, 8. 
to be, καλῶς ἔχειν. 
What? τί; 
kind of ? ποῖος ; 
is, τὰ ὄντα, 65. 
comes from (the 
gods) τὰ τῶν Dear, 5A. 
comes next (to), τὰ 
ἐχομένα, JEN. 149. d. 
induces you to..? τί 
μαϑών; 313. | 
possesses you to..? 
ci nadov; 318. 
_——, to—place, ποῖ, ὅπει, 
144, 72, p. 
we ought, ἃ χρή, 91. 
(.---τὰ δέοντα, 206. 
Whatsoever, ὅστις, 92. εἴ τις, 


269. | 


When, ὅτε, ἐπειδή, ἐπειδάν, 92. 
1 πότε; 92. 
—— you, ᾿ may, καὶ aor, | 


he, &c. 


——- you ought, &c., δέον, 
250. | 


might, 250. | 


When it is your duty, δέον, 


προσήκον, 250. 
———or whereas it was 
said, εἰρημένον, 250. 
——thereis any occasion, ἐάν 
τι δέῃ (or, after an histori- 
cal tense, εἴ τι δέοι), 91. a.b 
Whence, πόϑεν, 100. 
Whenever, ὁπότε, 96. 
Where, ποῦ, 144. ὅπου, 72, p. 
Whether, εἴ, 335. ἐάν, 336. 
Which way = ὦ hither, ποῖ; 
—in dependent questions 
regularly, ὅποι, 72, p. 


Whilst, ἄχρι, ἕως, 306. 


- he was walking, pe- 
ταξὺ περιπατῶν, 288. 

Whither, ποῖ, 73, 144. in 
dependent sentences, ὅποι, 
72, p. 

Who? zis; in dependent 
sentences, regularly ὅστις, 
72, note p. 

—— inthe world? tig ποτε; 
150. 

Whole (the), ὁ πᾶς, or πᾶς ὃ, 
45. 

, ὅλος, 138. 

Whosoever, ὅστις, 92. εἴ τις, 
209. 

Why ? τί or διὰ τί; 182. 

Wicked, πονηρός, (immoral, 
vile), 188.---ἀνόσιος (one 
who breaks the divine 
and natural laws. See 
ὅσιος, in 293*,) 299. 

Wickedness, πονηρία, 188. 

Widow, χήρα, 235. 

Will certainly, 358. d. 


Sa δι 


Ν 
§ _ .-. i 
7 a pe NED LEI AAT 

_ με ἀνα τ 


para ae 


INDEX 1, 


Willing: if you are—, εἰ 
σοι βουλομένῳ ἐστί, 200. 

Willingly at least, ἑκών εἶναι, 
144. 

Wine, οἶνος, 15. 

Wing (214), πτέρυξ = ala, 
the wing with reference 
tothe wing-joint.—-arégor 
= penna, the wing with 
reference to the wing- 
feathers. (Déderlein.) 

Wisdom, σοφία, 24. 

Wise, σοφός, 20. 

Wish, 100 [distinction be- 


tween βούλομαι and édeho, | 


100}. 
With, σύν (dat.), μετά (gen.), 
24. 
-(by partic.), ἔχων, 
ἄγων, φέρων, χρώμενος, 235. 
With a view to, zoc¢ (acc.), 
319. 
what object or view, 
τί βουλόμενος, 341. 
impunity, χαίρων, 154. 
three others, τέταρτος 
αὐτός, 68. 
you (us, &c.), to be, 
πάρειμι. See 91. ὁ. 
Within, ἔνδον, 125. 
Without, ἔξω, gen. 125. ἄνευ, 
gen. 150. χωρίς, 309. δίχα, 
309. 
—__—— being dis- 
covered 


served, 


---- knowing it, 


“| Wolf, λύκος, 41. 


Woman, γυνή, R. γύναικ, V 
γύναι, 15. 

Wonder at, ϑαιμάζω, F. 
M. 8. 

Work, ἔργον, 121. 


Worthless, φαῦλος, 144. 
Worthy of, ἄξιος, 65, 150. 
Would probably have been, 
ἐκινδύνευσεν ἄν (With in- 
fin.), 359. 
rather--than, ἥδιον 
ἄν---ἥ, 87. 
| —_—— that! εἴϑε, εἴϑ᾽ ὥφελον 
| (eg,8), εἰ γὰρ ὥφελον, ὡς ὦφε- 
| Lov or ὥφελον alone, 206. 
Wound, τιτρώσκω, 269. 
| Wretched, κακοδαίμων, (ill- 
| fated), 144. ἄϑλιος, 274. 
Wrong, ἀνόσιος, 299. See 


| : 
| 293. 


| Υ, 
Year, ἔτος, τό, 144. 
You are joking, παίζεις ἔχων, 
350. g. 
—.- do nothing but, οὐδὲν 
ἄλλο 7—, 357. 
——-there! οὗτος (avzy)! 
325, ἃ. 
Young, νέος, 168". 
—— bird, νεοσσός, 214. 
Yours, ὑμέτερος, 24. 
Yourself, 48, 49. 


Ζ. 
Zeal, τό πρόϑυμον, (adj.) 
60. 


| Zealous, πρόϑῦμος, 221. 6. 


INDEX I} 


List of Parases and Worps explained.t 


A. 
(6) Kya φόβος, 228. 
ἀγαπᾷν τοῖς παροῦσι OF τὰ 
παρόντα, 70. 
ἄγων (= with), 235, 
( ποιεῖν αὶ p. 107, 
ἡ ποιῶν § note b. 
αἰτεῖσϑαι (mid.), not with 
two accusatives, 124, note 


᾽ 
αἰσχύνομαι 


“λέξανδρος ὃ Φιλίππου, 23. 
ἄλλο τι ἤ----; ἄλλοτι; 318. 
ἄλλως τε καί, 278. 

ἁλῶναι κλοπῆς, 73. 
ἀμφότερον (-α), 345. 

av? ὧν, 267. 

ἄνω, 8. 

ἀπὸ σοῦ ἀρξάμενος, 100. 
—- δείπνου γενέσϑαι, 243. 
--- τοῦ προφανοῦς, 243. 
ἀποδιδράσκειν τινά, 138. 
ἀρχήν ΟΥ τὴν ἀρχήν, 192. 
ἀρχόμενος, 290. 

αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν, 350. 

αὐτός, 39. αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ, 166. 


ag ἑαυτῶν, 243. 


B. 
βίου ev ἥκειν, 206. 


A. 

δεδογμένον, 249, note n. 

δεινότατος σαυτοῦ ἦσϑα, 168 
note m. 

| δέον, 249. a. 

δῆλός εἶμι, 239. 

διαλιπὼν χρόνον, 235. 

3: ὀργῆς ἔχειν, &., 270. 

δίκαιός εἰμι, 358. 

δίκην διδόναι (gen.), 228. 

διώκειν φόνου, 35. 

δοκοῦν, 249, note n. 

δόξαν (δόξαν ταῦτα, &c.), 
249. c. 

δορὶ ἑλεῖν, 193, note u. 

δυνατώτεροι αὐτοὶ αὑτῶν, 
168. c. 


δυοῖν δέοντα (not Seovrow), 


283. 


E. 


᾿δαυτοῦ εἶναι, 162". ὁ, 


+ Phrases not found here may be looked for ‘n their Alphabetica. 


slace in the last section. 


i. nasal _ 


νἱ SP a Ty ae ee -- ἶα 
ἘΠ ΓΙῸ. αν tt = — —— 
" - ano pecenenenaa ee 


| 
ἢ ᾿ 
ἢ 
Ἶ 
Li 


ὡμ οἵα, 
τὸ, ΠΡ ra 


9282 INDEX II. 


ἐγκαλεῖν τί τινι, 183. 

εἴ σοι βουλομένῳ ἔστιν, 206. 

εἰ μέλλει γενέσϑαι, 283. 

εἰ μὴ διά, 125. 

— εἰς, 268. 

__- “αἱ ἄλλος, 174. d. 

si’ ὥφελον (ες; 2), 206. 

εἴργω, εἴργω, 154, note Ὁ. 

εἰρημένον, 250. 

εἷς ἀνήρ, 174. 6. 

εἰς διδασκάλου (πέμπειν, φοι- 
τᾷν), 259. 

— tiv Φιλίππου, 23. 

εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες = note 

ot λέγουσι δ. ἃ. 

ἐχινδύνευσεν ἂν διαφϑαρῆναι, 
359. 

ἑχὼν εἶναι, 144. 

ἐμποδὼν εἶναι, 293". 

ἐν τοῖ: πρῶτος, 259. 

ἕνεκα τῶν ἑτέρων, 900. 

ἔνδον καταλαβεῖν, 125. 

ἐξ ἀπροσδοκήτου, 224. 

ἐξόν, 249. ὃ. 

ἐπὶ ἐμοί, 65. 

ἐπὶ ἐμοῦ, 09. 

ἐπὶ τῷ εἶναι, 227. ὃ. 

ἐπικουρεῖν νόσῳ, 299. 

ἐστιν οἵ (= ἔνιοι), 263. 

___—. ovotivag.... 3 209. ἃ. 

εὐϑὺ τὴς πόλεως, 309. 

εὐθὺς ἥκων, 909. 

ἐφ ᾧ or ᾧτε, 266. 

ἔχεσϑαΐίτινος, 149. d. 

ἔχων (= with), 2385. 


Hi. 
ἡ αὔριον, 27. 
ἢ κατά, With acc. 108, d. 


[ἢ ὥστε, With infin. 168. 6. 


ἡ πολλὴ τῆς χώρας (not τὸ 
πολύ), 58. 

ἡδέως ἂν ϑεασαίμην, 86". 

ἧπερ εἶχεν, 901. 


Θ. 
ϑαυμάσας ἔχω, 350. 
ϑαυμασίως ὡς, 273. d. 
ϑαυμαστὸν ὅσον, 273. 6. 


ϑεῖναι ἐν... 
ἀῶ ἰ νόμους, 188, (3.) 


K. 
καὶ og, 40. 6. 


— ravra, 206. 


| κατέρχομαι; 270. 
| κάτω, 28, note x. 


κυνὸς δικην, 250. 


λανϑάνω, With partic. 242. ¢ 
λέγειν, (εὖ, κακῶς, &c.), 35. 
ληρεῖς ἔχων, 900. ν΄. 


Μ. 

μὰ Δία, 841. 
μανϑάνω (with part.) 239. 
μεγάλα ὠφελεῖν, βλάπτειν, S&C 

82, Obs. 
μέλλω γράφειν, ὅζο., 283. 
μεταμέλει (with part .), 239. 
μεταξὺ περιπατῶν, 288. 
μέχρι πόῤῥω τῆς ἡμέρας, 144, 
μύριοι, μυρίοι, 228 


Ν. 
γὴ Δία, 341. 


INDEX I. 


0. 
υ δέ, 40. 
ὁ ἥμισυς τοῦ χρόνου, 59. 6. 
ὁ οἷος σὺ ἀνήρ, 273. 


οἱ ἀμφὶ "Ἄνυτον, 283", note x. 


- γῆν ἔχοντες, 278. 

— πολλοί, 45. 

— προσήκοντες, 249. 

οἷός τέ εἶμι, 283. 

οἵων (= ὅτι τοιούτων), 258, ὃ. 
ὀλίγου δέω, δεῖν, &C., 283. 
ὄμνυμι (τοὺς ϑεούςῚ, 351. 
ὅπως ἀνήρ ἔσει, 287". 

ὅσον ov, 125. 


σ , 
ὅσους ἠδύνατοπλείστους,174.0. 


ὅσῳ---τοσούτῳ, 108". 

ὅτι μέγιστος, 174. ὃ. 

ov μὴ λαλήσεις ; S&c., 287". 
— παντὸς εἶναι, 10 2", ὁ. 


οὗ, not simply reflexive, but 


used in dependent sen- 
tences to denote the sub- 
ject of the principal sen- 
tence, 50, p. 29. 

— ἕ not used by Attic prose- 
writers, except Plato, 50, 
p. 29. 

οὐκ ἔστιν, 86", d. 

—- ty (= non habeo), 72. ὃ. 

οὐδεὶς ὅστις ov, 277. 

οὐδὲν οἷον ἀκοῦσαι, 278. 

τι, 150. 

οὗτος! 325. d. 

οὕτως ἔχειν, 72. 6. 

οὐχ ὅτι---ἀλλὰ καί, 82. 


Π. 
παρὰ μικρὸν ἐλϑεῖν, &c. 299. 


πᾶσα ἡ πόλις, 45. d. 

—— πόλις, 45. d. 

πέμπτος αὐτός, &c., 51. d. 
περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι, 233". 
περιορᾷν, 331. 

περιττὰ τῶν ἀρκούντων, 174. f 
πέφυκε, 208. 

ποιεῖν (εὖ, κακῶς), 35. 
πολλαπλάσιοι ἡμῶν, 174. f. 
πολὺς ῥεῖ, 132. 

πόῤῥω τῆς ἡλικίας, 143. 

πρὸ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσϑαι, 243. 
προσέχειν, 591. 

προσῆκον, 250. 


Σ. 
σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ (συφος ὦν οἱ 
σοφῷ ὄντι), 238". b. 
σχολῇ (ποιήσω), 112. 


a 
ταχύτερα ἢ σοφώτερα, 174. a 
τελευτῶν, 235. 
τίμαϑών; 317. 
— παϑών; 317. 
tig ποτε; 150. 
τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε, 34". f. 
— γε νῦν εἶναι, 206. 
— ἐπὶ τούτοις εἶναι, 206. 
— πρόϑυμον, 60. 
— τελευταῖον, 34”. f. 
τοῦ (with infin.), 216. 
τοὐναντίον, 137. 
τοὔνομα, 137. 
τούτου ye ἕνεκα, 250, 
τῷ ὄντι, 65. 


Φ. 


nag ὀλίγον διέφευγον, &C.299. φέρων (with), 235. 


INDEX Il. 


φέρων, 350. ἡ. 
φεύγειν φόνου, 35. 
, Ξε φυγεῖν, 270. ρ΄. 
φϑάνω(δως.) 242. ἀ. c.f. 358. 
Ὁ. 6. a. 


Χ. 
χάριν ἐμήν, 250. 
χρώμενος (= with), 235. 


Q. 
ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, 444, 
--- συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, 444, 
— τάχιστα, 174. b. 
— τάχους εἶχον, 278. 


᾿ὥσπερ εἶχεν, 801. 
| ὥφελον, 206. 


INDEX III. 


List of Worps that have some irregularity of DECLEN: 


sION or CoNJUGATION. 


A. 
ἄγνυμι, 193. 
“do, EF’. M., 108". 
ἀηδών, 941. 
αἱρέω, 190. 
αἰσϑάνομαι, 190. 
ἀκούω, E. M., 92. 
ἁλίσκομαι, 73. 
ἅλλομαι, 274. 
ἁμαρτάνω, 154. 
ἀνέχομαι, 214, note i. 
ἀνέῳγα, ἀνέῳγμαι,193; note q. 
ἀνοίγω, 1 
ἀποκρίνομαι, 278. 
ἀπολαύω, 259. 
᾿Απόλλων, 341. 
ἀρέσκω, 991. 
ἀρχέω, EF’. ἔσω, 175. 
ἄχϑομαι, 90. 


B. 
βαίνω, 228. 


7 
γάλα, 132. 
γελάω, ἄσομαι, 278 
γίγνομαι, 15. 


γιγνώσκω, 156. 
γόνυ, 20. 
γυνή, 15. 


δεῖ, 60. 

δείδω, 299". 
δένδρον, 144. 
διδάσκω, 125. 
διδράσκω, 138. 
διψάω, 131, note ὃ. 
δόρυ, 193. 

δοκέω, 90. 

δύναμαι, 87. 

δύω, 125. 


Ε. 
ἔαρ, 941. 
εἶμι (tbo), 65. 
εἶπον, 60. 
ἐλαύνω, 24. 
ἐπαινέω, gen., Ε΄. M., 60. 
ἐπίσταμαι, 293". 
ἕπομαι, 183. 
ἐράω, 274. 
ἔρχομαι, 112. 
ἐσϑίω, 144 


Sa ee 


--- ee 


— --π -π α΄ - -- - 


—— 


εὑρίσκω, 87. 
ἔχω, 15. 


Ζ. 
ζάω, 131, note b. 


H. 
ἥκω, 206. 
ἥμισυς, 58. 
Ἡρακλῆς, 183. 


ἠρόμην, 13. 


Θ. 
Θαλῆς, 183. 
ϑνήσκω, 125. 
ϑυγάτηρ, 20 


I. 
ixveopecet, 242, note k. 


K. 
κλαίω, 150. 
κλέπτω, F. M., 73. 
κολάζω, F. M., 121. 
κρίνον, 144. 
κύων, 41. 


A, 
λαμβάνω, 92. 
χανϑάνω, 154. 


χύω, 190. 


M. 
μαίνομαι, 125. 


μάχομαι, 73. 
μήτηρ, 20. 


N. 
ψαῦς, 125. 


INDEX III. 


O 
ὀδούς, 20. 
oto, 150. 
οἶδα, 73, Note }. 
οἴκαδε, 391. 
οἴομαι, 87. 
ὄϊς, 41, note » 
οἴχομαι, 206, 1>te 8 
ὄλλυμι, 193. 
ὄμνυμι, 343, note 8. 
ὁράω, 73. 
ὄρνις, 15. 
οὖς, 20. 
ὀφείλω, 206. 


11. 
παίζω, 343, note τι. 
πασχω, 168". 
newao, 131, note b. 
πήγνυμι, 193. 
πίνω, 144. 
πίπτω, 293". 
πλέω, 188. 
πορεύομαι, 24. 
Ποσειδῶν, 341. 
ποῦς, 20. 
πρᾷος, 138. 


Σ. 
σιγάω, ἘΝ. M., 2609", 
σῖτος, 259, note v. 
σκοπῶ, 336, note ἱ, 
στεροῦμαι, 108", 
Σωχράτης, 15. 


x. 
τέμνω, 46, note q. 
τίχτω, 15. 
τιτρώσκω, 209", 


τρέχω, 65. 
τυγχάνω, 183. 


ὕδωρ, 15. 


φέρω, Οὔ. 


᾿ 


Φ. 


INDEX III. 
φϑάνω, 241. 


X. 
χείρ, 20. 
χελιδών, 941. 
χράομαι, 131, note ὃ, 
χρή, 91, note i 


-~ πόσες “πος ᾿ = = ες“ 


-.---- --ἕ -“-“ῇ“Φ«ΤΠπΙτν tectl -- -- 
ΒΝ ον μα 


εὐντοὦῶὦν ae ν ag acts Tend Ap cree πονοπην 


2 


FF a te A IS UE Plt anaemia DE ANS αὶ 


-OLUMBIA UNIVERSITY 


‘Ar 
1! 


ΓᾺ ΤᾺ 


. 
Standard Classical W orks. | | | | | | 
ΓΛ 


Arnold’s First Greek Book,* on the Plan of the First Latin 
Book. 12mo. 297 pages. 


Arnold’s Practical Introduction to Greek Prose 
᾿ς Composition.* 12mo. 237 pages, 


Arnold’s Second Part to the Above.* 1i12mo. 248 
pages. 


’ 
Arnold’s Greek Reading Book. Containing the Sub- 
stance of the Practical Introduction to Greek Construing and a 
Treatise on the Greek Particles; also, Copious Selections from 


ν᾿ Greek Authors, with Critical and Explanatory English Notes and 


a Lexicon. 12mo. 618 pages, 
Dr. Arnold’s Greck Courses have been carefully revised, corrected, 
and improved by J. A. SPENCER, D.D., making them ἃ thorough, prac- 


tical, and easy Greek course. 


Roise’s Exercises in Greek Prose Composition. 
| Adapted to the First Book of Xenophon’s Anabasis. By JAMES 
R. Boss, Professor of Greek in University of Michigan. 12mo. 
185 pages. 


Champlin’s Short and Comprehensive Greek 
L Grammar, By J. T. ΟΠΑΜΡΙΑΝ, Professor of Greek and Latin 


» 
in Waterville College. 12mo, 208 pages. 


First Lessons in Greek 3" ©, the Beginner's Companion- 
Book to Hadley’s Grammar. By James Morris Wuirton, rector 


of Hopkins Grammar School, New Haven, Ct. (Recently pub- 
lished.) 12mo. 


Hadley’s Greek Grammar,®* for Schools and Colleges. By 
James Haptey, Professor in Yale College. (Recently published.) 


12mo, 366 pages. 


Herodotus, Selections From 5 Comprising mainly such 
portions as give a Connected History of the East, to the Fall of 
Babylon and the Death of Cyrus the Great. By Herman M, 
Jounson, D.D., Professor of Philosophy and English Literature 


in Dickinson College. 12mo. 1585 pages. 


| Kuhner’s Greek Grammar. Translated by Professors 


Epw&Args and Taytor. Large 12mo. 620 pages, τῇ 
a es : Wr. UY ew | 
4 Gwe 
».. 
' dail eee 


Ζ 2 


